environmental impact assessment › publichearings › twmp, kakkireni (v), nalgo… ·...

Environmental Impact Assessment

of Proposed Telangana Waste Management Project

at Kakkireni Village, Nalgonda District (Telangana)

Proponent

Mumbai Waste Management Limited, Taloja,

Mumbai

Consultant

Ramky Enviro Engineers Limited, Hyderabad

(NABET/EIA/SA/010 dated 06.10.2015)

April 2016

Draft Report for Public Hearing

for Proposed Telangana Waste Management Project, at Kakkireni Village, Nalgonda District, Telangana

(Draft Report for Public Hearing)

Submitted to

Telangana State Pollution Control Board A-3, Paryavaran Bhavan, Sanath Nagar Industrial Estate, Hyderabad,

Telangana 500 018

Submitted by Mumbai Waste Management Limited, Plot No: P-32, MIDC Taloja, Raighad District, Maharashtra 410208

Consultant

Ramky Enviro Engineers Limited (Consultancy Division) Ramky Grandiose, 2nd Floor, Gachibowli, Hyderabad – 500 032

NABET/EIA/SA/010 dt: 06.10.15

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Telangana Waste Management Project (TWMP) at Nalgonda District (TS). 2016

M/s Ramky Enviro Engineers Limited 1

Table of Contents

QCI/ NABET Certificate

Declaration of Experts

Terms of Reference (TOR)

TOR Compliance

Executive Summary

S. No. Description Page No.

Chapter 1 Introduction

1.1 Introduction 1.1

1.2 Purpose of Report 1.1

1.3 Identification of Project and Project Proponent 1.2

1.3.1 Project 1.2

1.3.2 Project Proponent 1.2

1.3.3 Ramky Group Waste Management Division 1.2

1.4 Brief description of nature, size, location of the project and its importance

to the country and region

1.4

1.4.1 Importance of the Project 1.4

1.5 Scope of the Study 1.9

1.5.1 EIA Report 1.11

Chapter 2 Project Description

2.1 Type of the Project 2.1

2.2 Need for the Project 2.1

2.2.1 Justification of the Project 2.1

2.3 Location of the Project 2.2

2.3.1 Capacities of the Proposed Project 2.7

2.3.2 Justification for using 74 Acres of Land for the project 2.7

2.4 Size of Operation and its Associated Activities 2.9

2.4.1 Land Area Breakup 2.10

2.4.2 Required Manpower 2.10

2.4.3 Water Requirement 2.10

2.4.4 Power and Fuel Requirement 2.11

2.5 Process Description of Hazardous Wastes 2.11

2.5.1 Laboratory Facilities 2.13

2.5.2 Collection and Transportation 2.14

2.5.3 Storages 2.14

2.5.4 Waste Disposable Operations 2.15



2.5.4.1 Waste Stabilization 2.15

2.5.4.2 Secured Landfill 2.17

2.5.4.3 Leachate Management 2.19

2.5.5 Incinerator 2.22

2.6 Bio Medical Waste 2.23

2.6.1 Waste Classification and Characterization as per BMW rules 2.24

2.6.2 Color Coding and Type of Container for Disposal of Bio-Medical Wastes 2.26

2.6.3 Collection and Transportation 2.26

2.6.4 Disinfection and Destruction 2.26

2.6.5 Bio Medical Waste Incineration 2.27

2.6.6 Autoclave 2.27

2.6.6.1 Autoclave Features 2.27

2.6.7 Other Infrastructure 2.28

2.7 E Waste Recycling 2.28

2.7.1 Methodology 2.29

2.7.2 Process Description 2.29

2.8 Recycling Facilities 2.32

2.8.1 Spent Solvent Recycling 2.32

2.8.1.1 Process Description 2.32

2.8.2 Used Oil Recycling 2.34

2.8.3 Alternative Fuel and Raw Material Facility 2.35

2.8.4 Used Lead acid Battery Recycling 2.37

2.8.4.1 Used Lead Acid Battery Recycling Process 2.37

2.8.5 Waste Plastic Recycling 2.41

2.8.6 Waste Paper Recycling 2.42

2.8.6.1 Process for Paper Recycling 2.43

2.9 Energy 2.43

2.9.1 Renewable Energy 2.43

2.9.2 Solar Power System 2.44

2.9.2.1 Ground Mounted Solar System 2.44

2.9.2.2 Solar System Weight Considerations 2.45

2.9.2.3 Wind Loading 2.45

2.9.2.4 Photovoltaic Power Generation 2.46

2.9.3 Weather Monitoring Station 2.47

2.9.4 Plant Layout 2.47

2.9.5 Operation and Maintenance 2.48

2.9.5.1 Operation and Maintenance Practices 2.49

2.9.6 Proposed System 2.52

2.10 Waste to Energy 2.52

Chapter 3 Description of the Environment



3.1 Preamble 3.1

3.2 Meteorological Conditions 3.1

3.2.1 Analysis of the IMD Data 3.1

3.2.2 Meteorological Scenario of the Study Area 3.2

3.3 Wind Pattern 3.3

3.4 Ambient air quality 3.8

3.4.1 Regional Scenario 3.13

3.5 Water environment 3.17

3.5.1 Water Quality Assessment 3.17

3.5.2 Regional Scenario 3.25

3.6 Noise Environment 3.26

3.6.1 Noise Levels in the Study Area 3.27

3.6.2 Observations 3.30

3.7 Traffic Study 3.30

3.8 Soil quality 3.32

3.8.1 Criteria adopted for selection of sampling locations 3.32

3.8.2 Observations 3.37

3.9 Ecological Environment 3.38

3.9.1 Objectives of Ecological and Biodiversity studies 3.39

3.9.2 Methodology adopted for the survey 3.39

3.9.3 Flora 3.39

3.9.4 Fauna 3.41

3.9.5 National Parks/ Wild life Sanctuaries 3.43

3.9.6 Endangered animals 3.43

3.10 Google Imagery and Topo map for 10 km radius 3.44

3.11 Land Use land Cover 3.44

3.12 Socio Economic Survey 3.48

3.12.1 Demography and Socio-Economics (secondary data description) 3.48

3.12.2 Methodology Adopted for the Study 3.48

3.12.3 Distribution of Population 3.48

3.12.3.1 Average Household Size 3.49

3.12.3.2 Population Density 3.49

3.12.3.3 Sex Ratio 3.49

3.12.4 Social Structure 3.49

3.12.5 Literacy Levels 3.50

3.12.6 Occupational Structure 3.50

3.12.6.1 Dependency Ratio 3.51

3.12.7 Infrastructure and accessibility; Primary Observations 3.51

Chapter 4 Anticipated Impacts And Mitigation Measures

4.1 Identification of Impacts 4.1



4.2 Methodology 4.1

4.3 Potential Impacts 4.1

4.4 Prediction of Impacts 4.2

4.4.1 Impacts during Development Phase 4.2

4.4.2 Impact on Air Quality 4.2

4.4.2.1 Mitigation Measures Proposed – Air Quality 4.3

4.4.3 Impact on Water Quality 4.3

4.4.3.1 Mitigation Measures – Water Quality 4.4

4.4.4 Impact of Noise Levels 4.4

4.4.4.1 Mitigation Measures 4.4

4.4.5 Impact Due to Solid Waste Generation 4.4

4.4.5.1 Mitigation Measures for Solid Waste 4.5

4.4.6 Impact on Land Use 4.5

4.4.7 Demographic and Socio Economic 4.6

4.5 Impact during Operation 4.6

4.5.1 Prediction of Impacts on the Air Environment 4.6

4.5.2 Atmospheric Dispersion of Stack Emissions 4.6

4.5.3 Pollution Sources 4.7

4.5.3.1 Area Sources 4.7

4.5.3.2 Point Sources 4.7

4.5.4 Air Pollution Mitigation Measures 4.12

4.5.4.1 DG Set 4.12

4.5.4.2 Incinerator 4.12

4.5.4.3 Secured Landfill 4.12

4.6 Impact on Water Quality 4.12

4.6.1 Leachate Collection/ Treatment and Disposal 4.13

4.6.2 Water Impacts Mitigation Measures 4.14

4.7 Rain Water Harvesting and Strom Water Management 4.14

4.8 Noise Environment 4.14

4.8.1 Noise Mitigation Measures 4.14

4.9 Prediction of Impacts on Land Environment 4.15

4.10 Predicted Impacts of the Landfill 4.15

4.11 Impacts on the Community 4.15

4.12 Impact on Ecology 4.16

4.13 Impact on Socio Economics 4.16

4.14 Odour Management 4.16

4.14.1 Odour Control Measures 4.17

Chapter 5 Analysis of Alternatives Technology & Site


5.1.1 Site Selection 5.1



5.1.2 Compliance of the Site with Site Selection Criteria 5.2

5.2 Technological Aspects 5.8

5.2.1 Waste Minimization 5.8

5.2.2 Recycling Wastes 5.9

5.2.3 Treatment of Waste 5.9

5.2.4 Collection, Transportation and Disposal 5.11

5.3 Disposal of Hazardous Waste 5.11

5.3.1 Landfill Disposal 5.11

5.3.2 Incineration 5.12

5.3.2.1 Advantages 5.12

5.3.2.2 Waste Input 5.12

5.3.3 Dumping at Sea 5.13

5.3.4 Underground Disposal 5.13

5.4 Plasma Gasification 5.14

5.4.1 Feedstock 5.15

5.4.2 Commercialization 5.15

5.4.3 Pros and Cons of Plasma Gasification 5.16

5.4.4 Conclusion 5.16

5.5 No Project Option 5.16

Chapter 6 Environmental Monitoring Program

6.1 Environmental Monitoring Program 6.1

6.2 Construction Phase 6.1

6.3 Operation Phase 6.4

6.4 Post Operational Phase 6.5

6.5 Environmental Laboratory Equipment 6.6

6.5.1 Environmental Management Cell 6.7

6.6 Pollution Monitoring Facilities 6.8

6.6.1 Reporting Schedules of the Monitoring Data 6.8

6.6.2 Public Health Monitoring 6.8

6.6.3 Budgetary Provision for EMP 6.8

Chapter 7Additional Studies

7.1 Risk Assessment & Disaster Management Plan 7.1

7.1.1 Risk Analysis 7.1

7.1.2 Evaluating Hazards 7.1

7.2 Identification of Major Hazard Installations Based On GOI Rules, 1989 as

amended in 1994 & 2000

7.2

7.2.1 Identification of Toxic, Flammable, Explosive Chemicals 7.2

7.2.2 Applicability of Manufacture, Storage and Import of Hazardous Chemicals

Rules, 1989 & subsequent amendments

7.3

7.2.3 Storage facilities of hazardous chemicals 7.4



7.2.4 Nature Of Possible Hazards 7.4

7.2.5 Maximum credible accident analysis for diesel storage area 7.5

7.3 On-Site Emergency Plan 7.10

7.3.1 Elements of Planning 7.10

7.3.1.1 Emergency Personnel’s Responsibility during Normal Office Hours 7.10

7.4 Infrastructure 7.11

7.5 Operational Systems During Emergency 7.11

7.5.1 Communication System 7.11

7.5.2 Warning System & Control 7.11

7.5.3 Mutual Aid 7.12

7.6 Disaster Management Plan 7.12

7.6.1 An earthquake 7.13

7.6.2 Cyclone leading to land fill flood Control measures during planning and

operation

7.14

7.6.3 Major explosion of chemicals / fire and toxic gas release in landfill or

Stores Control measures during planning

7.15

7.6.4 Contamination of soil and water sources due to leakage of contaminants

Control measures

7.17

7.6.5 Release of toxic gases from incinerator 7.18

7.7 Hazard Control Measures 7.19

7.7.1 Fire 7.19

7.7.2 Natural Disasters 7.19

7.7.3 Electrical Accidents 7.21

7.7.3.1 Prevention of Electrical Accidents 7.21

7.7.3.2 First Aid and Emergency Procedures 7.23

7.8 Full Mock Drill Monitoring 7.23

7.8.1 Steps of Mock Drills 7.23

7.9 Geological Studies 7.24

7.9.1 Introduction 7.24

7.9.2 Objectives 7.24

7.9.3 Site Topography 7.24

7.10 Regional Geology 7.24

7.10.1 Local Geology 7.25

7.11 Geophysical Investigations 7.25

7.11.1 DC Resistivity Meter 7.26

7.11.2 Electrical Resistivity Tests (ERT) 7.26


7.11.4 Test Results 7.28

7.12 Surface Soil Infiltration Tests 7.41

7.12.1 Theory 7.43




7.12.3 Results 7.44

7.13 Hydrogeology 7.48

7.13.1 Natural Drainage 7.48

7.14 Well Inventory 7.50

7.15 Artificial Recharge 7.53

Chapter 8 Project Benefits


8.2 Benefits of Hazardous Waste Management 8.1

8.3 Benefits of E Waste Recycling 8.1

8.3.1 Materials Recovered from E Waste 8.2

8.4 Benefits from Bio Medical Waste 8.2

8.5 Benefits of Landfill 8.2

8.6 Benefits from Recycling Facilities 8.2

8.6.1 Used Lead Acid Battery Recycling 8.3

8.6.2 Used Oil Recycling 8.3

8.6.3 Spent Solvent Recycling 8.4

8.6.4 Benefits of Alternate Fuel Raw material Facility 8.4

8.6.5 Waste Plastic Recycling 8.5

8.6.6 Waste Paper Recycling 8.5

8.7 Improvements in the Physical Infrastructure 8.5

8.8 Improvements in the Social Infrastructure 8.5

8.9 Employment Potential 8.6

8.10 Other Tangible Benefits 8.6

8.11 SWOT Analysis 8.7

8.11.1 Materials and Methods 8.9

8.11.2 Stage 1 8.9

8.11.3 Stage 2 8.9

8.11.4 Landfill Site Condition 8.9

8.11.5 Strategies derived from the SWOT profile of the landfill 8.10

8.12 Conclusion 8.10

Chapter 9 Environmental Management Plan


9.2 Environmental Management During Construction 9.1

9.2.1 Air Quality Mitigation Measure 9.1

9.2.2 Water Quality Mitigation Measure 9.2


9.2.4 Solid Waste Mitigation Measures 9.2

9.2.5 Ecological Aspects 9.3

9.2.6 Site Security 9.3



9.3 Management during Operation Phase 9.5

9.3.1 Air Quality Management 9.5

9.3.2 Odor Control 9.6

9.3.3 Gas Management 9.6

9.3.4 Water Quality Mitigation Measures 9.6


9.3.6 Solid Waste Mitigation Measures 9.7

9.4 Post Operation of Landfill 9.9

9.5 Socio Economic Development Activities under CEP 9.9

9.5.1 Planning 9.10

9.5.2 Implementation 9.10

9.5.3 Possible Areas of Activities under CEP 9.12

9.6 Occupational Health Management 9.13

9.7 Fire Protection System 9.13

9.8 Environmental Management Cell 9.14

9.8.1 Record Keeping and Reporting 9.14

9.9 E-Waste Management and Handling Rules 2011 9.15

9.10 Action Plan for Complying Performance Evaluation & Monitoring of

TSDF

9.16

9.11 Compliance of Hazardous Waste Rules 2008 9.18

Chapter 10 Summary and Conclusion


10.2 Baseline Environmental Status 10.2

10.3 Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures 10.5

10.4 Environmental Monitoring Program 10.8

10.5 Risk Analysis 10.8

10.6 Project Benefits 10.8

10.7 Environmental Management Plan 10.9

10.8 Conclusions 10.9

Chapter 11 Disclosure of Consultants

11.1 Ramky Group 11.1

11.2 Ramky Enviro Engineers Limited 11.1

11.2.1 Consultancy Services 11.1

11.2.2 Laboratory services 11.2

11.2.3 Training services 11.2

11.2.4 Field Services 11.2

11.2.5 Treatment Plant Services 11.2

11.2.6 Solid Waste Management Services 11.3



List of Tables

Table No. Description Page No.


1.1 Features of the Site 1.4

1.2 Chronology of Events for Obtaining EC 1.12


2.1 District wise Hazardous waste generating units 2.1

2.2 Proposed Project Capacities 2.7

2.3 Individual Units List 2.9

2.4 Land Area Breakup 2.10

2.5 Manpower Details 2.10

2.6 Water Requirement 2.10

2.7 Power and Fuel Requirement 2.11

2.8 Stabilization Mechanism based on Waste Characteristics 2.16

2.9 Categories of Bio Medical Waste 2.24


3.1 Meteorological Data from IMD (1971-2000) 3.2

3.2 Observed Meteorological Data Onsite 3.3

3.3 Frequency Distribution – December 2015 3.4

3.4 Frequency Distribution – January 2016 3.5

3.5 Frequency Distribution – February 2016 3.6

3.6 Frequency Distribution December 2015 – February 2016 3.7

3.7 Air Quality Monitoring Locations 3.9

3.8 Ambient Air Quality Levels PM10, PM2.5 (μg /m3) 3.11

3.9 Ambient Air Quality Levels SO2, NOX (μg /m3) 3.11

3.10 Ambient Air Quality Levels O3, CO (μg /m3) 3.12

3.11 Ambient Air Quality Levels C6H6, NH3 (μg /m3) 3.12

3.12 Ambient Air Quality Levels (Lead, Nickel, Arsenic, (μg /m3)), Benzo (a)

Pyrene-ng/m3)

3.13

3.13 NAAQ/CPCB Standards for Ambient Air Quality 3.16

3.14 Water Quality Monitoring Locations 3.18

3.15 (A) Ground Water samples analysis 3.20

(B) Ground Water samples analysis 3.21

3.16 Surface Water analysis 3.22

3.17 Noise monitoring locations 3.27

3.18 Noise Levels in the Study Area – dB (A) 3.29

3.19 Muthkur- Narketpally Road (Adjacent to the site) 3.31

3.20 NH 9 (Hyderabad to Vijayawada) (To &Fro) 3.32

3.21 Soil sampling locations 3.33

3.22 Soil Analysis Report 3.35



3.23 List of Flora in the Study Area 3.40

3.24 Plants of Economic importance 3.41

3.25 List of Fauna in the Study Area 3.42

3.26 The details of the land use present in the 10 km study area 3.45

3.27 Distribution of population in the study area 3.49

3.28 Distribution of population by social structure 3.50

3.29 Distribution of literate and literacy rates 3.50

3.30 Occupational structure 3.51

3.31 Demographic details in the study area of 10 Km radius 3.56


4.1 Stack Emissions Details 4.7

4.2 24 Hours Mean Meteorological Data for Winter Season 4.8

4.3 Post Project Scenario – Units: μg/m3 4.8

4.4 Wastewater Generation Details 4.13


5.1 Rejection or Knock-Out Criteria 5.3

5.2 Siting Criteria for Alternate Sites 5.4

5.3 Site Evaluation – Selected Site - (HAZWAMS/25/2002-2003) 5.6


6.1 Environmental Measures during Construction Phase 6.1

6.2 Environmental Monitoring during Operational Phase 6.4

6.3 Environmental Monitoring during Post Operation phase 6.6

6.4 Equipment Needed for Environmental Monitoring 6.7

6.5 Budget of Implementation of Environmental Management Plan 6.9

Chapter 7 Additional Studies

7.1 Description of applicable provisions of GOI rules’1989 as amended in1994 &

2000

7.3

7.2 Details of Chemicals and Applicability of GOI rules 7.4

7.3 Hazardous Chemicals at Site 7.6

7.4 Effect of Heat Radiation 7.7

7.5 Heat Radiation and Fatality 7.8

7.6 Scenario (pool fire) 7.8

7.7 First Aid for Burns 7.23

7.8 Wells Inventoried in Surrounding Villages 7.52

Chapter 9 Environmental Management Plan

9.1 Mitigation Measures during Construction Phase 9.4

9.2 Mitigation Measure proposed during Operation Phase 9.7

9.3 Mitigation Measure proposed during Post Operation Phase 9.9

9.4 Budget for CSR activities 9.13

9.5 Record Keeping Particulars 9.14



9.6 Compliance E Waste Management Rules 2011 9.15

9.7 Action Plan for Monitoring TSDF 9.17

9.8 Compliance of Hazardous Waste Rules 2008 9.18

List of Figures

Figure No. Description Page No.


1.1 Location Map of the Site 1.6

1.2 Topographical Map of the Study Area 1.7

1.3 Google Image 2 km Radius 1.8


2.1 Topo Map of the Proposed Site (2 km) 2.3



2.4 Site Photographs 2.6

2.5 Layout of the Proposed site 2.8

2.6 Cross section of the landfill 2.19

2.7 Typical Layout of incinerator 2.23

2.8 Layout of Autoclave Sterilization Process 2.28

2.9 E Waste proposed Flow Chart 2.31

2.10 Flow Chart of Spent Solvent Recovery 2.33

2.11 Waste/ Used Oil Recycling Plant 2.34

2.12 Alternative Fuel and Raw Material Facility 2.36

2.13 Used Lead Acid Battery Recycling 2.38

2.14 Lead Alloys Manufacturing 2.39

2.15 Process flow sheet of plastic recycling 2.42

2.16 PV Panels for Generating Solar Energy 2.44

2.17 Solar Plant 2.46

2.18 Layout of PV Technology 2.48

2.19 Components of Solar Plant 2.48


3.1 Wind Rose - December 2015 3.4

3.2 Wind Rose – January 2016 3.5

3.3 Wind Rose – February 2016 3.6

3.4 Wind Rose December 2015 to February 2016 3.7

3.5 Air Quality Monitoring Locations 3.10

3.6 Ground Water Quality Sampling Locations 3.23

3.7 Surface Water Quality Sampling Locations 3.24

3.8 Noise Monitoring Locations 3.28



3.9 Soil Sampling Locations 3.34

3.10 Sensitivity Map 3.44

3.11 Satellite Imagery 3.46

3.12 Land use Land cover 3.47


4.1 Predicted 24- Hourly Average GLCs of PM (μg/m3) at 10 km Radius 4.9

4.2 Predicted 24- Hourly Average GLCs of SO2 (μg/m3) at 10 km Radius 4.10

4.3 Predicted 24- Hourly Average GLCs of NOx (μg/m3) at 10 km Radius 4.11


5.1 Layout of Plasma Gasification 5.15


6.1 Organization setup of Environmental Management 6.7

Chapter 7 Additional Studies

7.1 ALOHA Source point on the layout 7.9

7.2 DC Resistivity Meter Model DDR-3 7.26

7.3 Schlumberger configuration 7.27

7.4 Location Map of Electrical Resistivity Tests Conducted Within the Study Area 7.29

7.5 Index Map of Cross Section Generated Within the Study Area 7.30

7.6 litho logical cross-sections covering ERT No 10, 1&2 7.31





7.11 litho logical cross-sections covering ERT No 8&2 7.36

7.12 litho-logs of ERT No 1&2 7.37





7.17 Fence Diagram 7.40

7.18 Surface Soil Infiltration Test using Double Ring Infiltrometer 7.41

7.19 Location Map of Infiltration Tests Counducted within study Area 7.42

7.20 Soil Infiltration Curve 7.43

7.21 Natural Drainage Map of 5 km radius 7.49

7.22 Depth of water levels 7.51

Chapter 8 Project Benefits

8.1 SWOT analysis 8.8

Annexures

Annexure 1 Action plan for management of excessive leachate generation during monsoon period

QCI –NABET Accreditation

Certificate of Consultant

Declaration of Experts

DECLARATION BY EXPERTS CONTRIBUTING TO THE EIA – “Telangana Waste Management Project (TWMP), at Kakkireni village in Nalgonda district of Telangana state by M/s Mumbai

Waste Management Limited (A Subsidiary of M/s Ramky Enviro Engineers Limited)

I, hereby, certify that I was a part of the EIA team in the following capacity that developed this EIA report. EIA Coordinator: Name : Dr. K. Srinivas Sign & Date : Period of involvement: December, 2015 – Till date Contact information : [email protected] Functional Area Experts:

S. No

Functional Area

Name of the Expert

Involvement Sign & Date

Period Task

1 AP Mr. V. Vijay Kumar

Dec, 2015 – Till date

Selecting ambient air monitoring sites based on IMD data, Review of the meteorological data and AAQ data, suggesting air pollution control measures

2 WP Dr. B. Chakradhar Dec, 2015 –

Till date

Identification of water monitoring sites, estimating water requirement, Suggesting Recycling of water, waste water treatment methods & disposal schemes

3 SHW Dr. K. Srinivas Dec, 2015 –

Till date

Inventorization of Hazardous waste, Bio medical wastes, etc., suggesting treatment options viz., landfill, incineration, recycling, stabilization

4 SE Dr. V. Harish Srivatsava


Generating primary SE data, livestock inventory and impacts, conducted focused group discussions, taken public opinion on the project. Identified villages wise amenities and needs

5 EB Prof. K. Bayapu Reddy

Dec, 2015

Collected secondary data from forest/ agricultural/ fisheries department, generation of primary flora and fauna data from study area & core area, ground trothing for ecological assessment, development of status report, suggested species for greenbelt development

mailto:[email protected]

6 HG Mr. B.

Mallikarjuna Rao Dec, 2015 –

Till date

Measurement of ground water levels from the existing wells present in and around project site, observation of surface water bodies, establishing groundwater flow direction and its gradient and evaluation of rainfall data and suggesting suitable depth for secured land fill base, and identification of development of monitoring wells

7 GEO Mr. B.

Mallikarjuna Rao Dec, 2015 –

Till date

Observations made towards the Identification of country rock, development of porosity, thickness and extent of weathered formations, area seismicity and evaluation of soil permeability for suggesting suitable civil structures

8 AQ Mr. V. Vijay Kumar Dec, 2015 –

Till date

Meteorological & Air Pollution dispersion studies, suggesting environmental management plan for air pollution control measures

9 LU Dr. G.V.A. Rama Krishna


Collection of GPS readings form the project site and prepared layout, Preparation of topo map through SOI 1:50,000 scale topo sheet. Collections of ground through data form the field. Preparation of LU map through Satellite imagery, SOI, Google map & Ground through data.

10 RH Dr. B. Chakradhar


Identification of process & storage tank hazards by using FETI criteria, Pool Fire accidents from Diesel storage and lethality damages, DMP and EPP for onsite & offsite were provided

Declaration by the Head of the accredited consultant organization/ authorized person:

I, Dr. B. Chakradhar, hereby, confirm that the above mentioned experts prepared the EIA Report for the “Telangana Waste Management Project (TWMP), at Kakkireni village in Nalgonda District Telangana by M/s Mumbai Waste Management Limited (A subsidiary of M/s Ramky Enviro Engineers Limited)”. I also confirm that the consultant organization shall be fully accountable for any misleading information mentioned in this statement.

Signature : Name : Dr. B. Chakradhar Designation : Vice President Name of the EIA Consultant Organization : Ramky Enviro Engineers Limited NABET Certificate No. & Issue Date : NABET/EIA/SA/010 dt. October 06, 2015

Annexure IE

Team Member

Proposal for association as Team Member

Name of the Project and Location

Setting up of Integrated Common Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage,

Disposal and Recycling facilities including incineration “Telangana Waste

Management Project” at Kakkireni village in Nalgonda District,

Telangana by M/s Mumbai Waste Management Limited (A subsidiary of

M/s Ramky Enviro Engineers Limited)

(Project Initiated date : 07.12.2015)

Name of candidate proposed as Team Member

1. Mr. Subash Koduri – EC (Sector 32) 2. Mrs. M. Chaitanya Reddy – FAE (LU & SHW) 3. Mr. Madan Kumar D. Tiwary – FAE (WP) 4. Ms. S. Swathy – FAE (EB) 5. Mr. Suresh Kaliappan – FAE (RH)

Employment Status 1. Permanent In house Employee 2. Permanent In house Employee 3. Permanent In house Employee 4. Permanent In house Employee 5. Permanent In house Employee

Address with

contact details

Ramky Enviro Engineers Limited, 2nd Floor

Ramky Grandiose, Ramky Towers Complex, Gachibowli,

Hyderabad – 500 032

For Emp (Address of Residence)- NA

Period of association

with organization

(giving start and end

date/month/year)

1. December 2012 to till date 2. March 2014 to till date

3. November 2009 to till date 4. November 2014 to till date

5. October 2014 to till date

Name of the

Candidate

S. No of

sector as

per

Annexure

II

Name of approved

expert under whom

the candidate will

work with Cat. &

MoM reference

Name of FA as

per Scheme

Name of approved

expert under whom

the candidate will

work with Cat. &MoM

reference

Mr. Subash Koduri

32 Dr. K. Srinivas Cat A

MoM: ACM Meeting

held on June 24th ,

2015

- -

Mrs. M. Chaitanya Reddy

- - Land Use (LU) Dr. G V A Ramakrishna Cat A MoM: ACM Meeting held on June 24th , 2015

Solid & Hazardous Waste Management (SHW)

Dr. K. Srinivas Cat A MoM: ACM Meeting held on June 24th , 2015

Mr. Madan Kumar D.

Tiwary

- - Water Pollution Monitoring, Prevention & Control (WP)

Dr. B. Chakradhar Cat A

MoM: ACM Meeting

held on June 24th ,

2015

Ms. S. Swathy

- - Ecology & Biodiversity (EB)

Prof. K. Bayapu Reddy Cat A MoM: ACM Meeting held on June 24th , 2015

Mr. Suresh Kaliappan

- - Risk & Hazards Management (RH)

Dr. B. Chakradhar Cat A MoM: ACM Meeting held on June 24th , 2015

Declaration by the applicant

I confirm that I have read the requirements for the provision of Team Member, EIA Coordinator and Functional Area Expert and fulfill the eligibility requirements. I will work as per role envisaged in Scheme as per Appendix 1. I do understand that any incorrect information will result in the disqualification of self and the organizational accreditation with NABET.

Signature: Date (DD/MM/YYYY) 10/03/2016

1. 2.

(Mr. Subash Koduri) (Mrs. M. Chaitanya Reddy)

3. 4. (Mr. Madan Kumar D. Tiwary) (Ms. S. Swathy) 5 (Mr. Suresh Kaliappan) Declaration by the employer

The above information in relation to 1. Mr. Subash Koduri, and 2. Mrs. M. Chaitanya Reddy, 3. Mr. Madan Kumar D. Tiwary, 4. Ms. S.Swathy and 5. Mr. Suresh Kaliappan has been verified and found to be correct. I understand in case the information is found to be incorrect it may result in the rejection/ suspension of this application for EIA Consultant accreditation.

Attested By

Authorized Signatory ____________________________________________________________

Name &Designation: Dr. B. Chakradhar, Vice President & Head

Terms of Reference (TOR)

Terms of reference (TOR) Compliance


M/s Ramky Enviro Engineers Limited TOR 1

TOR Compliance

S. No TOR Points Compliance

Additional TOR

i. Importance and benefits of the project.

There are around four districts surrounding the

Nalgonda district with as many as 553 industries

presently existing and in operation. The

estimated quantity of hazardous waste for

landfilling is around 96129.2 MTA, 55934.6

MTA of Recyclable waste and around 21833.2

MTA of incinerable waste. The proposed TWMP

will handle and cater to all these industries with

substantial reduction in transportation of

Hazardous waste and time taken to Hyderabad

which is presently the only option available to

these industries. Thus the importance and benefit

of TWMP at Nalgonda is very well Justified.

ii. Details of various waste management units

with capacities for the proposed project.

During Phase I the waste management units

proposed are Secured landfill (931 TPD),

recycling facilities for E-waste (82 TPD), spent

solvent (27 KLPD), Used oil (54 KLPD) and

Lead acid batteries (65 TPD). Similarly

Alternative Fuel and Raw Material (55 TPD) and

Bio Medical waste to the tune of 12.5 TPD were

also included in the Phase I.

Phase II consists of Plastic recycling (27 TPD),

Paper recycling (54 TPD), incineration of 55

TPD and in Phase III, the waste management

units comprises of renewable energy and waste to

energy of 2 MW each

iii. List of waste to be handled and their

source along with mode of transportation.

Hazardous wastes comprising viz. ETP sludge,

Still bottom residues & process sludge, Spent

carbon, Evaporation salts, Incineration ash,

Slags, Spent catalysts & Resins, Expired drugs,

etc will be handled.

The sources of the hazardous waste are industries

present in the district and its nearby districts.

The mode of the transportation is dedicated

trucks, having all necessary documents, first aid

kit, etc

iv. Other chemicals and materials required

with quantities and storage capacities.

No major raw materials are required for proposed

project.

However typical reagents that would be used for

the stabilization process include Lime, Fly ash,

Bentonite (clay), Cement, Saw Dust, etc., in

combination with Sodium silicate solution, if

required to create additional binding properties of



the wastes.

Diesel used as fuel for running DG set will be

stored in drums / tank.

v. Details of temporary storage facility for

storage of hazardous waste at project site.

Temporary storage of hazardous wastes will be

done in a covered shed, having elevated concrete

floor having drains all around to collect the

leachate.

Wastes containing ignitable, reactive and non-

compatible characteristics will be stored

separately

Wastes containing volatile solvents or other low

vapour pressure chemicals will be adequately

protected from direct exposure to sunlight

Storage of Incinerable hazardous waste:

Adequate storage space will be provided with

15m distance between storage sheds, fire break

of at least 4m between two blocks of stacked

drums, maximum of 300 tons of waste storage

limit in a block of drums, at least 1m clear space

between two adjacent rows of drums in a pair for

routine inspection purpose.

vi. Details of pre-treatment facility of

hazardous waste at TSDF.

The hazardous waste will be segregated into

direct landfill able and stabilization followed by

landfill able, incinerable (calorific value >/=

2500 K.Cal/kg), Recyclables, etc.

The hazardous waste which requires stabilization

will be sent to stabilization shed, necessary

ingredients suggested by the laboratory will be

added, properly mixed and sent for landfill.

The waste having high calorific value will be

sent to incinerator for incineration.

vii.

Details of air Emission, effluents,

hazardous/solid waste generation and their

management.

Details of air Emissions for the proposed project

during Developed and operation phases are given

in Chapter 4 Section 4.4.2 and 4.5.1

Details of effluents for the proposed project

given in Chapter 4 Section 4.6

Solid Waste Management for the proposed

project is given in Chapter 4 Section 4.4.5

viii.

Requirement of water, power, with source

of supply, status of approval, water

balance diagram, man-power requirement

(regular and contract)

Details of water requirement and water balance

are given in Chapter 2 Section 2.4.3

Details of Manpower requirement is given in

Chapter 2 Section 2.4.2

ix.

Process description along with major

equipments and machineries, process flow

sheet (quantitative) from waste material to

Project Description of different units are given in

Chapter 2 Sections 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8, 2.9 & 2.10



disposal to be provided.

x. Hazard identification and details of

proposed safety systems

Hazard Identification given in Chapter 7,

Section 7.2.1

Proposed Safety Systems are Given in Chapter

7, Section 7.3

xi.

Layout maps of proposed Solid Waste

Management Facilities indicating storage

area, plant area, greenbelt area, utilities

etc.

The site layout showing various units, greenbelt,

roads, parking etc. is given in Chapter 2, Figure

2.5.

xii.

In addition to baseline data monitoring,

Lead level shall also be monitored in

ambient air and ground water as pp has

proposed to set up Lead battery recycling

unit

In addition to baseline monitoring, Lead levels

are also monitored in ambient air. The results are

given in Table 3.12. However, Lead values

observed in the study area are below detectable

limits.

Lead levels also analyzed in ground water, the

results are given in Table 3.15 (A&B). However

the values of Lead levels in ground water are

below detectable limits.

xiii. Examine the gradient of ground water

flows towards sensitive areas

The movement of ground water is controlled by

the hydraulic conductivity of the aquifer and

hydraulic gradient. In study area the hydraulic

conductivity is mainly based on the secondary

porosity. The homogeneity of the weathered zone

plays a vital role in the movement of the ground

water. In the study area the formations are

heterogeneous in nature. The geological

formation in and around 10 km of the project site

includes Peninsulaar Gneissic Complex (PGC),

granites, granodiorite. The project site is located

in Peninsulaar Gneissic Complex (PGC). Gneiss

developed secondary porosity due to differential

weathering. Below the weathered zone the

fractures and fissures acts as ground water

conduit. Hornblende biotite gneiss is the

principal aquifer in the study area apart from the

other hard rock aquifers. The hydraulic

conductivity of the aquifer is mainly due to the

fractures, fissures and joints. Based on the water

level data collected about 20 locations in 10km

of the project site, the ground water table has

been constructed. The ground water table contour

depicts that the flow is in the east to west.

Ground water mound is noticed in and -around

the project site which indicates the divergent



flow of ground water. The area selected for the

land fill site is ideal as the ground water level is

comparatively deep (18 – 40 m bgl). The

infiltrating surface water may not affect the

ground water table & surrounding sensitive areas.

xiv.

Details of Drainage of the project upto

5km radius of study area. If the site is

within 1 km radius of any major river,

peak and lean season river discharge as

well as flood occurrence frequency based

on peak rainfall data of the past 30 years.

Details of Flood Level of the project site

and maximum Flood Level of the river

shall also be provided.

Drainage map of the Project within 5 km radius

of the study area is given in Chapter 7 Figure

7.21. There are no major rivers presented within

the 5 km radius of site area

xv.

Examine the impact of leachates and

outflows from the facility on downstream

inland surface water and ground water

resources and to examine whether the

natural drainage of surface flows are

towards the lake and river

Leachate Management will be done as per

HAZWAMS/17/2000-01 – Criteria for

Hazardous Waste Landfills.

Network of open channels shall be designed and

constructed around the landfill to intercept

surface runoff of rainwater and divert it around

the facility or collect it for the use at the facility

or for disposal.

Leachate collection and removal shall be

provided above the geo-membrane in two layers

viz., the primary and the secondary liners. The

primary liner shall serve as leachate collection

and removal system, while the secondary liner

shall serve as leak detection system and a signal

of potential liabilities in terms of environmental

pollution. Leachate shall be collected by a

network of lateral and header pipes embedded in

a drainage layer, all of which shall eventually

drain into a leachate collection sump. The

collected leachate shall be transferred to a

leachate treatment system.

During monsoon month/high rainfall period,

before onset of monsoons, the active phase must

be capped with a cover; waste received during

monsoon months shall be stockpiled in

temporary holding area (covered). Detailed

leachate management plan is given in Chapter-

2.5.4.3 &action plan for measures to be taken for

excessive leachate generation during monsoon

period is provided in Annexure 1

The study areas is located on an upland area with

respects to its surrounding environs, one first

order streams originating at this location and

forming the most common form of drainage

system called dendritic system. The existing



drain is moving to the down streams and

connecting to the nearest surface streams. There

are no major lakes and rivers in within 2 km

radius from site boundary. Whereas one small

surface water tank is presented in southern side

of the site boundary. It’s almost dry throughout

the year; it will be recharged during the rainy

season. As per drainage map there is no seasonal

streams flowing from site to nearest surface

water tank. Drainage map of the Project within 5

km radius of the study area is given in Chapter 7

Figure 7.21.

xvi. Give justification for using 29.9 ha of land

for the project.

In general, The Integrated TSDF mainly

comprises of Hazardous waste, secured landfill

site and incineration facility along with various

other treatment facilities like E waste, Solvent/oil

recovery facility, Effluent treatment plant, Waste

to Energy facility etc., In addition to above the

other supporting utilities which includes vehicle

wash and work shop, weigh bridge, chemical

laboratory, general stores, fire hydrant, Admin

building, staff canteen etc., The land area

requires for treating and disposing the hazardous

waste (direct landfill & stabilization followed by

landfill) of the proposed capacity is around 34.7

acres. Around 23.7 acres of land will be used for

developing greenbelt around the boundary, along

the road etc. The remaining area around 15.6

acres is used for storage facility, utilities, tyre

wash, Incinerator, bio medical facility with

effluent treatment plant, recycling facilities etc.

Around 2 acres of land is to be still acquired out

of total 74 acres of land proposed.

A detailed layout map with breakup of each

individual treatment units along with sizes are

given Chapter 2 section 2.4.1 and Figure 2.5

xvii. Statuses of the land purchase in terms of

land acquisition Act and study the impact.

Agreement has been made with the land owner

for procuring the required land area. As Per The

Land Acquisition, Rehabilitation And

Resettlement Bill, 2011, the present land area of

74 acres may not attract R&R plans as the LARR

bill specifies that R&R is applicable for land

acquisition of more than 100 acres of land in

rural area. Also, the present land does not have

any habitation within the site as well as up to a



radial distance of 1.5 – 2 km.

xviii.

Status of acquisition of land. If acquisition

is not complete, stage of the acquisition

process and expected time of complete

possession of the land.

Agreement has been made with the land owner

for procuring the required land area.

xix. R&R details in respect of land in line with

state Government policy

As Per The Land Acquisition, Rehabilitation And

Resettlement Bill, 2011, the present land area of

74 acres may not attract R&R plans as the LARR

bill specifies that R&R is applicable for land

acquisition of more than 100 acres of land in

rural area. Also, the present land does not have

any habitation within the site as well as up to a

radial distance of 1.5 – 2 km.

xx. Details of effluent treatment and recycling

process.

The wastewater generated during Phase I

operations is around 30 m3/day, mainly from

domestic, floor washings, landfill operations and

recycling facilities. During Phase II, the quantity

of wastewater generated is around 3.5 m3/day,

which is mainly from domestic and floor

washings. During Phase III, the quantity of

wastewater generated is around 52.5 m3/day,

which is mainly from boiler and cooling tower

blow down.

Leachate generated at treatment, incineration are

treated together (excluding domestic wastewater)

in incineration/ Forced evaporation/spraying on

landfill. The domestic effluent generated will be

treated in septic tank followed by soak pit or

portable STP and the treated water is used for

greenbelt development. The effluent generated

from floor washings, recycling activity, etc will

be collected in collection tank followed by

settling tank and the settled water is reused. The

effluent from bio medical waste is treated in ETP

and recycling to incinerator or circulation back to

system. The waste water generated from boiler

and cooling tower used in ash quenching and for

greenbelt development purpose. There will not be

any wastewater discharge to any nearby water

body and adopts the zero wastewater discharge

concept.

xxi.

Leachate study report and detailed

leachate management plan to be

incorporated.

Leachate Management will be done as per

HAZWAMS/17/2000-01 – Criteria for

Hazardous Waste Landfills

The following alternative will be considered for

Leachate Management

a) Onsite treatment of Leachate: The

leachate treatment process will involve



physical, chemical or biological process

to meet the General Standards for

discharge of Environmental Pollutants

Part A - GSR 422 ( E ) dated 19.05.1993

b) Recirculation: One of the methods for

treatment of leachate is to recirculate it

through the landfill. This has two

beneficial effects. 1) the process of

landfill stabilization is accelerated and 2)

the constituents of the leachate are

attenuated by the biological, chemical

and physical changes occurring with the

landfill.

Leachate having high TDS will be collected from

the secured landfill and other sources, in to a

lined solar evaporation pond which will act as a

buffer storage pond, part of the leachate is

recirculated for dust suppression in land fill area

and part of it will be disposed of by forced

evaporation technique using multiple effect

evaporator (MEE) (Once the incinerator is

installed the leachate will be sprayed into spray

drier) and the salt collected from the evaporation

process shall be disposed off in the secured

landfill. The whole process will be a zero liquid

discharge system (ZLD).

xxii.

Action plan for measures to be taken for

excessive leachate generation during

monsoon period.

Leachate is generated on account of the

infiltration of water (precipitation) into landfills

and its percolation through waste as well as by

the squeezing of the waste due to self weight.

The quantity of leachate generated in a landfill

strongly dependent on the quantity of infiltrating

water. This in turn is dependent on weather and

operational practices. The amount of the rain

falling on a landfill to a large extent, controls the

leachate quantity generated.

Significant quantity of leachate is produced from

the active phases of a landfill under operation.

The leachate quantity from a landfill which has

final cover is minimal.

During monsoon month/high rainfall period,

before onset of monsoons, the active phase must

be capped with a cover, waste received during

monsoon months shall be stockpiled in

temporary holding area (covered).

Alternatively, during monsoon period to reduce

excessive leachate generation following



measures will be adopted.

a) Rainwater running off slopes above and

outside the landfill area shall be

intercepted and channeled to water

courses without entering the operational

areas of the site. This diversion channel

will be made with a low permeability

lining to prevent leakage into the landfill

b) Rainfall on active tipping areas shall be

collected separately and managed as

leachate

c) Rainfall on areas within the landfill site,

but on final covers of phases which have

been completed and are not actively

being used for waste disposal shall be

diverted in drainage channels away from

active tipping areas, and directed to

settling pond to remove suspended silt,

prior to discharge/reuse.

d) All interceptor channels, drainage

channels and settling ponds (storm water

basins) shall be designed by a

hydrologist using hydro meterological

data

e) It will be ensured that water collected by

surface water drainage system and

leachate collected by the leachate

collection system do not intermixed at

any stage of collection or storage. This

shall apply to the “active” and “post

closure” periods of the landfill.

Additional information on action plan for

measures to be taken for excessive leachate

generation during monsoon period is provided in

Annexure 1

xxiii.

Mitigation plan for any pollution of

ground water is noticed during operation

period or post closure monitoring period.

The ground water samples in the piezometers

provided in the upstream, downstream, borewells

/ open wells of nearby villages will be monitored

at regular intervals as per the CFE conditions.

As per Guidelines for Setting up of Operating

facility – Hazardous Waste Management -

HAZWAMS/11/98-99, there are three types of

groundwater monitoring, depending on its

purpose viz. 1) detection monitoring, 2)

assessment monitoring and 3) compliance

monitoring.

The detection monitoring is to determine whether

land disposal facility has leaked hazardous waste



or constituents into an underlying aquifer in

quantities sufficient to cause a significant change

in groundwater quality. In detection monitoring

only few parameters are analysed which include

Specific Conductance, Total Organic Carbon, or

any specific waste constituents.

Assessment monitoring is a more aggressive

programme, if a significant change is discovered

in groundwater quality during the detection

monitoring. In place of non-specific generality,

specific chemicals are estimated and vertical,

horizontal concentration profiles are attempted.

Rate and extent of contaminant migration is

studied. This study will lead to design corrective

steps to be taken by management.

The success of corrective steps so designed and

implemented should be reflected in compliance

monitoring. The goal of the compliance

monitoring programme is to ensure that leakage

of hazardous constituents into the groundwater

does not exceed acceptable limits.

xxiv. Detailed Environmental Monitoring Plan

as well as Post Closure Monitoring Plan.

Environmental Monitoring Plan as well as Post

Closure Monitoring Plan Given in Chapter 6

xxv.

Public hearing to be conducted and issues

raised and commitments made by the

project proponent on the same should be

included in EIA/EMP Report in the form

of tabular chart with financial budget for

complying with the commitments made.

Public Hearing would be conducted after

submission of draft EIA report to State Pollution

Control Board. The concerns raised along with

the replies during the PH shall be incorporated in

the EIA report.

xxvi.

Any litigation pending against the project

and/or any direction/order passed by any

Court of Law against the project, if so,

details thereof shall also be included. Has

the unit received any notice under the

Section 5 of Environment (Protection) Act,

1986 or relevant Sections of Air and Water

Acts? If so, details thereof and

compliance/A TR to the notice(s) and

present status of the case.

No litigations pending against the project

xxvii. A tabular chart with index for point wise

compliance of above TORs. Noted and followed

Standard TOR

i.

Reasons for selecting the site with details

of alternate sites

examined/rejected/selected on merit with

comparative statement and reason/basis for

selection. The examination should justify

site suitability in terms of environmental

Three sites were examined for establishment of

the proposed project in various places of Nellore.

Among these three sites, the site at

Raviguntapalli village, Rapur Mandal, Nellore

was selected based on the Knock out Criteria and

Site Evaluation as per HAZWAMS/25/2002-



damages, resources sustainability

associated with selected site as compared

to rejected sites. The analysis should

include parameters considered along with

weightage criteria for short-listing selected

site.

2003.

Comparison of the three sites with siting

guidelines are given in Chapter 5, Table 5.1, 5.2

and site evaluation of the selected site is given in

Table 5.3.

ii.

Submit the details of the road/rail

connectivity along with the likely impacts

and mitigative measures

Road connectivity to the Proposed project is

Mothkur to Narketpalli road. Traffic details of

this road are given in Chapter 3 Section 3.7. In

addition to the proposed project vehicle details to

this road, the Level of service for this road is in

very good class. Hence ,there is no effect due to

this project

iii.

Submit the present land use and

permission required for any conversion

such as forest, agriculture etc

Necessary permissions will be obtained for

conversion of the present land use to industrial

land, once Environmental Clearance is obtained

iv.

Examine the details of transportation of

Hazardous wastes, and its safety in

handling.

The Transportation of Hazardous Waste will be

done as per the Guidelines for Transportation of

Hazardous Waste – HAZWAMS/33/2005-2006.

Packaging:

(i) All packaging materials including

containers shall be of such strength,

construction and type as not to break open or

become defective during transportation.

(ii) All packaging materials including

containers shall be so packaged and sealed

that spillages of hazardous wastes /

substances are prevented during

transportation due to jerks and vibrations

caused by uneven road surface.

(iii) Re-packaging materials including that

used for fastening must not be affected by

the contents or form a dangerous

combination with them.

(iv) Packaging material should be such that

there will be no significant chemical or

galvanic action among any of the material in

the package.

Labelling:

i)The label should contain the name and

address of the occupier and operator of the

facility where it is being sent for treatment

and final disposal i.e., Labeling of

container shall be provided with a general

label as per Form 8 of the HW (M & H)

Rules, 1989 and as amended).

ii)Emergency contact phone numbers shall



be prominently displayed viz. the phone

number of concerned Regional Officer of the

SPCB / PCC, Fire Station, Police

Station and other agencies concerned.

Transportation

(a) The generator of the hazardous waste

shall ensure that wastes are packaged in a

manner suitable for safe handling, storage

and transport. Labelling on packaging is

readily visible and material used for

packaging shall withstand physical

conditions and climatic factors.

(b) The generator shall ensure that

information regarding characteristics of

wastes particularly in terms of being

Corrosive, Reactive, Ignitable or Toxic is

provided on the label.

(c) Transport of hazardous wastes shall be in

accordance with the provisions of the rules

made by the Central Government under the

Motor Vehicles Act, 1988 and other

guidelines issued from time to time.

(d) All hazardous waste containers shall be

provided with a general label as given in

Form 8 in Hazardous Waste (Management &

Handling) Rules, 1989, as amended.

(e) Transporter shall not accept hazardous

wastes from an occupier (generator) unless

six-copies (with colour codes) of the

manifest (Form 9) as per Rule 7 of the HW

(M

& H) Rules, 1989 and as amended is

provided by the generator. The transporter

shall give a copy of the manifest signed and

dated to the generator and retain the

remaining four copies to be used for further

necessary action prescribed in the Hazardous

Wastes (Management & Handling) Rules,

1989, as under:

Copy 1 (White) : To be forwarded to the

SPCB/PCC by the occupier

Copy 2 (Yellow) : To be signed by the

transporter and retained by the occupier

Copy 3 (Pink) : To be retained by the

operator of a facility

Copy 4 (Orange): To be returned to the



transporter by the operator of facility after

accepting waste

Copy 5 (Green): To be forwarded to the

SPCB/PCC by the operator of facility after

disposal.

Copy 6 (Blue): To be returned to the

occupier by the operator of the facility after

disposal.

(f). In case of interstate transportation of

waste, the occupier (waste generator) shall

strictly follow the manifest system as

stipulated under Rule 7 (5) of the HW (M &

H) Rules, 1989 and amendments made there

under. (g). In case of transport of hazardous

wastes to a facility for treatment, storage and

disposal existing in a State other than the

State where wastes are generated, the

generator shall obtain necessary “No

Objection Certificate” from the concerned

State Pollution Control Board or Pollution

Control Committee of the UT where the

facility is located (As stipulated under Rule 7

(6) of HW (M & H) Rules). (h). The

generator shall provide the transporter with

relevant information in Form 10, i.e.

Transport Emergency (TREM) Card

regarding the hazardous nature of the wastes

and measures to be taken in case of an

emergency.

(i). The operator of a facility (registered

recyclers or re-processors of hazardous

waste) while collecting the wastes from the

waste collections points or Ports or ICDs,

shall also follow the manifest system as per

Rule 7 of the HW (M & H) Rules.

v. Examine and submit the details of on line

pollutant monitoring.

Online pollutant monitoring will be provided as

per CPCB guidelines for monitoring particulate

matter, SO2, NOx and CO from the incinerator

stack.

The results obtained will be uploaded into State

PCB server on regular intervals.

Necessary provision will be made in the

incinerator stack for providing online monitoring

equipment

vi. Examine the details of monitoring of

Dioxin and Furon.

The monitoring of Dioxins and Furans in the

Stack emissions will be carried out by third party

MOEF recognized laboratories as per MOEF



guidelines (quarterly basis) air emission control

Given in Table 6.2.

vii. MoU for disposal of ash through the

TSDF.

The ash generated from the incinerator and

power plant will be used within the project, as

daily cover and disposed to the secured landfill

area

viii. MoU for disposal of scrubbing waste

water through CETP.

The scrubbing wastewater generated from

alkaline scrubber will be disposed through spray

drier / quencher which is used for control of

Dixon and Furan generation

ix. Examine and submit details of monitoring

of water quality around the landfill site.

Water quality monitoring is done in and around

the landfill site. Those details are Given in

Chapter 3, Section 3.5

x. Examine and submit details of the odour

control measures.

Details of odour control measures are given in

Chapter 9, Section 9.3.2

xi.

Examine and submit details of impact on

water body and mitigative measures

during rainy season.

There are no water bodies in the proposed site. It

is proposed to construct one storm water

collection pond with sufficient water holding

capacity in the down gradient side (based on

contours). Water from this pond will be utilized

for utilities etc.

xii.

Environmental Management Plan should

be accompanied with Environmental

Monitoring Plan and environmental cost

and benefit assessment. Regular

monitoring shall be carried out for odour

control.

Detailed Environmental Management Plan is

provided in Chapter 9,Detailed Environmental

Monitoring Plan is given in Chapter 6 and

budget for implementation of EMP (capital cost

and recurring cost) is provided in Chapter

6,Table 6.5.

xiii.

Water quality around the landfill site shall

be monitored regularly to examine the

impact on the ground water.

The water quality around the landfill site shall be

monitored for important physical and chemical

parameters including heavy metals regularly to

examine the impact on groundwater as per EC

and State PCB Consent conditions at regular

intervals (monthly) by providing piezometers in

all directions of landfill including upstream and

downstream sides. Details are given in Table

6.1-6.3.

xiv.

The storage and handling of hazardous

wastes shall be as per the Hazardous

Waste Management Rules.

The storage and handling of hazardous wastes are

Given in Chapter 7, Section 7.1 and Table 7.1

& 7.2

xv.

Submit details of a comprehensive

Disaster Management Plan including

emergency evacuation during natural and

man-made disaster.

The Disaster Management Plan including

precautions to be taken during natural and

manmade disasters are given in Chapter 7,

Section 7.3.

xvi.

Public hearing to be conducted for the

project in accordance with provisions of

Environmental Impact Assessment

Notification, 2006 and the issues raised by

the public should be addressed in the

Environmental Management Plan. The

Public Hearing would be conducted after

submission of draft EIA report to State Pollution

Control Board. The concerns raised along with

the replies during the PH shall be incorporated in

the EIA report.



Public Hearing should be conducted based

on the ToR letter issued by the Ministry

and not on the basis of Minutes of the

Meeting available on the web-site.

xvii.

A detailed draft EIA/EMP report should be

prepared in accordance with the above

additional TOR and should be submitted to

the Ministry in accordance with the

Notification.

Noted and Followed

xviii.

Any further clarification on carrying out

the above studies including anticipated

impacts due to the project and mitigative

measure, project proponent can refer to the

model TOR available on Ministry website

All the studies/activities suggested in the TOR

were completed in detail and presented in the

EIA report. No further clarification required for

carrying out the studies suggested.

Executive Summary


M/s Ramky Enviro Engineers Limited ES 1

Executive Summary

1.0 Introduction

Management of pollution and the waste generated from the industries is always been a challenging task

faced by the country. As per EIA Notification S.O. No 1533 dated 14th September 2006 and subsequent

amendments the proposed project is falling under Project / Activity 7 (d) Common Hazardous Waste

Treatment, Storage and Disposal Facility (TSDFs), Category “A” and requires environmental clearance

from MOEFCC, New Delhi. The proposal was considered by the Expert Appraisal Committee in its 1st

meeting held during 22nd

December 2015 for issuing of the Terms of Reference (TOR) for undertaking

detailed EIA Study in accordance with the provisions of the EIA notification and subsequent

amendments. The MOEFCC has given Terms of Reference vide its letter No. F. No. 10-236/2015-IA.III

dated 28th January 2016.

At present in the Nalgonda region the hazardous waste generated by industrial activities, biomedical

waste generated by hospitals and e-waste generated by commercial, industrial and residential waste is

given to small time recyclers. The Proposed project will be designed to collect & treat all these different

types of waste on scientific basis under the following rules.

The Hazardous Wastes (Management, Handling and Trans-boundary Movement) Rules, 1989 and

its subsequent amendments.

The Bio-Medical Waste (Management & Handling) Rules, 1998 and subsequent amendments.

The Plastic Waste (Management & Handling) Rules, 2011 and subsequent amendments.

E-Waste (Management & Handling) Rules, 2011 and subsequent amendments.

The proposed Integrated Common Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, Disposal and Recycling Facility

at Kakkireni Village is in Ramannapeta Mandal in Nalgonda District of Telangana state mainly has four

waste disposal / recycling or recovery facilities such as Hazardous Waste TSDF, Renewable Energy and

Waste to Energy, Bio-medical waste disposal Facility, Alternative Fuel Recovery & Recycling Facilities.

The proposed treatment facilities will be developed in phase wise manner.

In Phase I secured land fill with a capacity of 548 TPD will be taken up along with other treatments units

like Stabilization (383 TPD), Biomedical waste (12.5 TPD - 50000 beds), E waste (82 TPD), spent

solvent recycling (27 KLPD), used oil recycling (54 KLPD), used lead acid batteries recycling (65 TPD),

Alternate fuel and raw material (55 TPD) are proposed to be handled. Where as in Phase II waste plastics

recycling (27 TPD), waste paper recycling (54 TPD) and incinerator (55 TPD). And in Phase III power

generation of 2 MW with using renewable energy and 2 MW with waste to energy plants are proposed.

The total area provided for the proposed project is around 74 Acres, out of which around 34.7 acre of land

is mainly utilized for Secured landfill, used for direct disposal of hazardous waste and as well the

stabilized hazardous waste after detoxification. An area of 23.7 Acres of land is used for greenbelt

development within the project site and along the peripheral boundary. The remaining 15.6 Acres of land

is used for chemical storage, waste storage, utilities, tyre wash, incinerator, biomedical plant setup along



with effluent treatment system and all type of recycling facilities. Around 2 acres of land is to be still

acquired out of total 74 acres of land proposed.

Water requirement for the project will be met through the Ground water or Gram Panchayat water supply

scheme. The execution of the TSDF project would be in three phases. Water requirement for all three

phases is 366 KLD. Out of which, in phase I water required is 109 KLD, in Phase II water required is 49

KLD and in Phase III water required is 208 KLD.

Power required for the project will be met from Telangana TRANSCO with a capacity of 1500 KVA and

for emergency purpose DG sets will be made available by respective units of proposed project

Around 700 liters of HSD would be stored at site for operating DG sets to meet emergency power

requirements for effluent treatment plant, utilities etc and also auxiliary fuel with a capacity of 20 KL per

month used for Incinerator.

Around 285 persons would be employed for the project out of which 65 are during construction phase and

220 will be in Operation phase (Phase wise). Work force will be employed from the nearby villages on

priority basis for operational and maintenance of the proposed project. Indirect employment expected due

to the present project will be around 50 persons for various support facilities.

2.0 Baseline Environmental Status

Field investigations were undertaken for collecting the existing baseline environment for Air, Water,

Noise, Soil, Ecological and Socio-economic Conditions. A study area of 10 Km radius from the project

site is identified to establish the present environmental conditions for the above environmental

components. The main aim of the EIA study is to identify the critical environmental attributes which will

be affected and have adverse impacts on the surrounding environment due to the proposed project. The

field data generation is undertaken during the winter season from December (2015) to February (2016).

Meteorology (Climate)

The metrological data is collected from the nearest IMD station at Nalgonda and also at site with the help

of automatic weather station. The pre dominant wind direction recorded is from South East (SE) closely

followed by North East (NE). Calm conditions prevailed for 12.32% of the total time. Average wind

speed observed for the winter season is around 2.48 m/s.

Air Quality

Ambient Air quality was monitored at 10 locations within the study area of the project site. The locations

were identified in downwind, cross wind and up wind directions. The air pollutants monitored are

Particulate Matter (PM10, PM2.5), Sulphur dioxide, Oxides of nitrogen, Ozone, Carbon Monoxide, Lead,

Nickel, Benzene, Benzo(a)Pyrene, Ammonia and Arsenic as per the standard MOEFCC guidelines and

results were compared with NAAQ/CPCB Standards.



The minimum and maximum levels of Particulate Matter < 2.5 microns are recorded in the range of 13.7

to 25.3 µg/m3, whereas the particulate matter <10 Microns are in the range of 44.0 to 56.3 µg/m3.

The sulphur dioxide concentrations within the study area observed are in the range of 11.2 to 16.3 µg/m3,

the oxides of nitrogen observed are in the range of 14.0 to 20.8 µg/m3, the ozone and carbon monoxide

observed are in the range of 11.7 to 18.2 µg/m3 and 126 to 638 µg/m

3 respectively and the benzene and

ammonia observed are in the range of 0.33 to 0.83 µg/m3 and 9.3 to 14.3 µg/m

3 respectively. The

observed air pollutants were well within the limits as per CPCB/NAAQ standards. The other parameters

viz. lead, nickel, arsenic and benzo (a) pyrene were also monitored in the study area and are found to be


Water Quality

Surface and Ground water samples were collected from different sources within the study area and

analyzed for all important physico-chemical and biological parameters to establish the quality of water

prevailing in the project surroundings. Around 13 ground water and 5 surface water samples were

collected.

The ground water is mainly from hand pumps, wells and bore wells used by the villages for domestic and

drinking purposes. The surface water collected from lake or pond and Musi River. The pH of ground

water observed is from 7.02 to 7.53 and in surface water it is from 6.85 to 7.36, the TDS level of GW is

from 339 to 1551 mg/l, whereas in surface water the levels are 967 to 1494 mg/l. The chloride

concentrations in GW is between 20 to 434 mg/l, whereas the surface water has a chloride values of 176

to 286 mg/l. The hardness observed in ground water is 233 to 688 mg/l and in surface water the hardness

found to be between 376 to 775 mg/l. Fluoride concentrations observed in GW is in the range of 1.5 to 2.4

mg/l and in surface water the fluoride content observed in between 0.5 to 0.7 mg/l. The general

characteristics of all the ground water samples collected in the region shows fairly good quality except

some levels of Hardness and fluoride observed to be slightly higher than the stipulated standards. The

basic treatment for fluoride will reduce the concentration levels within the limits and can be used for

consumption.

Noise Quality

Noise was monitored at 11 locations within the study area of the project site. The locations were

identified for assessment of existing noise level status, keeping in view of the land use pattern, residential

areas in villages, schools, bus stands, etc., day levels of noise monitored during 6 AM to 10 PM and in

night during 10 PM to 6 AM. The noise levels were monitored as per the Ambient Noise Standards of

residential and commercial area standards. The noise levels during the day are ranging in between 53.3 to

63.3 dB (A), whereas in night noise levels are ranging between 43.2 to 45.2 dB (A). The site is accessible

by a NH9 and Muthkur – Narketpally road.

The traffic survey carried out at Narketpally village towards Muthkur to Narketpally. The minimum level

of Traffic Survey at Muthkur – Narketpally Road is 53 PCU/H and whereas the maximum level of Traffic

Survey is 461 PCU/H. The total worst case baseline PCU/Hr is 461, total width of the road in meters

(Arterial Roads) PCU/Hr is 7 and as per the IRC: 106-1990 (PCU’s per hour).



Soil Quality

Soil Quality was monitored at 11 locations within the study area of the project site. The locations were

selected to assess the existing soil conditions representing various land use conditions and geological

features. The important physical, chemical parameter concentrations were determined from all the

samples.

The pH values in the study area are varying from 6.89 to 7.28, the electrical conductivity is varying from

36 to 242 µs/cm, the organic carbon is varying from 0.34 to 1.05 %, the available Nitrogen is varying

from 248 to 356 kg/ha, the available phophorus is varying from 4.8 to 11.6 kg/ha, and the available

pottasium is varying between 142 to 644 kg/ha.

Ecological Environment

A detailed study was done within 10 km radius area of the project site which includes, Compilation of

secondary data from published literature of Forest Division and Primary data generation through

systematic studies. The proposed area falls in the Southern Plateau and Hills Region characterized by

shallow, deep red loamy soil & sandy soil. The primary data was collected through visual observation of

species in the study area. Babul, Guava, Banyan tree etc., and Common species of Mammals like

Common hare, Monkey, Field Mouse, Stripped squirrel are commonly seen around the study area.

No Wildlife Sanctuaries or National parks exist in 10 km radius of the project site. The living species

which are endangered or threatened as per the IUCN Red list were not identified or observed in the core

zone or buffer zone of the project site. There will not be any adverse impact of the proposed project on

the terrestrial flora and fauna. The loss in flora will compensated by greenbelt development backed up

with a strong EMP.

Socio Economic Environment

The study area covers 36 villages in the 10 km radial distance from the periphery of the proposed project site

in Chityala, Ramanna Peta and Narkat palli Mandals of Nalgonda district. 70% of the sample households live

in Pucca house. Remaining 30% of the households shelter in kutcha houses.

In the field survey it has been reported that 100% of the households have electricity facility. agriculture sector

supports more than 80% of the population. Work participation rate in Kakkireni and surrounding villages is

around 1.1 in 2011. Majority of the working population is around 80% of the population was engaged in

activities like agriculture and allied services etc. The 10% engaged in the Microenterprises and remaining are

engaged in Daily Labour.

The socio-Economic study revealed that the youth in the project area are devoid of employment opportunities.

They can be a potential source of workers with minimum handholding and vocational education skills. The

youth have expressed their willingness to setting up of industries in the area as it provides them gainful

employment opportunities.

Similarly, this would also trigger many direct and indirect benefits for economic advancement and social

development of project area.



3.0 Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures

The proposed power plant may cause impact on the environment in two phases.

During Construction phase

During Operation phase

a) Impacts during construction phase

The possible construction activities that contribute to the environmental impacts are:

Dust Generation during leveling of earth

Dust generation due to the movement of vehicles on unpaved roads

Emission of pollutants from vehicular exhaust

Unloading of raw materials and removal of unwanted waste material from site

Accumulation of excavated earth material

Noise generation due to operation of construction equipment

The impacts due to construction activities are short term and are limited to the construction phase. The

impacts will be mainly on air quality, water quality, soil quality and socio-economics, necessary control

measures will be taken to minimize the impacts.

b) Impacts during operation phase

During the operation phase of the proposed project there would be impacts on the air quality, water

quality, Noise quality, Land environment and socio-economic aspects etc.

Impact on Air quality

The proposed project is a Hazardous waste management and the major source of pollution would be the

emissions from the stack. The important air pollutants generated from the proposed project are particulate

matter (PM), sulphur dioxide (SO2) and oxides of nitrogen (NOX).

The major air pollutants generated from the proposed project are given below:

1. Point source emissions from Incinerator, DG set.

The emissions from the DG sets are minimal since they will be operated only during power failures.

To estimate the ground level concentration of air pollutants released from 30 m and 8 m height of the

stack provided for the incinerator and DG set, a study state dispersion model based on Gaussian Plume

(AERMOD Version 7.0.3) software is used to calculate the concentrations for PM, SO2 and NOx. The

incinerator has a stack with a diameter 0.6 m and releases the flue gas it in velocity of 22 m/s. The DG set

has a stack with a diameter 0.25 m and releases the flue gas it in velocity of 12 m/s. The SO2 and NOx

Emission rates estimated for incinerator and DG set are in the range of 0.02 to 9.5 g/s and 0.124 to 13.7

g/s respectively and PM emission rate for incinerator is 2.4 g/s. The result of dispersion modeling reveals

a maximum ground level concentration for PM is 3.4µg/m3, for SO2 is 9.5µg/m

3 and for NOx is

14.1µg/m3. The overall concentration including existing baseline status for PM is 59.7µg/m3, for SO2 is

25.8µg/m3 and for NOx is 34.9µg/m

3. Which are well within the stipulated standards of regulatory agency.



Proposed Mitigation Measures

Following mitigation measures will be adopted to reduce the environmental impacts

The important dust suppression measures proposed will be regular water sprinkling on main haul

roads in the project area, this activity will be carried out at least twice a day, if need arises

frequency will be increased on windy days, in this way around 50% reduction on the dust

contribution from the exposed surface will be achieved.

The duration of stockpiling will be as short as possible as most of the material will be used as

backfill material for the open cut trenches for road development

Temporary tin sheets of sufficient height (3m) will be erected around the site of dust generation or

all around the project site as barrier for dust control.

Tree plantations around the project boundary will be initiated at the early stages by

Plantation of 2 to 3 years old saplings, regular watering will be done, so that the area will be moist

for most part of the day.

To reduce the dust movement from civil construction site to the neighborhood the external part of

the building (administration, canteen, etc) will be covered by plastic sheets

Impact on water quality

The water required for the proposed project shall be met through the Ground water or Gram Panchayat

water supply scheme. The possible sources of wastewater within the project site are:

i) Floor washings

ii) Leachate from landfill operations

iii) Sewage from Domestic Use

iv) Wastewater from Cooling Towers

v) Effluent from water treatment plant in Bio medical waste

vi) Blow downs from Boiler and Cooling Tower etc.


Leachate collected from Secured Landfill and other wastewater including vehicle and container washing,

leachate generated at treatment, incineration, recycling plants are treated together (excluding domestic

wastewater). Leachate from the landfill and all other places of generation like storage sheds, vehicle

wash, and wheel wash etc., the wastewater form landfill operations is treated in incineration/spraying on

landfill. The domestic effluent generated will be treated in septic tank followed by soak pit or portable

STP and the treated water is used for greenbelt development. The effluent generated from floor washings,

recycling activity, etc will be collected in collection tank followed by settling tank and the settled water is

reused. The waste generated from boiler and cooling tower used in ash quenching and for greenbelt

purpose. There will not be any wastewater discharge to any nearby water body and adopts the zero waste

discharge concept.

Rain Water Harvesting and Storm Water Management

Project Management will make proper utilization of rainwater by harvesting by appropriate rain water-

harvesting mechanism. Roof water will be collected by adopting proper treatment (O&G Trap), the



collected water will be used for various uses (dust suppression, floor washings, toiler flushing, greenbelt,

etc.).

Rainwater from surface areas will be harvested by construction of check dams all along the storm water

drainage network at a definite pitch. Based on the rainfall intensity of the plant area, storm water drainage

system will be designed. Strom water drainage system consists of well-designed network of open surface

drains with check dams at appropriate distances to improve the infiltration efficiency of the rain water

into ground so that all the storm water is efficiently drained off without any water logging.

Necessary expert advice has been obtained in this regard. Artificial recharge measures like rain water-

harvesting helps in reducing the urban run-off, decrease pollution of ground water and improve the

ground water table, which augments the yields of, bore wells.

Impact on Noise Levels

Any hazardous facility, in general, consists of several sources of noise pollution. The different sources of

noise pollution are mentioned below:

Induced draft & Forced draft fans

Diesel Generators

Cooling Towers

Frequent vehicular movement etc.,


Adequate measures for noise control, at the design stage shall be taken such as keeping high noise

generating equipment’s like pumps, motors, etc., on anti-vibration pads, closed rooms and regular

maintenance as suggested by the manufacturer. Some of the mitigation measures proposed is

Noise level specification of the various Equipments as per the Occupational Safety and Health

Association (OSHA) standards.

Providing suitable enclosures (adequate insulation) to minimize the impact of high noise

generating sources.

Employees will be provided with PPE like ear plugs, helmets, safety shoes, etc.

Development of greenbelt all along the boundary and along the roads within the project

Odor Control

The odor management is one of the issues in proposed project. The main aim is to minimize the number

of sources of odor generation which exist in site. To undertake direct management of odor generating

sources that give rise to odor problems.

The mitigation measures proposed to minimize and control odor are as follows.

Dilution of odorant by odor counteraction or neutralize by spraying Ecosorb (organic and

biodegradable chemical) around odor generation areas at regular intervals.

Covering the landfill area under operation daily with layer of earth, clay or a similar material.

Covering by using heavy duty hessian, plastics and foams odor can be minimized.

Covering of trucks carrying waste while transportation.



The waste after combustion in primary and secondary stages the off gas/flue gases shall be passed

through spray dryer, cyclone separation, activated carbon dry lime and wet scrubber. The odour

will be removed during the above gas cleaning operations especially the activated carbon shall

adsorb any organics if so present in the flue gases. The odour free gases shall be released into the

atmosphere from 30 m stack.

4.0 Environmental Monitoring Program

Environmental Monitoring Program has been designed for assessing the efficiency of implementation of

Environment Management Plan and to take corrective measures in case of any degradation in the

surrounding environment.

Different activities involved in the proposed project and their impact on various environmental attributes

have been taken into account while designing a detailed environmental monitoring program.

Implementation of EMP and periodic monitoring is proposed to be carried out at plant level and area level

for the proposed waste management project allied activities like storage facilities, workshop, staff

canteen, etc. A comprehensive monitoring mechanism has been devised for monitoring of impacts due to

proposed project.

Cost towards investment for Environmental Management/Environmental Mitigation Measures will be

Rs.20.0 Crores and 54 Lakhs/annum will be the recurring cost

Plant level environmental protection measures like dust suppression, treatment and recycling of

wastewater, plantation and noise control in the plant premises, housekeeping, implementation of EMP and

Environmental Clearance conditions will be monitored by the plant authorities.

5.0 Risk Analysis

The principal objective of the risk assessment study is to identify and quantify the major hazards and the

risk associated with various operations of the proposed project, which may lead to emergency

consequences (disasters) affecting the public safety and health.

All necessary measures to minimize the risk due to the proposed project will be taken during design stage

and also during operation period viz, Fire & safety control measures, Emergency preparedness plan,

Disaster Management plan, etc.

6.0 Project Benefits

From the proposed project the major benefits, include improving the degraded environment by

establishing an Integrated Common Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, Disposal and Recycling

Facilities.

The proposed project facilitates better management of the industrial wastes.

It will be the showcase for other states for management of hazardous waste with additional

benefit of green and clean Environment.

It minimizes the pollution load on environment from industrial hazardous waste



Compliance with prescribed regulatory norms which in turn avert the risk of closure on account

of violation of rules

It reduces the number of hazardous waste dump sites in the area and also eliminates the pollution

potential

The management of wastes is relatively easier & economically viable at common facility.

Cost of environmental monitoring is less at common facility

Reduced environmental liability due to captive storage of hazardous waste in the premises of

industries

Better occupational health and safety at individual industry level

Prevention of natural resource contamination thereby improving overall environmental status of

the region

Reduction in the cost of transportation and subsequent traffic.

7.0 Environmental Management Plan

The Environmental Management Plan (EMP) is required to ensure a sustainable development of the plant

area and the surrounding areas of the plant. The EMP will be integrated in all the major activities of the

project, with clearly defined policies, to ensure that the ecological balance of the area is maintained and

the adverse effects are minimized. EMP requires multidisciplinary approach with mitigation,

management, monitoring and institutional measures to be taken during implementation and operation, to

eliminate adverse environmental impacts or reduce them to acceptable levels. In order to ensure

sustainable development in the study area; it needs to be an all-encompassing plan for which the plant

authorities, government, regulating agencies, and the population of the study area need to extend their

cooperation and contribution.

The mitigation measures are planned for construction and operation phases and the overall management

plan helps to improve the supportive capacity of the receiving bodies. The EMP aims to control pollution

at the source level to the possible extent with the available and affordable technology followed by the

standard treatments before getting discharged. The recommended mitigation measures will synchronize

the economic development of the study area with the environmental protection of the region.

8.0 Conclusions

The proposed integrated hazardous waste treatment storage, disposal and recycling facility at Nalgonda

will be executed in an area of 74 acres with various treatment systems which includes direct landfilling,

stabilization, biomedical waste, E waste, incineration and all type of waste recycling facilities. The

quantity of hazardous waste expected to be handled at the present site is around 548 TPD. The expected

project cost for the facility is around 260 Crores.

The air pollutant emissions from stacks and other fugitive operations are treated in a bag filter system

followed by reducing gaseous pollutant concentrations by providing wet scrubbing system as well as

multiple effect evaporator systems.



The water requirement for the entire operations is around 366 KLD and the waste water generated is

treated by physic-chemical methods to achieve the regulatory standards.

The environmental management plan will consists of multidisciplinary approach with mitigation,

management, monitoring and institutional measures to be taken up during implementation and operation

to minimize adverse environmental impacts to reduce them to acceptable levels.

The benefits of the proposed project mainly to handle all the untreated hazardous waste from various

industries in nalgonda & surrounding districts of nalgonda and to provide a suitable treatment facility to

dispose off in a scientific manner. The project also eliminates the captive hazardous waste units existing

within some of the major industries and provides a common Treatment Storage and Disposal Facility

which is relatively easier and economically viable. The project also improves better occupational health

and safety at individual industry level and prevention of natural resource contamination thereby

improving overall environmental status of the region.

The EIA report covers all the baseline status related to various environmental components like air, water,

noise, soil, biological and socio-economic conditions within the project study region. The predicted and

anticipatory & pollution level increase is very minimal due to the proposed treatment storage and disposal

facility and all the mitigation and monitoring mechanisms will be undertaken to safeguard the

environment within the project region.

CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION


M/s Ramky Enviro Engineers Limited 1.1

CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION 1.1 Introduction

Nalgonda district is bounded by Khammam and Krishna districts (Andhra Pradesh) on the East,

Hyderabad, R.R. District, Mahaboobnagar districts on the West, Medak and Warangal districts on North

and by river Krishna and Guntur (Andhra Pradesh) on the South. The South East part of Nalgonda

District, along the Krishna belt is rich in high grade limestone, which is the main raw material to cement

industry and as such many cement industries in Large and Medium Sector as well as clinker grinding

units are operating in that area. Due to abundance of granite many granite cutting and polishing units have

been established in Suryapet area and also in the district border nearer to Hyderabad. Because of

Nagarjunasagar project and SLBC, agriculture output has increased and has resulted in establishment of

raw rice mills and Parboiled rice mills.

Nalgonda has the largest cluster of parboiled rice mills in Telangana. Due to close proximity to state

capital many Large and Medium Scale industries have been established in Bibinagar area and also along

NH-9 from Pochampally to Narketpally. Plastic industries are mainly located in Suryapet area. Nalgonda

District is industrially progressing in Telangana State the cement plants and many sophisticated industries

have already been established. NagarjunaSagar, a major multipurpose project is located in the District. It

has got bright agricultural resources and hence Agro based industries are flourishing. Limestone, Clay and

Feldspar are the important mineral resources available in the District. The Bibinagar-Guntur and

Secunderabad -Kazipet railway lines are providing transport to the major industrial products in the

District. Due to the rich mineral resources there is further scope for the establishing of new industries in

the District.

Industrial operations lead to considerable generation of hazardous waste. The major hazardous waste-

generating industries in Nalgonda & surrounding districts include Singareni Collieries, sugars and

cements, textile, chemicals, pharmaceuticals, pesticides, paint and dye, mica, paper and pulp

manufacturing, inorganic chemicals, power plants, and general engineering industries. Hazardous wastes

from the industrial sectors mentioned above contain heavy metals, cyanides, pesticides, complex aromatic

compounds (such as PCBs), and other chemicals which are toxic, flammable, reactive, corrosive or have

explosive properties affecting the environment.

1.2 Purpose of Report

The objective of this EIA study report is description of those aspects of the project which are likely to

cause environmental impacts in/around the proposed project area and identification of long-term, short-

term, reversible & irreversible impact on the immediate environment, ecology and ecosystem. Based on

impact prediction, suitable management plan is to be defined that will control and/or minimize the

detrimental impacts. It is very much important in the design stage of the project to take into account not

only the social and economic aspects of the project, but also environment protection considerations. The

environmental impacts of any new or expansion project must be surveyed, forecasted and evaluated by



the project proponents in the process of designing the project. These results and findings are then to be

incorporated in the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) Report.

Environmental Impact Assessment report has been prepared to comply with the Terms of Reference

(TOR) received from MoEFF.No.10-236/2015-IA.III on dated 28th Jan 2016, As per EIA Notification

S.O.No 1533 dated 14thSep 2006 and its subsequent amendments the proposed project is falling under

Project / Activity 7 (d) Common Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage and Disposal Facility (TSDFs),

Category “A” (All integrated facilities having incineration & landfill or incineration alone) and requires

environmental clearance from Expert Appraisal Committee (EAC), MOEF, New Delhi.

1.3 Identification of Project and Project Proponent

1.3.1 Project

Telangana Waste Management Project (TWMP) is a division of Mumbai Waste Management Limited.

Whereas Mumbai Waste Management Limited is a subsidiary of M/s. Ramky Enviro Engineers Ltd, India

as a promoter for setting up of Integrated Common Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, Disposal and

Recycling Facilities including incineration. Proposed project activities consists of collection,

transportation, reception, treatment, storage, re-use, recycle, blending and disposal of industrial hazardous

wastes, biomedical waste, spent solvent recycling, used oil recycling, alternate fuel &raw material

facility, used lead acid batteries, waste plastic & paper recycling and E-waste generated in the district of

Nalgonda and surrounding industries.

1.3.2 Project Proponent

The proposed project Telangana Waste Management Project (TWMP) will be established and operated by

Mumbai Waste Management Limited (A subsidiary of M/s Ramky Enviro Engineers Limited,

Hyderabad).

1.3.3 Ramky Group Waste Management Division

Ramky Waste Management is focused in the fields of Industrial Hazardous Waste Management, Bio-

Medical Waste Management and Municipal Solid Waste Management. The group companies have the

credit and distinction of having established first-of-its-kind bio-medical waste and hazardous waste

management facilities operating on a common platform in the country at Hyderabad. The group today is

the leader in waste management in India, with 14 biomedical waste management facilities located at

Hyderabad, Bangalore, Ludhiana, Ahmedabad, Mumbai, Chennai, Madurai Salem, Durgapur, Kalyani,

Haldia, Kolkata, Mangalore and Ghaziabad. Some are under construction. The company today operating

fifteen hazardous waste management facilities established and operated (some are under construction

stage) under the name of;



Hyderabad Waste Management Project located at Hyderabad (Dundigal)

Mumbai Waste Management Limited located at Mumbai (Taloja)

West Bengal Waste Management Limited located at Haldia

Tamil Nadu Waste Management Limited located at Chennai (Gummidipoondi)

Uttar Pradesh Waste Management Project located at Kanpur

Coastal Waste Management Project located at Visakhapatnam

Rajasthan Waste Management Project located at Udaipur

Punjab Waste Management Project located at Chandigarh (Nimbua)

Karnataka Waste Management Project located at Bangalore (Dobaspet)

Orissa Waste Management Project located at Bhubhaneswar

Balotra Waste Management Project (Balotra)

Madhya Pradesh Waste Management Project Located at Indore (Pithampur)

West Bengal Waste Management Limited located at Saltora

Tamil Nadu Waste Management Limited located at Chennai (Virudhnagar)

Bihar Waste Management Project (Bhojpur).

The hazardous waste management facilities in operation are integrated facilities catering to over 6000

industrial establishments and catering to over 700,000 TPA of industrial hazardous wastes. The facilities

comprise of a secured landfill facility in compliance to CPCB National Standard(equivalent to US-EPA,

RCRA Subtitle ‘C’ requirements), a waste stabilization facility, incinerator, intractable and temporary

stores, leachate treatment facility, advanced laboratory, transport equipment, administrative and other

supporting infrastructure. Ramky facilities are serving as role models for waste management facilities in

the country today.

The company has design, detailed engineering capability for the above-mentioned capacity as proven

from the established facilities. All the facilities are equipped with state of the art laboratories capable of

performing comprehensive and fingerprinting analysis. The company deploys complete mechanization in

collection and transportation of wastes. Ramky’s experience in MSW is also exhaustive in terms of

various consultancy projects rendered for A.P. and Karnataka States in addition to the MSW management

projects awarded at Haldia, Bangalore, Guwahati, Hyderabad and New Delhi.

In a society where environment stands on the top of social agenda with economic policies nottied to the

same, our effort towards improvement of environment is seen as a great step towards environmental

improvement projects in the country. All the waste management facilities established by the Ramky

Group is operated and maintained with high priority towards environment and occupational health and

safety aspects. Where possible the operations have been automated or mechanized and all the staff

working with the waste is provided with adequate and suitable personnel protective equipment and

regular health checkups.



1.4 Brief description of nature, size, location of the project and its importance to the country and region The proposed project is to treat and dispose the hazardous waste, bio medical waste, E waste, spent solvent, used oil and other miscellaneous waste. The proposed project will be designed on lines to meet the following rules.

� The Hazardous Wastes (Management, Handling and Trans-boundary Movement) Rules, 1989 and its subsequent amendments.

� The Bio-Medical Waste (Management & Handling) Rules, 1998 and subsequent amendments. � The Plastic Waste (Management & Handling) Rules, 2011 and subsequent amendments. � E-Waste (Management & Handling) Rules, 2011 and subsequent amendments. � Battery management and handling rules 2001 and subsequent amendments.

At present the hazardous waste generated by industrial activities, biomedical waste generated by hospitals and e-waste generated by commercial, industrial and residential waste is indiscriminately disposed in open areas within their units or given to small time recyclers, etc. Some of the industry units are members of existing TSDF, Dundigal in Ranga reddy district. The details of the project site are given under the Table 1.1 the location map of the project site is given as Figure 1.1. Topographical map of the study area is shown in Figure 1.2 and Site boundary on Google image is shown in Figures 1.3.

Table 1.1 Features of the site

1 Land Area 74 Acres (29.94 Ha)

2 Survey Numbers 261,262,263,264,275,276,279,280, Kakkireni Village

3 Land Coordinates Site is located at 17°16'43.51"N, 79°12'14.58"E 4 Elevation Average elevation is 315 meters above MSL.

5 Nearest Railway Station Chityala Railway Station, 9.20 km SW

6 Nearest City Chityala town, 9.10 km SW

7 Nearest Habitation Kakkireni village, 2 km N

8 Nearest Water body Akkenapalli Cheruvu, 4.6 Km NE; Musi River 8 km N 1.4.1 Importance of the Project There is a growing concern all over the country for the disposal of hazardous wastes generated from anthropogenic sources. The waste generators find it difficult to dispose their hazardous wastes without causing environmental disturbance, as very few appropriate disposal facilities are available. The Government of India has promulgated the Hazardous Waste (Management &Handling) Rules (HW (M&H) in 1989 through the Ministry of Environment, Forests and Climate Change (MOEFCC) under the aegis of Environment (Protection) Act EPA Act 1986. Also in order to encourage the effective implementation of these rules, the MOEFCC has further amended the rules several times. The hazardous wastes need to be disposed off in a secured manner in view of their characteristic properties such as, toxicity, corrosivity, ignitability, reactivity and persistence. A wide range of health hazards has been attributed to their contamination. A number of options are available for the treatment and disposal of a variety of hazardous wastes; the options available for hazardous waste management are



not being efficiently utilized by the waste generators resulting in severe pollution of land surface and

ground water. The ineffective hazardous waste management can be attributed to:

Absence of systematic qualitative and quantitative assessment (inventory) of hazardous wastes

generated

Improper storage and disposal practices of hazardous wastes

Absence of proper treatment, storage and disposal facilities (TSDFs)

At Treatment Storage Disposal Facility (TSDF), the wastes are collected from the waste generators,

treated as per their characteristics and finally disposed off. More than one unit operation may be

employed for the treatment and disposal of the wastes at TSDF. However, the selection of a suitable site

for an effective functioning of TSDF is the key factor involved in the HWM. The site should be selected

based upon several factors such as waste characteristics, site characteristics, public acceptance and

prevailing laws & regulations.



Figure 1.1

Location Map of the Site



Figure 1.2

Topographical Map of the Study Area



Figure 1.3

Google Image 2 km Radius



1.5 Scope of the Study

The Scope of the study is to carry out the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) studies to identify,

predict and evaluate potential environmental and socio-economic impacts which may result from the

proposed Integrated Common Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, Disposal& Recycling Facilities

including Incineration and to develop suitable Environment Management Plan (EMP) to mitigate the

undesirable effects.

The Study is aimed at:

Establishing the existing environmental conditions, identifying potential environmental impacts

and identifying areas of significant environmental concerns due to the proposed project;

Prediction of impacts on environment, socio-economic conditions of the people etc. due to the

proposed project.

Preparation of Environmental Management Plan (EMP)

Development of post project environmental monitoring program.

The EIA study shall be conducted as per the applicable rules/guidelines of Ministry of Environment and

Forests, Govt. of India including general/sectoral provisions. The EIA study will necessarily include but

not get restricted to the following:

(a) Literature Review

(b) Field Studies

(c) Impact assessment and preparation of the EIA/EMP

Stage A

Establishing the relevant features of the project that are likely to have an impact on the environment

during construction and operation phases.

Stage B

Assessment of likely emissions from the proposed facility. Assessment of impacts using scientific tools to

delineate post project scenario.

Stage C

Suggesting adequate pollution control measures to offset adverse impacts if any. Preparation of the EIA

and EMP document.Defense of the study findings before the regulatory authorities.

An outline of the activities carried out in stages A, B, C are briefly described below.

Stage A

The study area shall be up to 10 km radial distance from the proposed project with reference to air, water,

soil, noise, Socio economic and ecological studies. The baseline environmental conditions shall be

established using Topo sheets, through literature survey and field investigations. In addition to the above,

information on the location of towns/cities, national parks, wildlife sanctuaries and ecologically sensitive



areas like tropical forests, important lakes, bio-sphere reserves and sanctuaries within impact area shall be

furnished.

A review and analysis of the information available with various governmental, educational and other

institutions shall be carried out for each discipline. Based upon preliminary review of the available data,

detailed field work shall be planned to collect information on the parameters critical to characterize the

environment of the area. The baseline environmental studies shall be undertaken for Meteorology, Air

quality, Noise, Water Quality, Water Use, various aspects to be covered under different disciplines is as

follows.

1) Meteorology

Following meteorological parameters of the area shall be measured at the project site. In addition, data

shall be collected from the nearest IMD observatory also for reference.

Temperature

Rainfall

Relative humidity

Wind speed and direction

2) Air Quality

Ambient Air Quality shall be monitored at requisite number of locations considering the prevailing

meteorological conditions, topography, nearby villages etc. The parameters for monitoring shall be PM10

and PM2.5, SO2, NOx, CO, NH3, O3, Lead, Nickel, Arsenic, Benzene &Benzo (a) Pyrene. Adequacy of the

existing air pollution control measures shall be studied.

3) Noise

Noise monitoring survey shall be carried out to characterize the noise environment in the study area. The

noise level shall be measured using high level precision sound level meter at suggested number of

locations. Attenuation model shall be developed to predict the noise level in the surrounding areas.

4) Water

Surface water samples and Ground water samples within study area shall be collected and analyzed for

physico- chemical analysis covering major, minor ions, some important heavy metals.

5) Land Environment

Soil samples were collected from the plant site, not only at its immediate vicinity but also in the

surrounding villages in a 10 km radial zone. Physico - Chemical properties of the soils were determined.

Information on land use pattern in the study area was also collected. Information regarding existing

cropping pattern, their types and yield of the crop was collected from various sources. Based on the

attenuation factors for dust aerosols and air pollutants, green belt species have been identified.



6) Eco System

Information on eco-system within 10 km radius was collected from the state Agricultural and Forest

departments. The important flora species native to the area is enumerated. A test check survey was also

under taken to judge the correctness of the data collected.

7) Socio Economic Environment

A field survey was conducted within 10 km radius of the proposed project. The parameters selected under

socio-economic component were demographic structure of the study area, provision of basic amenities,

industries likely to come up in the study area, welfare facilities proposed by the project proponent, safety

training and management, community and occupational health hazards. Relevant information was

collected from selected villages and analyzed.

Stage B Assessment of Environmental Impacts of Proposed Project

With the knowledge of baseline conditions in the study area and proposed project activities, impact on the

environment shall be discussed in detail covering air emissions, discharge of liquid effluents and

particulates emission during construction, noise & solid waste generation etc. Detailed projections shall

be made to reflect influence of the proposed project on different environmental components.

Assessment of potential damage to terrestrial and aquatic flora and fauna due to air emissions, discharge

of effluents, noise pollution, ash disposal, and change in land use pattern, habitat degradation and

fragmentation, anthropogenic activities from the proposed project and delineation of guidelines to

minimize adverse impacts is to be done. Assessment of economic benefits arising out of the project shall

be done.

Stage C Environmental Management Plan

At this stage, it may become apparent that certain mitigation measures are necessary to offset the impacts

from the proposed project. Environmental management plan and pollution control measures shall be

necessary to meet the requirements of the regulatory agencies.

Environmental Management Plan shall consist of mitigation measures for item-wise activity to be

undertaken for construction and operation of the facility for its entire life cycle to minimize adverse

environmental impacts. It shall also delineate the environmental monitoring plan for compliance of

various environmental regulations.

1.5.1 EIA Report

Based on the proposed TOR and additional TOR issued by MOEFCC, the EIA report will be prepared

covering Generic Structure of Environmental Impact Assessment Notification.

To chronological events for obtaining EC happened are given in Table 1.2



Table 1.2

Chronology of Events for Obtaining EC

Form 1 along with Pre-Feasibility report uploaded

MOEFCC online portal to obtain TOR Proposal No. IA/TG/MIS/33982/2015

dated 7th

Dec 2015

Presented before EAC Committee for obtaining TOR F. No 10-36/2015-1A-III

dated 22nd

Dec 2015 in 1st EAC Meeting

Additional details asked by Member Secretary for

Confirmation of TOR F. No 10-36/2015-1A.III

dated on 7th January 2016

Uploaded Additional details asked by Member Secretary F. No 10-36/2015-1A.III


TOR Granted after uploading Additional details F. No 10-236/2015-1A.III


CHAPTER 2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION



CHAPTER 2

PROJECT DESCRIPTION

2.1 Type of the Project

The Proposed Project is a Development of Integrated Common Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage,

Disposal and Recycling Facilities including Incineration for Industrial, Biomedical, E- Waste, Used Acid

Batteries, etc., at Kakkireni Village in Ramannapeta Mandal, Nalgonda District, Telangana.

2.2 Need for the Project

Industrial operations lead to considerable generation of hazardous waste. The major hazardous waste-

generating industries in Nalgonda & its surrounding districts include textile, tannery, leather, agro and

food processing, automobiles &auto components, electronics, chemical and petrochemical, fertilizers,

pharmaceuticals, mineral based industries, metallurgy and heavy engineering industries. Hazardous

wastes from the industrial sectors mentioned above contain heavy metals, cyanides, pesticides, complex

aromatic compounds (such as PCBs), and other chemicals which are toxic, flammable, reactive, corrosive

or have explosive properties affecting the environment.

Though the Common Hazardous Waste Treatment Storage, Disposal Facility exists at Hyderabad and

authorized to collect waste from the Surrounding districts of Nalgonda, the transportation cost for the

disposal of waste generated from the Nalgonda & Surrounding districts of the Nalgonda is high. In view

of the above and to curb cost of hazardous waste transportation a common facility is proposed in

Nalgonda.

2.2.1 Justification of the Project

According to Inventorisation and Characterization of hazardous waste Categories in Telangana State,

there are so many hazardous waste generating industries are in Nalgonda and surrounding Districts shown

in Table 2.1. To cater the need of disposal facility Ramky Enviro Engineers Limited proposed to

establish a facility meeting as per the CPCB guidelines.

Table 2.1

District wise Hazardous waste generating units

District No. of Industries Quantity of HW in MTPA

Recyclable Waste Incinerable Waste Landfillable Waste

Nalgonda 252 45959.2 20140.5 34117.8

Khammam 58 2835.9 231.5 46902.1

Mahaboobnagar 187 6164.9 1424.1 10652.3

Warangal 56 974.6 37.1 4457.0

Total 553 55934.6 21833.2 96129.2

Source: Inventorisation and Characterisation of Hazardous Waste Categories in Andhra Pradesh and

Telangana of the World Bank funded CBIPMP, APPCB



2.3 Location of the Project

The proposed project will be established in area of 74 Acres (29.94 Ha) situated at Survey No 261, 262,

263, 264, 275, 276, 279 and 280, Kakkireni Village, Ramannapeta Mandal, Nalgonda District, Telangana.

Topo Maps of 2 km, 5 km, and 10 km radius are shown in the Figure 2.1, 2.2 and 2.3 respectively. Site

photographs shown in Figure 2.4. layout of the proposed project are shown in Figure 2.5.



Figure 2.1

Topo Map of the Proposed Site (2 km)



Figure 2.2

Topo Map of the Proposed Site (5km)



Figure 2.3

Topo Map of the Proposed Site (10 km)



Figure 2.4

Site photographs



2.3.1 Capacities of the Proposed Project

The proposed project capacities are given in Table 2.2

Table 2.2

Proposed Project Capacities

Phase Type of Waste Units Capacity

Phase I Hazardous Waste Secured landfill 548 TPD

Treatment/Stabilization 383 TPD

Recycling Facility E waste 82 TPD

Spent Solvent Recycling 27 KLPD

Used Oil Recycling 54 KLPD

Used Lead Acid Batteries 65 TPD

Alternative Fuel and Raw Material 55 TPD

Bio Medical Waste 50000 @0.25kg/day/bed 12.5 TPD

Phase II Waste Plastic Recycling 27 TPD

Waste Paper Recycling 54 TPD

Incineration 55 TPD

Phase III Renewable Energy 2 MW

Waste to Energy 2 MW

Cost of the project Rs. 260 Crores

2.3.2 Justification for using 74 Acres of Land for the project

In general, The Integrated Treatment Storage Disposal Facility mainly comprises of secured landfill site

and incineration facility along with various other treatment facilities like E waste, Solvent/oil recovery

facility, Effluent treatment plant, Waste to Energy facility etc., In addition to above the other supporting

utilities which includes vehicle wash and work shop, weigh bridge, chemical laboratory, general stores,

fire hydrant, Admin building, staff canteen etc., The land area requires for treating and disposing the

hazardous waste (direct landfill & stabilization followed by landfill) of the proposed capacity is around

34.7 acres. Around 23.7 acres of land will be used for developing greenbelt around the boundary, along

the road etc. The remaining area around 15.6 acres is used for storage facility, utilities, tyre wash,

Incinerator, bio medical facility with effluent treatment plant, recycling facilities etc. Around 2 acres of

land is to be still acquired out of total 74 acres of land proposed.

A detailed layout map with breakup of each individual treatment units along with sizes is given in Figure

2.5 and Table 2.3.



Figure 2.5

Layout of the proposed site



Table 2.3

Individual Units List

Tag No Description Of Unit Size Quantity MoC

Phase - I

1 Security-Cum-Weigh Bridge 3.00 x 3.00 m 1 *RCC

2 Sample Collection Bay 4.25 x 1.76 m 1 RCC

3 Electrical Panel Room-Cum-DG P.F. 10.46 x 6.46 m 1 RCC

4 Administration Cum Lab Building

12.00 x 32.00 m

1

**PEB 5 General Stores 1

6 Vehicle Workshop 1

7 Workers/Driver’s Rest Rooms 10.00 x 8.00 m 1 RCC

8 Canteen 10.00 x 8.00 m 1 RCC

9 Under Ground Sump (50 kl.) 5.00 x 5.00 m 1 RCC

10 Waste Stabilization Shed 24.00 x 18.00 m 1 PEB

11 Temporary Stores

12 Vehicle Tyre Wash 6.00 x 15.00 m 1 RCC

13 Solar Evaporation Pond 40.00 x 60.00 m 1 --

14 Rain Water Collection Pond 20.00 x 20.00 m 1 --

15 E-Waste Recycling Facility 20.00 x 10.00 m 1 PEB

16 Solvent Waste/Used Oil Recovery 60.00 x 31.00 m 1 RCC/PEB

17 Bio-Medical Facility With E.T.P. 17.00 x 8.00 m 1 RCC/PEB

18 Total Secured Landfill (34.74Ac.) 140579 Sq.m. 1 --

Phase - II

19 Fire Hydrant & Water Storage Tank 20.00 x 10.00 m 1 RCC

20 Incinerable Waste Stores

45.00 x 20.00 m 1 PEB 21 Alternate Fuel & Raw Material

Facility (AFRF)

22 Blending Shed

23 U-LAB 20.46 x 40.46 m 1 PEB

24 Incinerator Plant 65.00 x 25.00 m 1 PEB

Phase - III

25 W2E / Renewable Energy 50.00 x 50.00 m 1 RCC/PEB

*RCC - Reinforced Cement Concrete

**PEB - Pre Engineered Building

2.4 Size of Operation and its Associated Activities

The project is proposed to be developed in three phases, In Phase I Secured land fill and

Treatment/Stabilization, Biomedical waste, E waste, spent solvent recycling, Used Oil recycling, Used

lead acid batteries recycling, Alternate fuel and raw material are proposed to be handled. Where as in

Phase II waste plastics recycling, wastepaper recycling, and incinerator. And in Phase III power

generation of 2MW with using renewable energy and 2 MW with waste to energy plants are proposed.



2.4.1 Land Area Breakup

The detailed breakup of the land required for various activities are given in Table 2.4.

Table 2.4

Land Area Breakup

S. No. Utility Area in Sq.m Area in Acres % of Area

1 Landfill area 140579 34.74 48.25

2 Facilities 31424 7.77 10.78

3 Roads 23232 5.74 7.97

4 Greenbelt 96145 23.76 33.00

Total 291380 72.00 100

2.4.2 Required Manpower

A detail of the skilled and unskilled manpower for the proposed project during construction and

operational phase is given below in Table 2.5.

Table 2.5

Manpower Details

S.

No. Details Construction

Operation (phases) Remarks

I II III Total

1 Management/Skilled 5 10 10 5 25 Permanent Staff

2 Semi-Skilled 10 40 30 5 75

3 Unskilled 50 50 40 30 120 On contract basis

Total 65 100 80 40 220

Note: Indirect employment due to the project will be around 50 persons

2.4.3 Water Requirement

Water requirement for the project will be met through the bore wells within the boundary premises. The

details of the water requirement are given in Table 2.6.

Table 2.6

Water Requirement

Sl. No Utility Phase-I Phase-II Phase-III Total

Cum/day Cum/day Cum/day Cum/day

1 Domestic 5 3 2 10

2 Floor Washings 2 1 1 4

3 Hazardous waste treatment, 2 20 - 22

4 Recycling 45 5 50

5 Bio medical waste 5 - - 5

6 Power plant

I Boiler 90 90

II Cooling Tower 110 110

7 Green belt 50 20 5 75

Total 109 49 208 366

Source: Ground Water/Village Panchayat Supply



2.4.4 Power and Fuel Requirement

The details of the power required for operation of the facility and fuel required for running DG sets for

emergency use during power failure are given in Table 2.7.

Table 2.7

Power and Fuel Requirement

Details Capacity Remarks

Power 1500 KVA From Telangana TRANSCO

Auxiliary Fuel for Incinerator

HSD/Furnace Oil 2 Kl./Day

From Local Dealers

DG Set 500 KVA DG set is used for emergency power backup,

Fuel will be procured from local dealers Diesel 80 Liters/hour

2.5 Process Description of Hazardous Wastes

The hazardous wastes to be handled by the proposed project are expected to comprise the following

groups:

Waste oil/used oil/skimmed oil/oily sludge

ETP sludge

Sludge from water treatment plants

Discarded containers used for chemicals and hazardous substances

Date expired / off specific /discarded chemicals and products

Ash from Hazardous waste incineration

Sludge generation from processing of waste water from recovery/ reuse/ recycle

Miscellaneous waste like used cotton, gloves, gum boots

Contaminated filter / filter bags

Contaminate centrifuge bags

Spent activated carbon and any other waste

Tank bottoms residues

Spent catalysts

Process dust

Dust / particulate from exhaust / flue gas treatment

Sulphur sludge

Oil contaminated earth

Resin residues

Asbestos containing waste

Sludge from solar ponds

Spent / used lead acid batteries

Alkaline and acidic and paint sludges

Spent resins from DM plant

Distillation residue / Tarry Waste

Cooling water sludge



Depending on the nature of the hazardous waste and its characteristic, various types of treatment and

disposal methods have been proposed according to the standards.

ETP sludge’s can go to landfill either directly or after stabilization.

Still bottom residues, process residues and other organic wastes can be sent for incineration

including spent carbon depending on the characteristics of the impurities.

Incineration ash, slag’s, asbestos and glass fibers are essentially inorganic in nature and can go to

landfill directly or with simple stabilization techniques.

Spent catalysts and resins would have to be characterized on a case-by-case basis to assess their

nature and characteristics. However, the percentage of wastes generated through these sources is

likely to be very small as most of it is taken back by the manufacturers.

Salts will have to be bagged and land filled.

Based on the above compiled information wastes have been classified by their pathway of

disposal:

o Wastes going to direct landfill

o Wastes that require stabilization prior to landfill

o Wastes requiring storage until alternate economically viable techniques are made

available.

o Wastes requiring incineration with or without pre treatment

Recycling Facilities:

The various types of wastes are used to recycle or recovery by the proposed project is expected to

comprise the following:

E waste such as TV’s, monitors of computer etc.,

Spent Solvents

o Isopropyl alcohol

o Butanol

o Toluene etc.,

Waste oil such as Lubricants, Transformer oil etc.,

Liquid type incinerable waste

Solid type incinerable waste

Lead acid Battery

Waste paper/plastic

The following general guidelines shall relate to daily activities associated with the operations of TSDF:

The secured landfill facility shall operate only during day light hours.

The landfill will be staged in cells so that the minimum practical area of waste is exposed and

maximum practical area of waste has the final cap in place i.e., progressive filling and capping of

the landfill ensuring minimization of infiltration of wastes

The Weigh Bridge at the main entrance will record all movements and weights and receive waste

tracking receipt as required by the waste manifest system.

The standpipe forming part of the leachate collection system shall be checked regularly for the

presence of leachate. Once leachate is detected it shall be regularly pumped out and transferred to



the leachate treatment facility on-site. The level of leachate in the standpipe shall not be allowed

to rise above the level of the leachate collection system.

Materials Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for every chemical used or handled at the landfill shall be

provided on the premises.

Monitoring and auditing of the facility shall be performed on a periodic basic.

Met-station shall be installed with continuous recording system.

A security system shall be maintained to avoid trespassing & hazard to public.

Once a waste is received at the TSDF, a sample of waste shall be collected, at the sampling

bay/temporary storage facility and shall undergo laboratory analysis based on which its pathway

of treatment/ disposal shall be determined.

A waste manifest system shall be developed in accordance with the requirement of the regulatory

agencies to cover the transportation of the waste to TSDF and to provide for record of waste

manifestation. The manifest system shall include details of the waste generator, waste transporter,

quantity of waste, characteristics of waste, description, consistency of waste in terms of physical

state and waste category number as per HW (M&H) Rules, 2003 & subsequent amendments

Each load of waste arriving at the facility shall be located properly and logged to identify its

pathway of treatment/ storage/ disposal.

An inventory shall be maintained at the arrival and departure dates of waste loads in and out of

the intractable waste storage area.

The pathways of the waste at the site is as follows

Comprehensive analysis of the wastes – Laboratory facilities

Decision of waste pathway of treatment/ storage/ disposal

Waste acceptance criteria

Collection and Transportation of wastes.

Waste received at site. Weighing and recording of waste receipt.

Sample collection (representative)

Storage at the temporary storage area.

Analysis (finger printing)

Waste disposal confirmation

Waste recycling/recovery

Waste Treatment and disposal.

2.5.1 Laboratory Facilities

A well advanced laboratory shall be established to carry out comprehensive analysis of hazardous wastes,

finger print analysis and Treatability studies to decide on the disposal path way as per the waste

acceptance criteria. Landfill QA/QC, environmental monitoring and any other analytical requirements.

Analytical equipment required for comprehensive analysis of the waste to be performed prior to

acceptance of the waste from the generator and fingerprinting analysis to be performed to confirm the

waste will be made available at the project site.



2.5.2 Collection and Transportation

For collection and Transportation own vehicles as per demand will be provided. Type of vehicles used

will be of relevant capacity (Crane mounted / containerized collection and loading vehicles /covered

trucks / trucks having pneumatic loading / unloading arrangements). The 6 copy manifest system and

TREM card system as per the Hazardous Waste Rules shall be implemented.

Experienced drivers shall be selected for the purpose. Eligibility shall be minimum 10th

Standard pass.

They shall be trained in operating the manifest system and management of TREM card system. As a

practice a trained driver and helper will accompany the truck to ensure that the manifest system and

TREM card arrangement are properly maintained. Drivers and helpers shall be trained to take care of

pollution arising out of emergency and first aid in case of injuries.

Washing of tanker/ container and disposal of effluent: Each container of vehicle shall be thoroughly

washed prior to being sent to the industry for collection of wastes. The collected water shall be treated

and shall be taken to the leachate treatment facility.

The manifest system shall contain information regarding:

Details of waste generator

Details of waste transporter

Quantitative and qualitative description of waste materials.

Consistency of the waste

Waste category number and characteristics

Precautionary measures for handling the wastes

Emergency procedures to be followed.

The 6 copies of the system shall be distributed as outlined below:

Waste Generator shall retain one copy (1)

Generator to the state PCB. (1)

Transporter (1)

Operator to transporter(1)

Operator to PCB (1)

Operator (1)

All other records in respect of the TSDF operation shall be maintained properly and kept available to

regulators as and when required.

2.5.3 Storages

Temporary Storage Facility will be provided primarily to store the wastes upon receipt at the facility until

its pathway of waste disposal is determined. The temporary waste storage facility shall keep each

shipment of wastes separately and ensure that wastes do not get mixed with each other. This is to ensure

that incompatible wastes are kept segregated. Compatible wastes that can be mixed with others and those

that can be stored in drums/containers are kept away from incompatible wastes. Incinerable wastes are



stored separately in a shed following compatibility and labeling of the wastes. CPCB guidelines for the

storage of incinerable wastes shall be followed.

Intractable Waste Storage Area that is Waste coming to the TSDF that does not meet the criteria for

landfill disposal or treatment or incineration would be referred to as intractable wastes. It is proposed to

have a suitable storage area for these categories of waste until alternate viable treatment technologies are

identified and become available.

Proper ventilation shall be provided to prevent accumulation of hazardous gases.

The floor shall be a concrete slab or other impermeable, non-reactive material properly bunded

and graded towards one corner for the collection of accidental spillage and leakage.

The storage area shall be built not less than 1m above the 1:100 year flood level (nearest river) to

avoid inundation.

Bunding and/or drains shall be provided around the storage area to avoid storm water entering

into this area.

Fire control equipment shall be installed, appropriate to the characteristics of the waste and as the

situation demands.

2.5.4 Waste Disposable Operations

2.5.4.1 Waste Stabilization

Waste stabilization is designed to convert industrial wastes in the form of liquids, semi-solids or reactive

solids into low leachable materials that can be deposited into a secured landfill. The stabilization

operation will be carried out for all waste that requires this to minimize their contaminant leaching

potential. This will change the nature of these wastes to a less hazardous category. Stabilization involves

the immobilization of leachable materials by fixation as non-reactive solids. The treated wastes shall be

assessed for compatibility with other wastes before being landfill and for compatibility with the HDPE

and the pipe network. The term stabilization covers a number of mechanisms including:

Immobilization / Chemical Fixation – the chemical binding of contaminants within a cementing

structure to reduce the mobility or leachability of the waste.

Encapsulation – the occlusion or entrapment of contaminant particles within a solid matrix.

Solidification – the conversion of slurries that do not readily de-water, into solids by addition of

adsorption agents.

Typical reagents that would be used for the stabilization process include cement, lime, fly ash, bentonite

clay, saw dust and other. Where required sodium silicate solution would be used as an additive binding

agent. The reagent to be used for stabilization shall be decided depending upon the type of the waste to be

stabilized, price and availability. These regents shall generally be Stored in sufficient quantities. The

Infrastructure proposed for the stabilization unit would include:

Storage facilities for regents

Tanks/Drums for storage of reagents as required

Stabilization bins for mixing the wastes

Earth moving equipment for movement of wastes and mixing.



Place for curing the treated waste

Trucks for hauling the wastes.

Treatment facility utilizes a range of techniques and processes designed to change the physical, chemical

or biological characteristics of the waste. This may include changing the composition so as to neutralize

the waste, to recover energy or natural resources from the waste, to render the waste non-hazardous or

less hazardous, safer to transport, store, or dispose off or to reduce its volume. Typical operations at

Stabilization unit are as follows:

Waste receive

Reagent addition

Mixing

Curing

Analysis of the stabilized wastes

Approval by the laboratory for disposal

Transfer of the waste materials to the truck

Disposal in the secured landfill

Application criteria: A study of the waste characteristics carried out as an integral part of the project

indicates the following applicability to the process described below in Table 2.8

Table 2.8

Stabilization Mechanism based on Waste Characteristics

Mechanism Applicability

Immobilization /

Chemical Fixation

Heavy metal and metal plating sludge

Copper-chromium-arsenic wood preservative wastes

Mercury waste

Bag house dust

Tannery wastes

Spent catalysts

Others

Solidification Effluent treatment plant sludge

Oil and paint sludge

Bitumen wastes

Textile industry sludge

Wool scouring slurries

Others

Encapsulation

Aluminum powder

Asbestos

Filer aids

Others



2.5.4.2 Secured Landfill

The landfill will be designed and constructed as a secure facility to contain the waste material and any

leachate, which is formed by the entrapped moisture or by infiltration of rainfall. To meet these

requirements the base of the landfill has been designed as an engineered liner constructed prior to the

placement of waste and also an engineered capping over the surface after completion of filling to

minimize the infiltration of rainfall.

The base liner of the landfill containment system is proposed to be a double composite liner with

synthetic geo-membrane plus clay. Adequate leachate collection system shall be incorporated at the base

to collect and remove the leachate. These shall incorporate HDPE pipes embedded in drainage layers of

sand/ gravel and /or geonet/ geotextile. The composite liner (Secondary liner) shall comprise of a 0.45-m

thick clay compacted to a permeability less than 10-9

m/s and above this shall be a HDPE liner with

permeability less than 10–14

m/s above which a complete drainage system shall be placed. Above the

secondary base liner shall be placed a primary liner comprising of primarily clay layer and HDPE

membrane which will prevent infiltration into the secondary layer. A leachate collection and removal

system shall also be placed over the primary liner to collect and remove any leachate generated by

infiltration of precipitation or by the moisture entrapped in the waste. This makes the secondary system to

serve as a leak detection system and an early warning of potential future liabilities to necessitate action

for remediation. Above the drainage system of the primary liner shall be placed a geo-textile filter to act

as a filter/ barrier between the waste and the drainage system. This entire system would make the base

liner a double composite liner meeting the national laws.

Clay Liner consists of a varying proportions of hydrated aluminum silicates (e.g. kaolnite, bentonite,

illite and montmorillonite) which, when properly compacted, form a soil mass with a very low hydraulic

conductivity. The clay material for use as the liner at this landfill shall be analyzed and permeability

testing shall be carried out to ascertain its low permeability. Design permeability of the clay liner has been

fixed at 10–09

m/s and with availability of clay liner; we will be able to achieve better results than the

design values. Placement of clay liner shall be most critical in terms of its efficiency of functioning. Clay

should be placed in layers not exceeding 200-mm and shall be compacted to attain the required

permeability. The clay layer after attaining the 0.45m thickness should be then checked for its

permeability. Further to this, clay shall be kept moist to ensure that it does not dry up and cause cracks to

the lining system. To ensure this we intend to keep the clay for the purpose at +4% wet of optimum

moisture content.

Synthetic Liners consists of various synthetic flexible membrane liners have been considered for use as

the primary liner at the proposed landfill. Both Poly-Vinyl Chloride (PVC) and High – Density

Polyethylene (HDPE) liners are generally suitable for this landfill. Tensile strength is a fundamental

design consideration in order to assess the ability of the liner to resist uniaxial and biaxial strains, which

occurs in the landfill. Another stress strain consideration is the coefficient of thermal expansion.

Considering various membrane properties it is decided to use HDPE liner with appropriate thickness as

primary liner for the base of the landfill. HDPE was selected for the following reasons:



Adequate strength to withstand mechanical strength during construction, placement and

operations.

Acceptable weathering performance.

Superior physical properties under chemical and environmental exposure to wastes

Capability to withstand the seaming process.

The hydraulic conductivity of HDPE is of the order of 0.5*10–16

m/sec, which is effectively impermeable.

Construction of the seam welding process shall be subjected to strict QA/QC measures to ensure the

integrity of the liner.

Secure Landfill is the final placement area for land fillable hazardous wastes which are treated or wastes

does not require treatment. Waste directly or after treatment will be disposed in the landfill as per the

laboratory advice. Waste will be spread in the landfill using heavy earth machinery and then compacted

using vibro compactor. At the end of the landfill operations 10 – 15 cm soil cover is placed as a daily

cover.

During rainy season a flexible geo-membrane cover shall be placed over the uncapped area of the landfill

minimize infiltration of rainfall into the landfill; the rain water shall be diverted to join the surface water

drains. At the end of the total landfill operations the final capping shall be done using composite liner

with clay and synthetic geo-membrane, with vegetative soil cover grass cover. The cross section of the

landfill meeting MOEF Guidelines is given in Figure 2.6



Figure 2.6

Cross section of the landfill

2.5.4.3 Leachate Management

Leachate generated from the landfills is effectively collected and treated off without causing any adverse

effect to the environment. Leachate treatment at the proposed TSDF shall be solar evaporation pan of the

wastewater and shall be done in forced evaporation system constructed for the purpose and the residue

shall be reprocessed as hazardous solid waste.

A very critical aspect in wastewater management would be minimization of generation of leachate/

wastewater. To minimize the same we propose to keep a maximum portion of the landfill covered

especially during the monsoon, thus minimizing the generation of leachate.

Liner System Specifications:Double composite Liner as explained in Landfill Section



Capping Arrangement: Yes, Section as defined in Landfill Section

Monsoon capping:Yes, during monsoon the facility shall be under monsoon covers.

Primary collection System:300-mm Drainage media with lateral and header pipes

Secondary Collection System:300-mm Drainage media with lateral and header pipes / Geo net

Leachate collection and removal shall be provided above the geo-membrane in two layers viz. the

primary and the secondary liner. The primary liner shall serve as leachate collection and removal system,

while the secondary liner shall serve as leak detection system and a signal of potential liabilities in terms

of environmental pollution.

Leachate shall be collected by a network of lateral and header pipes embedded in a drainage layer, all of

which shall eventually drain into a leachate collection sump. The collected leachate shall be transferred to

a leachate treatment system. Leachate, thus collected shall be transferred to the solar evaporation system

and the residue after decanting shall be subjected back to the land filling process.

The leachate collection system in an engineered landfill takes the form of an under-drain beneath the

waste material it is required to ensure there is no more than a limited head of pressure above the base liner

to cause leakage of liquid from the base of the landfill. The design maximum pressure head in the

proposed landfill shall be limited to 300 mm.

Drainage is affected by a layer of about 300 mm thick of graded sand/gravel having a high permeability.

Within this layer a network of HDPE pipes are placed to collect leachate and conduct it quickly to the

collection sump for removal from landfill. The pipes are typically perforated only over the upper half to

allow the leachate to enter the pipe and thereafter to be contained within the pipe network system. The

layout of the pipe network generally includes sufficient redundancy to ensure that if a blockage occurs

somewhere in the network the leachate simply backs-up a little then flows into the system a little further

up-gradient. Two layers of the leachate collection system shall be provided one over the other. Slotting

area of the pipe shall be done only on the top 120o portion of the pipe and to an extent of 100 Sq. cm per

running meter of the pipe.

The key design features of the leachate collection system to be installed at the proposed landfill comprise

the following:

A network of semi perforated HDPE pipes laid out directly over the primary and secondary liners

and graded towards the collection sump at no less that 1 and 2% slope, with a slotting area of 100

Sq. Cm per running meter of the pipe.

A drainage layer 300 mm thick of graded sand/gravel placed over the entire base of the landfill,

covering the pipe network.

A geo-textile placed over the primary liner serving the purpose of filter/ barrier between the waste

and the drainage media.



The pipe shall have sufficient strength to withstand the load imposed by the overlying waste and the earth

moving activities associated with the placement and the compaction of the waste (Min 6 Kg/ Sq.cm). The

main pipe (headers) feeding leachate to the sump shall have the capability to be cleaned out in case of

clogging. However, the design shall include sufficient redundancy of pipe work to ensure alternative

drainage paths are available in the event of localized clogging of any part of the system. Leachate

treatment plant design is discussed in the subsequent section.

Quantity of Leachate Generated from Landfill:

I = P – PCR/O – AET +/- S

Where,

I - Rate of Infiltration

P -Precipitation

PCR/O- Coefficient of Runoff

AET -Actual Evapo-Transpiration

S -Soil Moisture Content Retention Capacity

Empirically,

For Capped portion of landfill: I = 0.01 P

For Uncapped Portion of landfill: I = 0.7 P

Landfill with temporary cover: I = 0.3 P

Drainage of surface run-off, its collection, treatment (if required based on pre-determined criteria)

and disposal:

Network of open channels have been designed and shall be constructed around the land fill to intercept

surface runoff of rainwater and divert it around the facility or collect it for the use at the facility or for

disposal. Storm water collected on the land fill site will be directed to a first flush retention pond which

shall be designed for a sufficient capacity to cover a 1in 100 years 10 minutes storm event.

Storm water drainage system

Storm water drainage is one of the main components of landfill facility. The arrangement shall be such

that the storm water from landfill facility has to be collected effectively in drainage system and conveyed

away from facility quickly. Storm water drain shall be of trapezoidal shape / rectangular with

concrete/Pitching. The inside part of drain has to be plastered with cement mortar. Storm water drain

shall be constructed all along between the road and the green belt.

First flush retention Pond:

Surface water runoff is a significant component in a landfill design and shall be clearly designed. The

design includes a garland drainage system all around the landfill which shall be lined and shall be

connected to a storm water collection pond. Water collected in the pond shall be tested for storm water

quality parameters and if it meets the discharge standards shall be discharged, otherwise the same shall be

considered as leachate and sent to the leachate treatment plant.



2.5.5 Incinerator

Incineration is an ultimate treatment process, applied to certain wastes that cannot be recycled, reused or

safely deposited into a landfill. It is a high temperature, thermal destruction oxidation process in which

hazardous wastes are converted in the presence of oxygen in air into gases and incombustible solid

residue. The gases are vented into the atmosphere with cleaning as deemed necessary while the solid

residue is sent to landfill for disposal. The proposed incinerator would cater for the disposal/ destruction

of the following wastes:

Spent Solvents

Waste Oils, Oil Emulsions and Oil mixtures

Pesticide Wastes

Refinery Wastes

Pharmaceutical Wastes

Phenolic Wastes

Grease and Wax Wastes

Organic wastes containing halogens, sulphur, phosphorous or nitrogen compounds

Solid materials contaminated with oils.

Organics with high calorific value

The primary objective of incinerator is to destroy the wastes as completely as possible, to have end

products (solids and gases) that are harmless when released from the incinerator and to minimize the

formation of new hazardous organic compounds. To achieve the same the incinerator is proposed with

sufficient temperature, time and turbulence and in presence of excess air. Incinerator is the facility for

final disposal of incinerable wastes. Wastes which are not fit for disposal in the landfill and are

candidates for incineration shall be disposed in the incinerator. The wastes shall be pre-processed in case

of necessary for making it uniform calorific value and maintain the norms of halogen concentrations less

than 1% and all. Wastes are fed through cart dumper and ram feeder into the rotary kiln and the hot gases

are sent to the secondary combustion chamber. The residence time and the desired temperatures are

maintained at both primary and secondary combustion chambers for complete combustion as per CPCB

guidelines for hazardous waste incineration. The gases after complete combustion shall be sent to spray

drier / evaporative cooler for cooling followed by Gas cleaning equipment.

The gases are passed through multi cyclones for removal of particulates. Then dry lime and activated

carbon are injected for neutralization of acidic gases and removal of organic constituents if any. The flue

gases then passed through bag filters for complete removal particulates and then through wet alkaline

scrubber for neutralization. The flue gases after completely cleaned in all respects shall be sent out

through a 30 m stack. The ash generated during the combustion process and collected at the bottom of the

hopper will be send to landfill facility. The typical layout of the Incinerator is shown in Figure 2.7,



Figure 2.7

Typical Layout of incinerator

2.6 Bio Medical Waste

Growth in population, industrialization and changing life styles and food habits have brought with it

various health related issues. More and more people are suffering from ailments. Alongside this is the

growing awareness towards utilizing proper medical facilities. This has created the need for a whole range

of health care establishments, hospitals, clinics, laboratories which are generating “Bio-Medical Wastes”

that are incompatible with the environment. These wastes need professional attention for effective

management as the infectious nature of the waste can cause irreparable damage to the human health and

the environment. It has become imperative to monitor and control the management and handling of these

wastes.

The concern about disposal of infectious wastes generated by the hospitals is increasing rapidly due to the

fear of the spread of viruses such as Acquired Immune Deficiency Syndrome (AIDS) and Hepatitis B.

These wastes (bio-medical wastes generated from health care establishments) present a high risk of

causing potential damage to the human health and the environment by way of spreading. To prevent the

spread of such infectious wastes that finds its genesis in bio-medical wastes (from hospitals, clinics,

laboratories, dispensaries etc.) a scientific approach is required. It is essential that professionally trained

personnel should handle the wastes and that the wastes should be disposed scientifically.



To enable effective management and handling of the bio-medical wastes, the Ministry of Environment

and Forests Climate Change (MOEFCC) has issued regulations for the management and handling of these

wastes. In response to these rules, Government and major Private Hospitals initiated their arrangements

for treatment and disposal of bio-medical wastes. However, the smaller nursing homes, clinics and other

similar institutions which do not have or can afford such facilities need alternate modalities and

arrangements to dispose their wastes, in accordance with the Rules.

In view of the difficulties faced by private hospitals, nursing homes and clinics that could not make their

own arrangements due to high cost involved in setting up treatment and disposal facilities, the need for a

centralized system for treatment was felt. Consequentially, in September 2003, the Central Pollution

Control Board enunciated the “Guidelines for Common Bio-Medical Waste Treatment Facility”

which in addition to providing common facilities discouraged the setup of individual incineration

facilities by health care establishments.

2.6.1 Categories of Bio Medical Waste as per BMW rules

Categories of Bio Medical Waste is given in the Table 2.9 below

Table 2.9

Categories of Bio Medical Waste

Option Waste Category Treatment & Disposal

Category

No. I

Human Anatomical Waste

(human tissues, organs, body parts)

Incineration #/deep burial*

Category

No. 2

Animal Waste

(animal tissues, organs, body parts carcasses, bleeding

parts, fluid, blood and experimental animals used in

research, waste generated by veterinary hospitals colleges,

discharge from hospitals, animal)

Incineration#/ deep burial*

Category

No 3

Microbiology & Biotechnology Waste

(wastes from laboratory cultures, stocks or specimens of

micro-organisms live or attenuated vaccines, human and

animal cell culture used in research and infectious agents

from research and industrial laboratories, wastes from

production of biologicals, toxins, dishes and devices used

for transfer of cultures)

local autoclaving / micro-

waving / incineration#

Category

No 4

Waste sharps

(Needles, syringes, scalpels, blades, glass, etc. that may

cause puncture and cuts. This includes both used and

unused sharps)

Disinfection (chemical

treatment # 01/auto claving

/ microwaving and

mutilation/ shredding**



Category

No 5

Discarded Medicines and Cytotoxic drugs

(wastes comprising of outdated, contaminated and

discarded medicines)

Incineration #/destruct ion

and drugs disposal in

secured landfills drugs

disposal in secured

Category

No 6

Solid Waste

(Items contaminated with blood, and body fluids including

cotton dressings, soiled plaster casts, lines, beddings, other

material contaminated with blood)

Incineration # autoclaving /

micro-waving

Category

No. 7

Solid Waste

(Wastes generated from disposable items other than the

waste shaprs such as tubings, catheters, intravenous sets

etc).

Disinfection by chemical

treatment@/autoclaving/mi

cro-waving and

mutilation/shredding

Category

No. 8

Liquid Waste

(waste generated from laboratory and washing, cleaning,

house-keeping and disinfecting activities)

Disinfection by chemical

treatment@ and discharge

into drains.

Category

No. 9

Incineration Ash

(ash from incineration of any bio-medical waste)

Disposal in municipal

landfill

Category

No. 10

Chemical Waste

(Chemicals used in production of biologicals, chemicals

used in disinfection, as insecticides, etc.)

Chemical treatment @ and

discharge into drains for

liquids and secured landfill

for solids

@Chemicals treatment using at least 1% hypochlorite solution or any other equivalent chemical reagent.

It must be ensured that chemical treatment ensures disinfection.

**Multilation/shredding must be such so as to prevent unauthorised reuse.

#there will be no chemical pretreatment before incineration. Chlorinated plastics shall not be incinerated.

*Deep burial shall be an option available only in towns with population less than five lakhs and in rural

areas.

Options given above are based on available technologies. Occupier/operator wishing to use other State-of

the-art technologies shall approach the Central Pollution Control Board to get the standards laid down to

enable the prescribed authority to consider grant of authorization.



2.6.2 Color Coding and Type of Container for Disposal of Bio-Medical Wastes

Color

Coding

Type of Container -I Waste Category Treatment options as per

Table 2.9

Yellow Plastic bag Cat. 1, Cat. 2, and Cat. 3,

Cat. 6.

Incineration/deep burial

Red Disinfected

container/plastic bag

Cat. 3, Cat. 6, Cat.7. Autoclaving/Microwaving/

Chemical Treatment

Blue/White

translucent

Plastic bag/puncture

proof Container

Cat. 4, Cat. 7.

Autoclaving/Microwaving/

Chemical Treatment and

destruction/shredding

Black Plastic bag Cat. 5 and Cat. 9 and

Cat. 10. (solid)

Disposal in secured landfill

Note:

1. Color coding of waste categories with multiple treatment options as defined in Table 2.9, shall be

selected depending on treatment option chosen, which shall be as specified in Table 2.9.

2. Waste collection bags for waste types needing incineration shall not be made of chlorinated plastics.

3. Categories 8 and 10 (liquid) do not require containers/bags.

4. Category 3 if disinfected locally need not be put in containers/bags.

2.6.3 Collection and Transportation

Bio-medical waste will be collected from each health care establishment on a regular basis. Wastes shall

be segregated as per the color coding, properly packed and placed at a secure designated point by the

health care establishment from where it will be collected. Upon collection wastes shall be placed into

closed containers enclosed in a containerized vehicle and transported to the site. The vehicles shall be

dedicated for the purpose and shall adopt the conditions specified in the BMW (Management &

Handling) Rules-1998 & subsequent amendments.

2.6.4 Disinfection and Destruction

Upon receipt of the waste at the facility, wastes containers shall be unloaded. Wastes based on their

colour codes shall be separated and properly treated and disposed off. Categories 1, 2, 3 and 6 (as per

MOEFCC rules) shall be directly loaded into the incinerator while categories 4 and 7 shall be loaded into

the autoclave for dis-infection. Ash, residue from high temperature incineration and other material

residues from the process shall be collected into containers and shall be disposed into a secured landfill.



2.6.5 Bio Medical Waste Incineration

The incinerator proposed for Hazardous waste will be used for incineration of Bio-medical Waste, hence

it is a common facility for incineration of all incinerable wastes coming to the facility.

2.6.6Autoclave

The primary purpose of autoclave is to sterilize / disinfect the waste with steam. Microorganisms which

contribute to infection do not survive beyond 80oC. However, as a precaution MOEFCC has stipulated a

temperature of 120oC with 15psi pressure and 60 min duration to ensure distribution of temperature. At

this temperature and pressure, microorganisms are completely destroyed and thus render the wastes

infection free. The dis-infected waste shall then be segregated into HDPE, PP, rubber, latex, glass and

metal. The segregated materials shall then be shredded completing the process of disinfection and

ensuring non-recycling of the waste materials for medical / food grade purposes. All the process control

conditions will be as per the applicable Bio medical rules.

2.6.6.1 Autoclave Features

A vacuum type (programmable) autoclave which can operate at all the specifications mentioned by

MOEFCC is proposed.

The autoclave shall have continuous and automatic recording of temperature, pressure, date, time and

batch of loading. Every batch shall be monitored with a strip chart recorder and once in a month the

spore validation test and/or spore monitoring shall be done.

Following are the key features of the proposed autoclave:

Type: Vacuum Type, automatic with documentation

Capacity: 432 liters per hour

Temperature: 120°C

Pressure: 15 psi

Automation: PLC with MMI ( Man-Machine interface)

Documentation/ Recording: Computerized recording

The Layout of typical autoclave sterilization process is given in Figure 2.8



Figure 2.8

Layout of Autoclave Sterilization Process

2.6.7 Other Infrastructure

The other infrastructure required /proposed in Bio-medical Waste Treatment Section is as follows

Effluent Treatment Plant: An ETP to treat the scrubbing water, floor washings and other

wastewater from the plant is proposed and treated water is reused for circulation into the

scrubber. The treatment system consist of cooling tank, pressure sand filter and activated carbon

filter assembly followed by neutralization before recirculation into the scrubber.

Shredder: A mechanical shredder to make the waste unrecognizable as medical waste shall be

installed with a capacity to handle about 100 kg of medical wastes per hour with its

D.O.L.Starter. Shredder Motor Capacity of 10 HP and used 3 High speed Blades.

Landfill: The residue will be sent to secured landfill site.

2.7 E Waste Recycling

The assessment of e-waste recycling sector in India indicates that e-waste trade starts from formal

dismantling sector and moves to informal recycling sector. There are no large scale organized e-waste

recycling facilities in India at present except few in some states of India, while most of the e-waste

recycling units are operating in un-organized sector. So, this will be an opportunity for us to serve the

industries by handling their E-waste. The main objective of the proposed E-Waste facility is given below.

Sterilization Process

Steam Boiler

Temperature Pressure

W

A

S

T

E

IN

OUT

Release Valve

Steam Trap

Vacuum PumpWater

VALIDATION – Must. Daily – Indicator Strip Testing with Loads

Weekly Spore Testing for Efficiency of sterilisation

Microprocessor Controlled –

Vacuum-Steam Cycles

Temperature - Pressure

To Shredder



To provide Safe and Secured Destruction services at project site to ensure intellectual property

assurance.

To provide innovative and pollution-free technology for recycling of E-waste.

To provide Environmental management system and solutions.

To recover up to 99% of total waste received

To enhance customer service through online account access.

To conserve natural resource & ensuring working towards global warming

The proposed project consists of the following facilities

World class security systems

Certified, Safe and Secured destruction services

Comprehensive EHS practices

Logistics, warehousing facility

Highly skilled manpower

2.7.1 Methodology

The methodology proposed to be followed at the E-Waste facility is as follows. Upon client request,

project management shall arrange a suitable and secured transport to collect the material from Clients

premises.

Collected material shall be weighed, if desired by clients at their premises using their own

weighing machine and witnessed by both parties.

Manifest to be issued by generator to transport with 6 colored copies as per HW Rules, 2008.

Delivery Order will be issued by Client prior to collection from their premises. Collected

material is to be provided in good packaging condition and thereafter will be transported to the

facility.

After inspection by project security guard, material shall be weighed at site weighbridge to

determine the gross weight of the material and will then be sent to its warehouse for acceptance.

Goods Receive Note (GRN) for the gross weight will be issued upon receiving the material at the

warehouse.

Material will then be sent for dismantling section under IDO (Internal Delivery Order) for

dismantling.

Destruction process can be witnessed by Client, if required.

Upon data destruction completed, official destruction certificate will be issued to Client for

records.

Dismantled material will then be sent to suitable recycling process.

2.7.2 Process Description

The process involved in proposed integrated E Waste recycling facility is basically physical destruction

and recovery of Platinum Group Metals (PGM’s). The steps of proposed process is described in following

paragraphs

The e-waste received from generator shall be stored at earmarked covered shed having concrete

floor and leak proof roof. Wooden or plastic pallets shall be provided to store the waste.



Waste which may contain mainly electronic and electrical material and monitors of computer or

TV’s, shall be shifted to manual dismantling section in hand trolleys

A set of 8 to 10 no. of work stations are proposed with a suction hood for any dust particle

coming out of the dismantling process. A team of experts in dismantling shall be deputed for

dismantling purpose with all the required tools and tackles. The tools and tackles shall be

identified with best available brand to ensure optimization in working and to avoid small

accidents in the process. The employees at this section shall be provided with all the required

PPE’s i.e. apron, safety shoes, gloves, dust mask etc. Fire extinguishers shall be provided in the

working area.

The team deputed shall dismantle all the waste articles Eg. computer CPU box, hard drive, CD

ROM, cables, PCB’s etc. and monitor into back cover and picture tube. The hard drive, PCB’s

shall be further dismantled into components attached and naked PCB’s.

The dismantled PCB’s shall be sent for shredding followed by crushing and pulverizing. The

product shall be powder of PCB from which metal and non metal part which shall be segregated

by physical process. Both the products shall be stored in bags for disposal for recovery (metal

part) and for making of toys and monuments (non metal part). In case the non- metal part fails to

be recycled, the same shall be disposed into incinerator as this consists of residue with high C.V.

The dismantled picture tube shall send to Cathode Ray Tube (CRT) cutting m/c, which is a closed

chamber attached with a hood connected to cyclone and bughouse.

The CRT shall be put into the control panel connected automatic CRT cutting frame. The CRT

shall be cut into two pieces i.e. front glass and funnel glass.

The glass which is free from all coating etc shall be crushed further and stored in bags to be

dispatched for recycling

The components removed from PCBs shall be segregated and stored in bags for further disposal

and/or reuse.

The ferrous material i.e. cabinet, body of monitor etc shall be baled and disposed for recycling

Plastic from cabinet, monitor shall be shredded in the shredder and sold out for recycling to

authorized recyclers

The chemical process for recovery of PGM shall be established during phase – I

The waste generated from above process shall be stored at earmarked area and not allow the

waste to be exposed to the environment. The process flow sheet is given in Figure 2.9.



Figure 2.9

E Waste proposed Flow Chart

Plastics

COLLECTION

Storage

Data Destruction

Segregation

Dismantling Testing/Refurbishing Storage

Disposal

Shredding

Delaminating

SALE TO

RECYCLERS

Ferrous Metal

Separator

CRT

Store

Sale to

Recyclers

PCB

&Components

Precious

Metals

SIEVING

Density

Separator

Copper Lead Aluminum

SALE TO

RECYCLERS

SALE TO

RECYCLERS

SALE TO

RECYCLERS

Recyclables

FERRROUS METAL

SALE TO RECYCLERS



2.8 Recycling Facilities

The recycling facilities proposed for the site are

Spent solvent recycling

Used oil recycling

Alternative fuel and raw material facility

Used Lead acid battery recycling facility

Waste plastic recycling

Waste paper recycling

2.8.1 Spent Solvent Recycling

Spent solvents are recovered using a distillation methodology. Following are few solvents proposed to be

separated /distilled initially:

Isopropyl alcohol

Butanol

Dimethyl formamide

Toluene and

Ortho dichloro benzene

Storage of spent solvents

The waste solvent shall be received in drums (MS/Plastic) and shall be stored in shed which will

be provided with garland drain, fire hydrant system, lined floor etc.

The drums shall be stacked as per the best practices. The leakages shall be avoided at any point of

time.

A separate storage shed sized 35x40 m is proposed adjacent to facility to store the solvent drums.

The stacking of drums shall be in the manner that mixing of solvent drums shall be avoided at

maximum extent.

Distillation process is suitable for the recovery of many spent solvents. Distillation can be a batch or

continuous operation. It is proposed to adopt batch process in the proposed facility. The process involves

pre-treatment of neutralization and separation of spent solvent feed mixture in a Reactor. After layer

separation, the spent solvent mixture will be sent to distillation still connected to distillation column. The

solvent mixture is heated by steam and the distillation column will be under total reflux for a specific

period. Fractionation of solvent takes place solvent / water as the case may be are separated initially

under atmospheric pressure and later under vacuum (if required). Distilled solvents are analyzed, stored

and recycled, liquid effluent mostly condensate will be recycled back into system and solid residue sent

for incineration / landfill. Steam for heating will be donor from the boiler. The process diagram of the

solvent recovery is depicted below:

2.8.1.1 Process Description

Distillation can be a batch or continuous operation. It is proposed to adopt batch process in the proposed

facility. The process involves pre-treatment of neutralization and separation of spent solvent feed mixture

in a Reactor. After layer separation, the spent solvent mixture will be sent to distillation still connected to

distillation column. The solvent mixture is heated by steam and the distillation column will be under total



reflux for a specific period. Fractionation of solvent takes place solvent / water as the case may be are

separated initially under atmospheric pressure and later under vacuum (if required). Distilled solvents are

analyzed, stored and recycled, liquid effluent mostly condensate will be recycled back into system and

solid residue sent for incineration / landfill. Steam for heating will be donor from the boiler. Flow chart

for Spent Solvent recovery is shown in Figure 2.10.

Figure 2.10

Flow Chart of Spent Solvent Recovery

Incinerator

Cooling Tower

Chiller

Main Product

receiver

Solvent received in

Drums

Pre - Treatment

( Adjusting pH,

removal of SS etc.)

Pump

Feed Tank

Pump

Agitated Vessel

Sludge

Column

Condenser

Cooler

Trail product receiver

Collection Tank Collection Tank

Pump

Feed Tank/

Incinerator

Pump

Drums



2.8.2 Used Oil Recycling

Used oil is termed as hazardous. Lube oil does not wear out with use it only gets contaminated with

water, carbon and fuel etc. that means used oil when it is ready for rejection can be re-used.

The methods of disposal being followed are Dumping, Burning or Reprocessing. The Used / Waste Oil

generated are not easily biologically degradable. Therefore, dumping of Used / Waste oil is harmful to

environment.

Burning of Used / Waste Oil is not desirable for the following reasons:

Waste Fuel Oil contains substantial quantity of water that will prevent proper burning of fuel and

lead to generation of carbon monoxide.

The Used Oil (used lubricants, Transformer oils etc), they may contain chemicals, metallic

compounds, Polychlorinated Biphenyl (PCBs) etc which when burned will release gas to the

atmosphere. Therefore, burning of used / Waste Oil should not be encouraged.

The other option is Repressing. Improper reprocessing methods can lead to generation of waste

which is even more hazardous than Used / Waste Oil.

Therefore, reprocessing should be allowed only with approved methods. Reprocessing of Used /

Waste will not only be a solution for disposal of waste but it will have tremendous economic

advantage.

The process diagram of the waste/ used oil recycling plant will be as below in Figure 2.11

Figure 2.11

Waste/ Used Oil Recycling Plant

Was te Oil R ec eiv ing Tanks

Was te Oil R ec eiv ing Tanks

MIC R O F IL TR ATION

MIC R O F IL TR ATION

C E NTR IF UG EC E NTR IF UG E DE HY DR ATION

DE HY DR ATION

Dis tillation 1 (v ac uum Dis tillation )

Dis tillation 1 (v ac uum Dis tillation )

Water Water

Dis tillation 2 (Vac uum Dis tillation)

Dis tillation 2 (Vac uum Dis tillation)

Distillate to

fuel

B leac hingB leac hingB as e Oil for dis patc h

B as e Oil for dis patc h

Spent Fuller Earth

for disposal

Base OilBase Oil

Process Sludge

for disposal



2.8.3 Alternative Fuel and Raw Material Facility

Alternative fuel platforms will be developed as below:

“S” Type

Alternative Fuel Preparation Facility

“L” Type

Alternative fuel preparation Facility

‘L’ Type Alternative Fuels Area

‘L’ Type Alternative Fuels are basically Liquid Type Incinerable Waste which are more than 2500 Kcal.

1. Common Neutralization Tank to maintain pH level 7

2. 25 KL Mixing Tank with Cooling Coil and External Jacket to control the heat for Exothermic

Liquid Waste

3. 25 KL Mixing Tank for the Non-Exothermic Liquid Waste

4. Agitator set up made by Stainless Steel

5. Pump

‘S’ Type Alternative Fuels Area:

‘S’ Type Alternative Fuels are basically Solid Type Incinerable Waste which are more than 2500 Kcal

1. Common Neutralization Tank to maintain pH level 7

2. Mixing pit of 5 x 5 m

3. Jaw mixer for premixing of the solid and semisolid Waste.

4. Blender

Solid blend is prepared through mixing in an appropriate quantity of solid/ semi solid waste with

binders. The first step of preparing solid blend is to selection of waste.

The segregation of waste according to their pH & calorific value helps in it. Source materials for

solid substitute fuel include Paint Sludge, Oily Filter Cake, Spent Carbon, Organic waste, Tarry

waste, Biomass, Resin, Distillation Residues, Grease, ETP sludge, and alumina sludge etc.

Assortment of waste is done according blending norms.

A general waste selection criteria for high calorific value fuel is Low moisture content, High LOI

& TOC, High calorific value, Good compressibility, Less ash content, Non toxic, Less pollutant,

Sustainable combustion.

Schematic Diagram for the Alternative Fuel and Raw Material Facility is shown in Figure 2.12.



Figure 2.12

Alternative Fuel and Raw Material Facility



2.8.4 Used Lead Acid Battery Recycling

Lead is one of the most vital nonferrous metal having multiple uses like in lead acid batteries, cable

covering, alloying elements in solders, nuclear shield etc, and in terms of its chemical it is used in glass,

paint and as an important stabilizers in PVC as lead striate etc.

Almost 70 to 80 % of lead productions come from recycling and balance 20 to 30% from virgin sources

that is lead concentrates. The requirement of lead is going up at the rate of 15 to 20 % annually. Its

requirement is going up more in developing countries like India and China. Further almost 70% of the

lead goes in to the production of lead acid batteries. Demand for lead acid batteries is going up almost at

the rate of 20 to 25% in India & China.

In India only Hindustan Zinc Limited and two other producers in smaller quantities produce lead from

lead concentrates. Rest of the lead production is either from recycling or imports. Since more & more

scrap lead acid batteries and other scrap of lead will be available there is a good scope to recover lead in

and environmentally friendly manner.

2.8.4.1 Used Lead Acid Battery Recycling Process

Extraction of Lead from used Lead Acid Battery Plates, Lead Scrap, lead dross and other lead bearing

wastes is carried out by using Rotary Furnace and Reverberatory Furnace.

Conventional method of lead extraction from used lead acid battery plates, lead scrap, lead dross and

other concentrate generates huge amount of sludge which becomes very difficult for disposal in the

landfill. However, the combination of Rotary furnace and Reverberatory furnace with high calorific

furnace oil as fuel reduces the quantum of slag generation and improves the recovery of lead metal

considerably. Furnace oil will be used as fuel to melt the battery and other scrap.

The schematic diagram of the lead recycling is shown in Figure 2.13& Schematic Diagram of Lead and

Lead alloys manufacturing is shown in Figure 2.14.



Figure 2.13

Used Lead Acid Battery Recycling



Figure 2.14

Lead Alloys Manufacturing

The Reverberatory furnace is filled with the charcoals and ignited by using the blower. The blower

supplies the required combustion air for burning the charcoal. After a sustained fire, the lead scrap (raw

material) is fed into the furnace. The metallic lead in the scrap melts and the oxides of lead are reduced

by the carbon present in the charcoal.

The charging of charcoal and raw material are repeated and the molten metal is collected in a pot at the

downstream side of the furnace. The fuel is used in the manufacturing process is charcoal and the quantity

of charcoal used in one shift (8 hrs.) is approximately 30 Kg per furnace. The rotary furnace is

manufactured from steel Plates with refractory lining inside the furnace to withstand temperature up to

1600°C. It is cylindrical in shape at the center and conical at both ends. The entire structure is supported

by four numbers antifriction double row spherical bearings and shafts and bearings are firmly mounted on

a common base frame.

The rotary furnace is driven by electrical Motor (which is 7.5 HP) and the Motor shaft is connected with

rotary furnace shaft through a double reduction worm gear box, chain and sprockets. A low stage burner

with high speed blower is fitted at one end of the Rotary Furnace to inject oil and for ignition. The other

end of the Rotary Furnace is connected with a suitably designed chute to carry the dust particles to the

pollution control equipment.

The fuel burner receives fuel continuously from a oil storage tank through insulated pipe line. A heater

and pump is used to heat and pump the fuel during winter season to overcome the slow discharge rate due

to viscosity of the fluid. Battery scrap, lead bearing members of the slag contains lead are charged inside

the furnace manually and heated up to 800 to 900°C after certain time the recharging process of scrap

continues. The disintegrated tiny particles and dust along to the air Pollution Control System for filtration.



1. The rotary furnace is closed while processing the metal and the ambient air quality around the

furnace is confirming to the latest norms prescribed the Central Pollution Control Board. The

Smelting process proposed in lead recycling unit is explained in detailed below:

2. The raw materials namely, the batteries are received at the unit. The battery casing are broken

with the help of cutting machine and sorted accordingly.

3. The Plastic containers, Polypropylene wastes are processed in plastic grinding machine and

the PVC separator waste is sold to the PVC recyclers.

4. Initially, the lead scrap is fed into the rotary furnace and the flux agent like charcoal, iron

boring are added for ignition.

5. The burner supplies the required heat for melting of scrap. After a sustained fire is

established, the lead in the scrap (raw material) is melting gradually.

The metallic lead in the scrap melts and the oxides of lead are reduced by carbon from charcoal. The

chemical reaction shown is below:

PbO + C ---------Pb + CO or CO2

The chemical reaction taking place during smelting process is as follows:

2PbO + C -----------------2Pb + CO2

2 PbO2 + 2C ------------- 2Pb + 2 CO

PbSO4 + 2C -------------PbS + 2 CO2

PbSO4 + PbS -----------2Pb + 2SO2

Sb2O3 + 3 Pb -------------2Sb + 3PbO

2Pbo + C -------------2Pb + CO2

While heating up the battery plates. Sulphur dioxide gas generated.

PbSO4 + 2C -------------PbS + 2 CO2

PbSO4 + PbS -----------2Pb + 2SO2

3Pb + Sb2 O3-----------2Sb + 3 PbO

1. The fuel used in the manufacturing process is furnace oil.

2. The lead obtained from rotary furnace and reverbatory furnace is stored in a separate place

and it is known as impure lead. These lead are refined for making lead alloys and lead oxides

depending upon customer’s requirement.

3. The pot furnace is used for refining and alloying process. The alloy pot is connected to the air

pollution control system for filtration. The dust particles obtained from the alloy pot burner is

fed into a carbon arrestor and then passed to chimney which is 10 m high.

4. The disintegrated tiny particles and dust particles like SO2, NOx and lead particles are carried

to the air pollution control system for filtration.

The following machinery will be employed for the processing.

Rotary furnace

Charcoal Furnace 1

Charcoal Furnace 2

Charcoal Furnace 3

Charcoal Furnace 4

Melting Pot 1

Melting Pot 2



Gravity Chamber

Cyclone Chamber

Bag House

Gen Set

ID Fan Flower

Chimney

Furnace Oil Tank

Air Compressor

EB Connection

2.8.5 Waste Plastic Recycling

A recycling plant uses seven steps to turn plastic trash into recycled plastic:

Segregation

The plastic shall be segregated manually into 2 major components i.e. dirty plastic not suitable for

granulation and plastic can be used for granulation.

Mechanized Cleaning

Since the plastic drums contain hazardous material, mechanized cleaning is done with some

cleaning agents to remove any types of hazardous substances. The cleaned drums can be re-used

or further processing can be done based on the requirement.

Chopping

The washed drums are chopped into flakes for further processing.

Drying

The plastic flakes are dried in a tumble dryer.

Melting

The dried flakes are fed into an extruder, where heat and pressure melt the plastic. Different types

of plastics melt at different temperatures.

Filtering

The molten plastic is forced through a fine screen to remove any contaminants that slipped

through the washing process. The molten plastic is then formed into strands

Pelletizing

The strands are cooled in water, and then chopped into uniform pellets. Manufacturing companies

buy the plastic pellets from recyclers to make new products.

Production of liquid fuel

Through the process of random depolymerization, plastic can be converted to liquid fuel. This

fuel can be utilized in various plants as a fuel supplement.

The process flow sheet of plastic recycling is given in below Figure 2.15



Figure 2.15

Process flow sheet of plastic recycling

The process is having following steps

Shredding of plastic waste: a simple shredder will be deployed to shred the plastic into the

pieces of 3-4” size, ease to fed into pyrolysis unit.

Pyrolysis: the temperature of the column will be maintained around 300-500oC.

Catalytic Converter: A catalyst (metal compound) will be catalyse the reaction of de

polymerization. The plastic converted into fuel (mixed of liquid and gaseous fraction both).

Condenser: the gaseous fraction of fuel shall be condensed to liquid fraction at maximum

possible extent. Part of gaseous fraction that cannot be condensed shall sent be to pyrolysis

section for heating purposes as a supplement to fuel.

The liquid fuel can be stored in tanks or vessel for FURTHER use in various applications.

2.8.6 Waste Paper Recycling

Paper Recycling is the process of recovering waste paper and remaking it into new paper products. There

are three categories of paper that can be used as feedstock for making recycled paper:

Mill broke: Paper trimmings and other paper scrap from the manufacture of paper, and is

recycled internally in a paper mill.

Pre-consumer waste: Material which left the paper mill but discarded before it was ready for

consumer use.

Post-consumer waste: Post-consumer waste are the material discarded after consumer use such

as old magazines, old newspaper, office wastes, old telephone directories, residential mixed

paper, industrial packaging , waste multi-wall cement paper bags.

Was te P las tic

Was te P las tic

S torag eS torag e

S eg reg ationS eg reg ation

Was hingWas hing

DryingDrying

G ranulationG ranulation

P las tic G ranules

P las tic G ranules

Dirty P las tic for P yrolys is

Dirty P las tic for P yrolys isDus t & dirtDus t & dirt

Exit Gases

Inert waste



2.8.6.1 Process for Paper Recycling

ICWF focuses on recovering waste paper and sending to paper manufacturing industry. It is proposed to

carryout baling in the following steps:

Step 1: Waste Paper Collection: Collection of waste paper material shall be done through

special color coded recycling bins (segregated directly at Generator’s premises). However, at

some locations, all kinds of papers may be collected in a single bin.

Step 2: Manual Segregation: The waste paper collected is segregated according to variety /

thickness of paper like News paper, Office stationary, packaging paper, Card boards etc.

Step 3: Compaction and Baling: The waste paper is manually fed to the Baling press. It is

Equipment which utilizes Hydraulic pressure on the loose paper in an enclosed chamber to

compact them into Bales. The bale weight can be varied from 40 – 60 kg, making them very

convenient to handle manually.

Baling Wire and Tape

Step 4: Transportation: Transportation of bales to paper mills and other paper related product

manufacturing units.

2.9 Energy

The Energy facilities proposed for the site are

Renewable Energy

Waste to Energy

2.9.1 Renewable Energy

Renewable energy is energy that comes from natural resources such as sunlight, wind, rain, tides, waves

and geothermal heat. About 16% of global final energy consumption comes from renewable resources,

with 10% of all energy from traditional biomass, mainly used for heating, and 3.4% from hydroelectricity.

New renewable (small hydro, modern biomass, wind, solar, geothermal, and bio fuels) accounted for

another 3% and are growing very rapidly. The share of renewable in electricity generation is around 19%,

with 16% of electricity coming from hydroelectricity and 3% from new renewable. In the proposed

project it is intend to set up 2 MW solar power project in the closed landfill after evaluating the recent

developments in solar energy on closed landfill on following criteria.

Solar power system considerations with respect to landfill applications,

Landfill technical and engineering considerations, and Regulatory considerations.

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Energy

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Natural_resource

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sunlight

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wind

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Rain

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tidal_energy

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wave_power

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Geothermal_energy

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Renewable_resource

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Biomass

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Heating

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hydroelectricity

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Electricity_generation



At Ramky, we believe there are several important reasons for considering clean and renewable energy

facilities on contaminated lands

Contaminated lands offer hundreds of acres of open space in areas where solar Installations may

be less likely to involve community concerns over aesthetic impacts.

Contaminated lands may have lower overall transaction costs than Greenfield sites.

Development of Brownfield’s can assuage the stress placed on Greenfields to site clean and

renewable energy facilities.

Contaminated lands may have environmental conditions that are not well suited for commercial

or residential zoning or otherwise have low demand for real estate development.

Electricity generated from renewable energy projects on contaminated or remediated lands can

then be used onsite or credited for offsite use.

2.9.2 Solar Power System

There are a fairly wide set of considerations we have considered when planning a solar system to be

placed over a closed landfill. With respect to the solar technologies available, considerations includes

concentrating solar power (CSP) or photovoltaic (PV) will be best suited to site specific conditions.

Additional factors considered during the planning process, given the constraints of building on a landfill

cap, are the desired output capacity, weight characteristics, and degree of mechanical stress expected from

the panels weights and other onsite weather conditions.

2.9.2.1 Ground Mounted Solar System

Installation of a solar energy system on a landfill cap will require the use of ground mounted solar arrays.

Ground mounted solar systems often involve aluminum or galvanized steel framing that is attached to a

concrete foundation. The concrete foundation can also be referred to as a pier or footing and the panel

supports can be referred to as stanchions. With respect to footings, several designs are available.

Shallow poured concrete pillars

Pre-fabricated concrete

Slab

Ballast frames

Driven pile

Earth screw augers

Figure 2.16 the aluminum support stanchions supporting the PV panels are shown below

Figure 2.16

PV Panels for Generating Solar Energy



2.9.2.2 Solar System Weight Considerations

PV cell and support system weight characteristics have important implications for installation on landfill

caps because of weight bearing limitations. There are three general types of PV panels with many

different variations and weights associated with each type. The three general PV cell materials are

monocrystalline, polycrystalline, and amorphous thin film. Monocrystalline panels offer the most efficient

power production per unit area but can be costly and heavy. Both monocrystalline and polycrystalline

cells are rigid and require mounting in a rigid frame to protect from cracking. Amorphous cells are the

least efficient on a power output per unit area basis but can be lighter weight than both monocrystalline

and polycrystalline cells and offer greater pliability as they are manufactured on flexible surfaces. For the

Industrial Land fill weight many not are the key constraints. However in other landfills (municipal),

where weight is an engineering concern, amorphous thin film PV cells could be the preferred choice.

New and emerging technologies like the Uni-Solar model PVL flexible laminate amorphous thin film

cells can dramatically cut weight as they offer high output per unit weight and can be applied directly to

landfill geomembrane caps, these newly developed flexible laminate PV strips eliminate the necessity for

system mounting and foundational structures. Monocrystalline and polycrystalline panels can be lighter

on a power output per pound basis than conventional thin film (amorphous) panels, where open space is

limited and maximum electricity production is sought, polycrystalline or monocrystalline PV may be

preferred because of the output advantage over thin film. However, with any PV cell type it is important

to keep in mind the various shading considerations at landfill sites with limited space; optimal solar

design requires strategic placement of arrays such that no shading occurs.

Single and double axis sun- tracking systems have not been considered in the system design as they will

be heavier than fixed tilt axis mounting systems, thus requiring deeper piers and footings unless there are

surface mounted footings. The deeper piers required by sun-tracking mounting systems will increase the

weight placed on the landfill and possibly increase settlement or jeopardize side slope stability at the site.

Options for foundations of solar system installations on landfill caps include concrete slabs, poured and

pre-fabricated concrete footings, and ballasted platforms. Slab foundations have not been considered as

they will be heavier than concrete footings or ballasted platforms and will therefore create a greater risk to

landfill settlement and side slope stability. Ballasted platforms are a lighter weight option and can

sufficiently anchor a solar system to a top deck, engineering difficulties with side slope installations is

suitably addressed through the design.

We have selected a solar power system whose cumulative weight is appropriate given the depth of the

landfill cap, waste characterizations, and side slope measure. We have limited the load to maximum of

500 Kg / m2 on a distributed basis. This load / design criteria is well within safe limits of the load capacity

of the landfill liner cap and other necessary components.

2.9.2.3 Wind Loading

Wind loading increase the weight placed on solar components and can increase the stress applied to the

support structures. We have complied with the International Electro technical Commission (IEC)

standards 61215 and 61646 that establish the industry standards for crystalline cell and amorphous thin



cell mechanical loading, respectively. Customary solar panels are typically certified to withstand a

maximum mechanical loading of approximately 250 Kg per square meter, which converts to a wind speed

of approximately 170 Km per hour. The solar panels and mounting systems are thus certified for higher

mechanical loading. In addition we have suitably planned for routine operations and maintenance of the

landfill which entails mowing of surface vegetation on the cap.

2.9.2.4 Photovoltaic Power Generation

The overall system would comprise of following equipments

Solar array employing Wp or higher rating PV modules

Support structure made of galvanized steel angles with SS304

IP65 rated field junction box made of FRP/ Poly carbonate material.

Multi-stranded, UV protected, PVC insulated, PVC sheathed copper cable. The cables are sized

to minimize the voltage drops & the power loss. The cables confirm to IS1554/ IS 694. Snap on

connectors are employed for interconnections.

Power Conditioning Unit (PCU) receives DC power from DCDB (Where SPV array is

terminated). PCU has built in software based Maximum Power Point Tacking (MPPT) to harness

maximum power from the solar array. Typically the solar array will operate at 650 to 750 V DC

under the maximum power point operation. The DC power is then inverted to utility quality three

phase power& this power shall be exported to utility. Necessary grid synchronizer is incorporated

in the PCU through unique software.

Data acquisition system & Bi-directional energy metering is also built in to the system. An

integrated unit (Import –export meter) for energy generated by the plant is also provided. An

integrated SCADA system monitors the PCU & HV substation parameters. Certain operational

controls are provided in the SCADA (Supervisory Control &Data Acquisition). In order to enable

export of power to HT line (11KV/ 132 KV) LT power generated from the PCU is taken through

a Star –Delta HV transformer.

Schematic diagram of solar plant is shown below in Figure 2.17.

Figure 2.17

Solar Plant



Description: The photo voltaic array is divided in to four quadrants of each 250KWp minimum. Each

string in the array shall have its own string monitoring unit which shall be one of the major diagnostic

tools for the system operator. Each unit array has field connected separate solar radiation meter& SPV

module temperature sensor. The respective digital out puts are taken to a supervisory controller located in

the control room. The Inverter unit employs state of the art DSP based technology to have conversion

efficiency over 95%. Electronic surge arrestors are provided at the DC input & the AC output of each

inverter. Necessary HT switch gears such as 33KV VCBs are provided for HT isolation & protection.

Each 250KWp system will have an independent Data Acquisition System (DAS) which would produce

the real time Data as well as event logs indicating all the supervisory faults also. Data logger of each

250KWp unit shall be integrated in to a mini Web server for the purpose of integrating the Data. These

Data via Profibus is taken to a master Supervisory Control & Data Acquisition (SCADA system).Service

interface on the operator panel is also provided.

2.9.3 Weather Monitoring Station

As a practice, a mini Solar Weather Monitoring station is proposed to be installed to monitor the weather

parameters in Real Time and store the monitored data to the SCADA or a separate computer. The actual

KWH annual energy generation then can be corroborated with the stored weather data gathered (Rainy

Days inclusive) in real time. The Pyranometers offered are calibrated and traceable to ISO standard &

Global Radiation norms. The Transducers, data acquisition systems accuracies are standard based as per

WMO (World Meteorological Organization`s Norms. The sensors and data acquisition outdoor unit with

dedicated power supplies with battery backup for unmanned operation, communication cable to the

indoor SCADA Computer, software, and calibrating tools shall be in the scope of supply. The data stored

in this computer may be collected either by a USB stick or arranged to be transmitted by RAMKY to its

O&M Team as necessary

The following Parameters are proposed to be logged and stored in Real Time Basis with Time, date, day,

year stamp /tagging.

Temperature, Principle :NTC , (Range :0-60deg C, Accuracy: 0.2 deg C )

Air Pressure, Principle: MEMS Capacitive ,(Range: 300 to 1200HPa, Accuracy: 1.5hPa)

Wind Direction, Principle: Ultrasonic,(Range: 0-60m/Sec, Accuracy: 3degree)

Wind Speed, Principle: Ultrasonic,(Range:0-60m/Sec,Accuracy:0.3m/Sec)

Pyranometers (Irradiance: W/Sq. m measurement), Standard: ISO, Class-2, To suit Maximum

Irradiance: 2000Watts/Sq m, Max Operating Temp: 80 deg C, Non stability<1%, Spectral Range

(50% Points):310 to 2800 nano meter.

Particulate meter: Principle: Pulse free Diaphragm pump, 0-6LPM flow rate, dust sampler.

Measuring Range: Total suspended particulates data of site needs to be furnished to confirm

details. Accuracy: Nominal 10 micron cut off point at 5 LPM typical sampling rate.

2.9.4 Plant Layout

Plant layout of typical PV technology is shown below in Figure 2.18.



2.9.5 Operation and Maintenance

Operation and maintenance plays a vital role for the PV technology in order to utilize the best

performance without causing damage to the panels. Figure 2.19shown below are the components of the

solar plant.

Figure 2.18

Layout of PV Technology

Figure 2.19

Components of Solar Plant



Brief Description of the Solar Plant

1. Photo Voltaic Panels, (PV) High-efficiency, single crystal silicon PV modules provide higher

amp-hour per watt output than other technologies and include dual bypass diode protection.

Modular PV panels permit expansion to accommodate increased loads.

2. Adjustable Array Structure, PV array tilt is easily adjustable from 30-60 degrees to maximize

solar energy. Further adjustment of 0-30 degrees possible with special positioning bars.

3. Control Centre, The control enclosure is a powder-coated steel box housing the power

distribution components (DC controller/distribution, inverter and AC distribution),

disconnects, system monitor and appropriate wire terminals. Enclosure is provided with

rainproof vents and a ground fault protected electrical outlet. Optional remote monitoring

equipment is available.

4. Inverter/Battery Charger, Microprocessor-controlled, high-efficiency sine wave inverter with

three-stage, temperature-compensated battery charger. Peak conversion efficiency of 96%,

protection circuitry, LCD display with user and setup menus.

5. DC Controller, Solid state, low frequency, pulse-width modulated solar charge control with

battery temperature compensation and automatic night time disconnect.

6. AC Distribution Panel, Output AC breaker panel provides surge protection and flexibility for

multiple AC load requirements.

7. DC Combiner Box, Provides PV circuit disconnects and lightning/surge protection for

electronic equipment.

8. Ventilator Fan, Designed for active ventilation of hybrid battery enclosure to prevent

accumulation of hydrogen gas.

9. Batteries, Available in three battery types: economy flooded lead-acid, industrial flooded

lead-acid and sealed lead-acid. Flooded lead-acid battery comes with recombiner caps to

minimize water loss. Sealed battery available for maintenance-free performance. The control

system maintains the batteries between 20% and 100% state of charge.

10. Battery Enclosure, Sealed batteries are housed in a powder-coated steel, lockable enclosure

with filtered vents. Flooded batteries are housed in an insulated, vented thermoplastic unit

with lockable lid and drain plug. Designed to minimize battery temperature extremes,

eliminate battery bank hot spots, prevent freezing and extend useful battery life.

11. Generator Hybrid, Commercial and Industrial engine generators available to meet

requirements. Includes battery, alternator, remote start/stop contacts, self-contained

protection and automatic safety shutdowns. Package includes weatherproof housing, vibration

isolators on steel skid, flexible couplings, and replaceable dry element air filter. Propane and

diesel fuel types available.

12. Structure, Industrial grade heavy-gauge steel coated with a durable hot–dip galvanized finish.

Available in four configurations: ground mount, road trailer, off-road trailer and breakdown

kit.

2.9.5.1 Operation and Maintenance Practices:

When mounting the module on the structure, keep the displacement of the forth corner of the

module smaller than 2mm for 1000mm of the diagonal of the module after other three corners are

placed on the structure.



Be careful in handling polarity of the insulated output wires.

This module must be grounded by minus pole, install modules and ground mounting structure in

accordance with applicable law of each country.

Consult the government before the installation of the modules in case if installation is required by

the law.

The modules shall be installed and maintained by qualified personnel.

Follow safety precautions of the battery manufacture if batteries are used with the modules.

Consult the manufacturer for the proper installation on special vehicles such as boats and

campers.

The modules must be mounted using clips on the long sides of the module according to the

installation manual.

Remove the cable securing tapes and cable holders carefully before the installation.

The module is fitted with SMK corporation connectors which are mechanically and electrically

compatible with multi contact PV-KST/KBT4 as of 19th Nov 2010.

The connections must be completely done and locked.

Do not shade portion of the PV module surface from the sunlight for a long time. A hot spot

phenomenon which is appeared as white dot may occur on the shaded cell.

Operation:

When a part of the module is shadowed, the hot spot may be caused, therefore do not shadow the

cell.

The module shall be maintained by qualified person.

The electrical characteristic degrades when the front cover of the module becomes dirty.

Do not pour solvent when cleaning the modules.

Do not produce sparks near flammable vapors.

Do not expose the modules to sunlight concentrated with mirrors, lenses or similar means.

Keep modules away from children.

Installation of solar energy systems on landfill side slopes and caps is though complicated by a variety of

engineering obstacles, various solutions have come up to mitigate these. Following general guidance have

been considered to overcome engineering obstacles of landfill reuse as they apply to solar system

installations.

Settlement

A special consideration is taken while designing the solar installation on the landfill cap is the settlement.

The collective uniform and non uniform landform deformations caused by physiochemical, biochemical

and mechanical process that change the properties of the buried waste over the period of time. Total

settlement is described as an overall subsidence across the landfill. Differential settlement is described as

localized subsidence that results from heterogeneities across waste debris in the landfill. Specifically,

settlement can occur in landfills through any of five processes,

1. Mechanical consolidation – (Negligible – daily consolidation will be done)

2. Biochemical degradation – (Negligible)

3. Physiochemical change.

4. Migration of fine refuse into the voids of large waste materials (raveling) – (Considered and mitigated

through the structural designs)



5. The absolute degree of active settlement depends on the depth of the waste heap, the type of waste

present, the method of placement, and age of the landfill.

Settlement due to above reasons has been considered in the overall design parameters to address the

issues related to long-term post closure care of the landfill and the system components of a solar energy

farm.

For developments on landfills, there are numerous methods to mitigate settlement. Geogrid reinforcement

can be used to strengthen the cover soils above the geomembrane. Beyond structural reinforcement,

designed flexibility in the solar system can preclude damages to the solar configuration caused by

settlement. The use of shims and adjustable racking systems in solar mounting structures can allow for

amending the solar system in ways that conform to landscape morphology.

Being selective in where solar energy systems are placed on a landfill can minimize settlement impacts.

One of the strategies used is to place the solar facility on the oldest section of the landfill top deck, since

the rates of settlement generally decrease over time. In addition the nature of different buried materials;

for example, a solar system placed above old construction debris that has been previously compacted will

not experience significant settlement because of low biochemical degradation.

Cover Material Integrity

For the most part, either a flat or north-to-south trending slope is optimal for solar energy production.

Clearing and grading activities are carried out in a manner that will not damage the landfill cap nor

expose any of the underlying waste debris, particularly when conducted in thinly capped areas.

During the planning process, adequate measures will be taken to ascertain the depth of the landfill cover

and the anticipated deadweight loading of the entire solar energy system. We would maximize the level

surfaces for adequate system stability, which may necessitate moving soil from deeper areas to shallower

areas or bringing additional top soil to the site. In almost all cases, we may also use prefabricated concrete

piers or concrete slabs will be adequate to support a solar system.

All the necessary requirements for utility trenching have been taken care and typically, a minimum of 24

inches of soil is desired to trench for electrical line placement without any impact on a clay or

geosynthetic liner.

Side Slope Stability

Landfills will be assessed for side slope stability prior to construction to ensure that the cap and slopes

can be developed without giving way. Slope instability will generally decrease over time as waste

decomposition rates slow. Engineered retaining walls and vegetative surfaces can provide protection from

erosion and the development of unsafe conditions.

Building on side slopes much larger than 5 degrees is complicated by shadow effects and the need for

increased erosion and storm water control systems. Moreover, increased operations and maintenance costs



may accrue over time for repairs to the side slope. For higher degreed slopes, regarding and importation

of additional top soil may be necessary to achieve a slope that is favorable to supporting a solar system.

South facing landfill slopes are ideally situated to maximize solar exposure in higher latitudes once

shading is accounted for. We have considered a balance between optimizing energy production and

ensuring technically sound solar array placement. Side slopes will require strong foundational systems

like poured or pre-cast concrete footings to oppose the pressures of dynamic loading. As a general rule,

higher degreed side slopes warrant lighter solar arrays and strong foundational materials have to be

considered for designing.

2.9.6 Proposed System

The proposed power project envisages a power plant of 2 MW (AC). The power project will be based on

crystalline technology equipped with axis trackers. The DC output of the power modules will be

converted to AC output with the help of solar inverters. The voltage will be stepped up with the help of

transformers. Both on C side and AC side of conversion, and at the grid interconnection protection and

safety devices will be provided to enable safe and reliable operation of the complete solar power system.

Monitoring, metering and analysis of system provided with the power plant will help to record, store and

transfer data which is essential for the plant. The power evacuation will be done at 66 KV.

System Components:

Solar modules

Inverter

Transformers

Solar trackers

Junction boxes

Protective relays

DC distribution board

SCADA system, an integrated SCADA system capable of communicating with the inverters and

provide information of the entire solar PV panel. This SCADA will provide information on the

instantaneous output energy and cumulative energy for each inverters

Electrical system, The DC output from the PV modules is converted to three phase AC by means

of inverters. The inverter output are fed into an AC distribution board which in turn will be

connected to LV panel in the control room. The power evacuation system comprises of

Transformer ( oil immersed type), Low Voltage panel, High voltage panel, metering panel, KLT

and HT cable, Control and power evacuation cables

2.10. Waste to Energy

Certain categories of hazardous waste (which are high in calorific value) will be utilized to produce

energy in the proposed 2 MW Waste to Energy plant. All necessary air pollution control devices will be

installed to ensure the emissions are well within the prescribed limits as per all applicable guidelines. Ash

generated from the Waste to Energy plant will be disposed of in the secured landfill after appropriate

treatment/stabilization.

CHAPTER 3

DESCRIPTION OF THE

ENVIRONMENT



CHAPTER 3

DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

3.1 Preamble

Baseline environmental status in and around the proposed project depicts the existing environmental

conditions of air, water, noise, soil, biological and socio-economic environment. With proposed project as

the center, a radial distance of 10 km is considered as ‘study area’ for baseline data collection. Baseline

data was collected for various environmental attributes so as to compute the impacts that are likely to

arise due to proposed developmental activity.

The main aim of the impact assessment study is to find out the impact of the project on the environment.

This study is carried out during the project planning stage itself, so that the proponent can implement the

project in a technically, financially and environmentally sustainable.

The success of any impact assessment study depends mainly on two factors. First is estimation of impact

from proposed project on the environment and the second is assessment of the environmental condition.

Both are key factors to arrive at the post project scenario. The estimated impact due to the proposal can be

superimposed over the existing conditions to arrive at the post project scenario. The baseline data

generation has been carried out in December-2015 to February 2016.

3.2 Meteorological Conditions

The study of meteorological conditions forms an intrinsic part of the environment impact assessment

study. The meteorological conditions of an area and the industrial process are both intertwined and each

has a definite influence over the other. Favorable weather conditions and the surroundings help the

successful operation of an industry, while the industrial activity influences the weather in both positive as

well as negative ways.

Dispersion of different air pollutants released in to the atmosphere has significant impacts on

neighborhood air environment. The dispersion/dilution of the released pollutant over a large area will

result in considerable reduction of the concentration of a pollutant. The dispersion in turn depends on the

weather conditions like the wind speed, direction, temperature, relative humidity, mixing height, cloud

cover and also the rainfall in the area. Normally the impacts surrounding the project site are studied in

detail.

3.2.1 Analysis of the IMD Data

Regional meteorological scenario helps to understand the climatic factors. It also helps in determining the

sampling stations in predicting the post project environmental scenario. Meteorological scenario exerts a

critical influence on Air Quality as the pollution arises from the interaction of atmospheric contaminants

with adverse meteorological conditions such as temperature inversions, atmospheric stability and

topographical features like hills, canyons and valleys.



The critical weather elements that influence air pollution are wind speed, wind direction, temperature

which together determines atmosphere stability. Hence it is indispensable part of any air pollution studies

and requires interpretation of baseline information.

The Temperature, Humidity, Rainfall and wind speed as per IMD, Nalgonda Climatologically Tables

shown in Table 3.1.

Table 3.1

Meteorological Data from IMD (1971-2000)

IMD Station–Nalgonda,Lat:17° 03' & Long:79° 16' MSL 227 m, Distance from proposed site 27 km SE

Month

Temperature ºC Humidity

% Rainfall

pre dominant

direction

Mean

Max

Mean

Min Highest Lowest 8.30 hrs

Monthly

mm

No of

rainy

days

1st 2

nd

Jan 30.8 18.4 33.8 16.1 82 13.5 0.4 SE NE

Feb 33.5 20.7 36.5 18.0 82 7.2 0.5 SE NE

Mar 37.3 22.8 40.9 19.9 80 6.5 0.4 SE NE

Apr 39.6 25.5 43.0 22.4 73 17.6 1.0 SE NE

May 41.2 28.2 44.8 23.5 63 27.0 1.4 SE NW

Jun 37.6 27.2 42.6 23.4 71 65.9 3.5 NW SW

Jul 33.9 25.5 37.3 23.2 77 124.6 6.0 NW SW

Aug 32.8 25.0 35.4 22.8 78 133.0 6.7 NW SW

Sep 33.6 24.9 36.4 22.8 77 145.5 5.8 NW SW

Oct 33.1 23.7 36.2 21.4 78 104.3 3.8 NE SE

Nov 31.1 21.2 33.5 17.9 75 48.1 2.8 NE SE

Dec 30.0 18.6 32.2 15.7 73 3.8 0.3 NE SE

Source: GOI, Ministry of Earth Sciences, IMD, Climatological Tables - 1971-2000

3.2.2 Meteorological Scenario of the Study Area

Wind speed and direction data recorded during the study period is useful in identifying the influence of

meteorology on the air quality of the area. The meteorological data recorded at the site for the study

period is used for the preparation of the wind rose on sixteen- sector basis (N, NNE, NE, ENE, E, ESE,

SE, SSE, S, SSW, SW, WSW, W, WNW, NW and NNW).

The maximum and minimum temperatures, relative humidity, rainfall recorded, wind speed and

predominant wind direction observed are given in Table 3.2.



Table3.2

Observed Meteorological Data Onsite

Period Temp (°C) Humidity (%) Rain fall Predominant

wind direction Min Max Min Max (mm)

December 2015 12 34 13 100 0

SE to NW

January 2016 15 34 15 100 0

February 2016 16 37 11 100 0

3.3 Wind Pattern

The detailed analysis of wind pattern for the study period is given in the Table 3.3-3.6, and the wind

roses are given in the Figure 3.1 -3.4 respectively.

The predominant wind direction in the month of December 2015 is NE followed by ENE with average

wind speed of 1.77 m/s and calms was recorded up to 13.31% .

The predominant wind direction in the month of January 2016 is SE followed by ESE with average wind

speed of 2.67 m/s and calms was recorded up to 12.23 % .

The predominant wind direction in the month of February 2016 was SE followed by NE with average

wind speed of 3.05 m/s, and calms were recorded up to 11.76 %.

The predominant wind direction in the Season (December 2015 to February 2016) SE followed by NE

with average wind speed of 2.48 m/s and calms were recorded 12.32 %.



Table 3.3

Frequency Distribution – December 2015

Wind Directions Wind Classes (m/s)

Total 0.5 - 1.5 1.5 - 2.5 2.5 - 3.5 3.5 - 4.5 >= 4.5

N 1.88 1.34 0.13 0.13 0.27 3.76

NNE 1.75 1.21 0.27 0.27 0.13 3.63

NE 7.53 2.96 1.88 0.27 1.61 14.25

ENE 4.97 2.28 0.54 0.94 2.02 10.75

E 3.76 1.61 1.21 0.13 0.40 7.12

ESE 3.76 1.21 0.13 0.00 0.67 5.78

SE 4.30 2.15 0.40 0.27 0.81 7.93

SSE 2.15 0.94 0.13 0.13 0.54 3.90

S 2.28 1.08 0.27 0.13 0.40 4.17

SSW 1.75 1.21 0.13 0.00 0.13 3.23

SW 2.02 0.67 0.13 0.00 0.40 3.23

WSW 1.75 0.81 0.40 0.13 0.13 3.23

W 2.28 0.54 0.40 0.54 0.13 3.90

WNW 1.34 1.34 0.40 0.13 0.54 3.76

NW 1.34 1.08 0.40 0.13 0.81 3.76

NNW 2.02 0.81 0.54 0.40 0.54 4.30

Sub-Total 44.89 21.24 7.39 3.63 9.54 86.69

Calms (< 0.5m/s) 13.31

Total 100

Note: 1. Average Wind Speed is 1.77m/s

2. All values are in percentages

Figure 3.1

Wind Rose - December 2015



Table 3.4

Frequency Distribution – January 2016


Total 0.5 - 1.5 1.5 - 2.5 2.5 - 3.5 3.5 - 4.5 >= 4.5

N 1.21 1.21 0.00 0.27 0.67 3.36

NNE 1.21 0.67 0.13 0.00 1.34 3.36

NE 2.82 2.28 0.13 0.67 4.03 9.95

ENE 1.61 0.94 0.13 0.13 1.88 4.70

E 1.75 0.81 0.54 0.27 3.09 6.45

ESE 3.36 2.69 0.40 0.40 3.90 10.75

SE 5.11 2.96 0.94 0.40 5.78 15.19

SSE 2.15 0.13 0.00 0.40 1.61 4.30

S 0.81 0.81 0.54 0.13 1.75 4.03

SSW 2.42 0.54 0.40 0.27 0.67 4.30

SW 1.61 0.81 0.13 0.13 1.61 4.30

WSW 1.34 0.54 0.27 0.00 1.88 4.03

W 0.94 1.08 0.27 0.00 0.81 3.09

WNW 1.08 0.81 0.27 0.00 0.94 3.09

NW 0.94 0.67 0.13 0.13 1.61 3.49

NNW 1.21 0.94 0.00 0.00 1.21 3.36

Sub-Total 29.57 17.88 4.30 3.23 32.80 87.77

Calms (< 0.5 m/s) 12.23

Total 100

Note: 1. Average Wind Speed is 2.67 m/s


Figure 3.2

Wind Rose – January 2016



Table 3.5

Frequency Distribution – February 2016


Total 0.5 - 1.5 1.5 - 2.5 2.5 - 3.5 3.5 - 4.5 >= 4.5

N 0.89 0.74 0.30 0.45 1.34 3.72

NNE 1.79 0.45 0.00 0.00 1.64 3.87

NE 2.83 0.60 1.64 0.89 4.02 9.97

ENE 1.34 0.30 0.60 0.89 3.13 6.25

E 2.68 1.04 1.19 0.89 2.38 8.18

ESE 1.93 1.34 0.74 0.74 5.06 9.82

SE 4.02 1.64 1.64 1.19 7.59 16.07

SSE 1.19 0.15 0.30 0.30 1.79 3.72

S 0.74 0.60 0.45 0.45 1.04 3.27

SSW 1.19 0.15 0.00 0.45 1.49 3.27

SW 0.30 0.74 0.30 0.15 1.19 2.68

WSW 0.74 0.60 0.30 0.45 1.49 3.57

W 1.19 0.30 0.74 0.30 1.04 3.57

WNW 0.60 0.30 0.45 0.30 1.79 3.42

NW 0.89 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.89 3.13

NNW 0.74 0.60 0.00 1.04 1.34 3.72

Sub-Total 23.07 9.97 9.08 8.93 37.20 88.24

Calms (< 0.5 m/s) 11.76

Total 100



Figure 3.3

Wind Rose – February 2016



Table 3.6

Frequency Distribution December 2015 – February 2016


Total 0.5 - 1.5 1.5 - 2.5 2.5 - 3.5 3.5 - 4.5 >= 4.5

N 1.33 1.14 0.23 0.27 0.73 3.71

NNE 1.60 0.78 0.14 0.09 1.05 3.66

NE 4.49 2.01 1.19 0.60 3.21 11.49

ENE 2.66 1.19 0.41 0.64 2.29 7.19

E 2.75 1.14 1.01 0.41 1.92 7.23

ESE 3.02 1.74 0.41 0.37 3.11 8.65

SE 4.49 2.24 0.96 0.60 4.58 12.87

SSE 1.88 0.41 0.14 0.27 1.33 4.03

S 1.28 0.82 0.41 0.23 1.10 3.85

SSW 1.79 0.64 0.18 0.23 0.78 3.62

SW 1.37 0.73 0.18 0.09 1.05 3.43

WSW 1.28 0.64 0.32 0.18 1.14 3.57

W 1.47 0.64 0.46 0.27 0.64 3.48

WNW 1.01 0.82 0.37 0.14 1.05 3.39

NW 1.05 0.87 0.46 0.23 1.14 3.75

NNW 1.33 0.78 0.18 0.46 1.01 3.75

Sub-Total 32.78 16.62 7.05 5.08 26.14 87.68

Calms (< 0.5 m/s) 12.32

Total 100



Figure 3.4

Wind Rose December 2015 to February 2016



3.4 Ambient air quality

The study area represents mostly rural and semi urban environment. The baseline status of the ambient air

quality has been assessed through a scientifically designed ambient air quality network. The design of

monitoring network in the air quality surveillance program has been based on the following

considerations.

Meteorological conditions on a synoptic scale

Topography of the study area

Representation of the regional background levels

Representation of the plant site

Influence of the existing sources

Major settlements in the study area

Ambient air quality monitoring stations were set up for 10 different locations with consideration in the

above mentioned points. The locations were selected in downwind, cross wind and up wind of the

proposed project. The detail monitoring stations is given Table 3.7 and air quality monitoring location on

base map is represented in Figure 3.5.The common air pollutants namely Particulate matter (PM10&

PM2.5), Sulphur dioxide (SO2), the oxides of nitrogen (NOX), Carbon Monoxide (CO), Ammonia (NH3),

Benzene (C6H6), Lead (Pb), Nickel (Ni), Ozone (O3), Arsenic (As) and Benzo (a) Pyrene (BaP) were

sampled on 8/24 hourly and results were averaged to 24 hours to meet the requirements of the MoEF and

compared with the standards stipulated by CPCB. The detailed ambient air quality levels given in Table

3.8 – 3.13.



Table 3.7

Air Quality Monitoring Locations

Code Name of the Location

W.R.T Site Latitude (N) Longitude (E)

Remarks Direction Wind

Distance

km D M S D M S

A1 Tondalvai SE Up wind 4.5 17 15 06.6 79 14 18.2

Top of the Gram Panchayat

A2 Iskilla NW Down wind 2.5 17 17 39.3 79 10 02.4


A3 Munipampula NW Down wind 6.5 17 19 09.8 79 09 17.8

Top of the Mr.Naresh House

A4 Chinna Tummalagudem E Cross wind 2.5 17 16 37.4 79 13 54.7

Top of the Primary School

A5 Kunkudupamla NE Cross wind 6.5 17 19 51.2 79 14 24.3


A6 Kakkireni N Cross wind 2.0 17 18 04.4 79 12 19.2


A7 Pilligudem W Cross wind 1.5 17 16 32.2 79 10 40.2

Top of the Mr.Sathi Reddy House

A8 Mandra SW Cross wind 2.5 17 15 00.0 79 11 20.5


A9 Vanipakula SW Cross wind 6.5 17 14 38.4 79 09 18.6


A10 Narketpalli S Cross wind 8.0 17 12 15.6 79 11 36.6




Figure 3.5

Air Quality Monitoring Locations



Table 3.8

Ambient Air Quality Levels (μg /m3)


PM10 PM2.5

Min Max 98

th

Percentile Min Max

98th

Percentile

A1 Tondalvai 38.6 46.5 46.1 12.3 14.7 14.7

A2 Iskilla 43.6 48.7 48.5 12.1 14.9 14.9

A3 Munipampula 49.4 52.8 52.8 15.4 18.8 18.8

A4 ChinnaTummalagudem 40.3 47.6 46.6 13.1 15.6 15.5

A5 Kunkudupamla 46.3 51.2 51.2 14.2 16.8 16.8

A6 Kakkireni 41.5 47.8 47.8 11.6 15.9 15.9

A7 Pilligudem 36.9 44.6 44.0 10.3 13.7 13.7

A8 Mandra 44.4 50.3 50.3 13.4 17.6 17.6

A9 Vanipakula 38.5 48.5 48.5 12.2 15.7 15.7

A10 Narketpalli 53.2 56.3 56.3 18.6 25.3 25.3

98th

Percentile Range 44.0 to 56.3 13.7 to 25.3

NAAQ Standards 2009 100 (24 hourly) 60 (24 hourly)

Table 3.9



SO2 NOx

Min Max 98

th

Percentile Min Max

98th

Percentile

A1 Tondalvai 9.3 12.5 12.5 11.5 14.9 14.9

A2 Iskilla 9.1 12.4 12.1 17.6 20.2 20.0

A3 Munipampula 10.9 14.2 13.6 15.4 17.5 17.4

A4 ChinnaTummalagudem 10.7 13.7 13.7 13.2 15.4 15.3

A5 Kunkudupamla 11.9 14.5 14.5 14.1 16.4 16.3

A6 Kakkireni 10.1 13.2 13.2 12.3 15.4 15.4

A7 Pilligudem 8.6 11.4 11.2 11.4 14.5 14.0

A8 Mandra 11.8 14.6 14.4 12.6 17.1 17.0

A9 Vanipakula 10.4 12.7 12.7 12.7 15.9 15.9

A10 Narketpalli 13.3 16.6 16.3 17.8 21.1 20.8

98th


NAAQ Standards 2009 80 (24 hourly) 80 (24 hourly)



Table 3.10



Ozone (O3) Carbon Monoxide (CO)

Min Max 98

th

Percentile Min Max

98th

Percentile

A1 Tondalvai 8.5 11.9 11.9 130 144 144

A2 Iskilla 14.6 17.2 17.0 115 170 164

A3 Munipampula 12.4 14.5 14.4 215 258 258

A4 ChinnaTummalagudem 10.2 12.4 12.3 206 242 237

A5 Kunkudupamla 11.1 13.4 13.1 226 262 257

A6 Kakkireni 9.3 12.4 12.4 141 206 203

A7 Pilligudem 8.1 11.7 11.7 115 126 126

A8 Mandra 11.1 14.8 14.7 244 290 287

A9 Vanipakula 9.7 13.8 13.4 165 208 202

A10 Narketpalli 15.2 18.3 18.2 607 643 638

98th

Percentile Range 11.7 to 18.2 126 to 638

NAAQ Standards 2009 100 (8 hourly) 2000 (2 mg/m3) (8 hourly)

Table 3.11


Cod

e Name of the Location

Benzene (C6H6) Ammonia (NH3)

Min Max 98

th

Percentile Min Max

98th

Percentile

A1 Tondalvai 0.21 0.52 0.51 7.3 10.5 10.5

A2 Iskilla 0.21 0.47 0.47 7.1 10.4 10.1

A3 Munipampula 0.31 0.63 0.62 8.9 12.2 11.6

A4 Chinna Tummalagudem 0.42 0.57 0.57 8.7 11.7 11.6

A5 Kunkudupamla 0.43 0.65 0.65 9.9 12.5 12.5

A6 Kakkireni 0.33 0.56 0.56 8.1 11.2 11.2

A7 Pilligudem 0.13 0.33 0.33 6.9 9.4 9.3

A8 Mandra 0.42 0.56 0.40 9.8 12.6 12.4

A9 Vanipakula 0.22 0.44 0.44 8.4 10.7 10.6

A10 Narketpalli 0.51 0.83 0.83 11.3 14.6 14.3

98th


NAAQ Standards 2009 5 (Annual) collected 8 hourly 400 (24 hourly)



Table 3.12

Ambient Air Quality Levels

Parameter Lead - μg/m3 Nickel - μg/m

3 Arsenic - μg/m

3 Benzo (a) Pyrene - ng/m

3

98th Percentile Range *BDL BDL BDL BDL

BDL Value 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01

NAAQ Standards 2009 1.0 0.02 (20 ng/m3) 0.006 (6 ng/m

3) 1.0

*BDL – Below Detectable Limit

3.4.1 Regional Scenario

1. Particulate Matter: 2.5μm & 10μm

Particulate Matter (PM) is the term used for a mixture of solid particles and liquid droplets suspended in

the air. These particles originate from a variety of sources, such as power plants, industrial processes, and

diesel trucks. They are formed in the atmosphere by transformation and gaseous emissions. Their

chemical and physical compositions depend on location, time of year and weather. Particulate Matter is

composed of both coarse and fine particles. Coarse particles (PM10) are formed by mechanical disruption

(e.g. crushing, grinding, and abrasion of surfaces) evaporation of space and suspension of dust.PM10 is

composed of alumina silicate and other oxides of crustal elements. Major sources include fugitive from

roads, industry, agriculture, construction and demolition and Fly ash from fossil fuel combustion. The life

time of PM10 is from minutes to hours and the travel distance varies from <1Km to 10Km.

Fine particles have an aerodynamic diameter less than 2.5μm (PM2.5). They differ from PM10 in origin &

chemistry. These particles are formed from gas and condensation of high temperature vapors during

combustion; they are composed of various combinations of Sulphate compounds, Nitrate compounds, and

Carbon compounds ,Ammonium, Hydrogen ion, Organic compounds, Metals (Pb,Cd,V,Ni,Cu.Zn,Mn and

Fe) and Particle bound water. The major sources of PM2.5are fossil fuel combustion, vegetation burning,

smelting & processing of metals. Their life time is from days to weeks & travel distance ranges from

hundreds to thousands Km.

The 98thpercentile of Particulate Matter <2.5μm recorded with in the study area were in the range of 13.7

to 25.3μg/m3.The 98

thPercentile of Particulate Matter<10μm recorded with in the study area were in the

range of 44.0 to 56.3μg/m3. The 24 hourly average values of Particulate Matter <2.5μm & Particulate

Matter <10μm were compared with national ambient air quality standards and found that all sampling

locations recorded values within the applicable limits of residential and rural area limits for all locations

in the study area.

2. Sulphur dioxide

Sulphur dioxide gas is an inorganic gaseous pollutant. Sulphur dioxide emissions are expected to emit

wherever combustions of any fuel containing sulphur takes place .the sulphur in the fuel will combine

with oxygen to form sulphur dioxide. Sulphur trioxide and Sulphuric acid mist are the other important

pollutants in the sulphur group. In general some of the important sources of Sulphur dioxide are Power

stations, Sulphuric acid plants, Oil refining, Boilers in the utilities in any industry and domestic use of

coal. The following sources of sulphur dioxide in the study area identified:



Emissions from domestic fuel (coal, diesel etc)

Emissions from DG sets used by industries and local residents

Sulphur dioxide in the atmosphere is significant because of its toxicity. Sulphur dioxide is capable of

producing illness and lung injury. Further it can combine with water in the air to form toxic acid aerosols

that can corrode metal surfaces, fabrics and the leaves of plants. Sulphur dioxide is irritating to the eyes

and respiratory system. Excessive exposure to sulphur dioxide causes Bronchial asthma and other related

diseases as it affects the lungs. The 98th Percentile ofSO2 recorded within the study area was in the range

of 11.2μg/m3

to 16.3μg/m3. The 98

th percentile values of SO2 were compared with the national ambient

air quality standards and it was found that all sampling locations recorded values much lower than the

applicable limit to 80 μg/m3 for industrial, residential and rural areas.

3. Oxides of Nitrogen

Oxides of Nitrogen are also an inorganic gaseous pollutant like Sulphur dioxide. Oxides of Nitrogen

emissions are expected to be emitted wherever combustion at high temperatures takes place. Nitrous

oxide and Nitric acid mist are the other important pollutants in the inorganic nitrogen group. In general

some of the important sources of Oxides Nitrogen are boilers (Utilities) in any industry and Auto exhaust.

In a metropolitan town NOx levels are predominantly due to automobile emissions. The following sources

of Oxides of Nitrogen in the study area are identified:

Emissions from industrial and domestic burning of coal

Emissions from automobiles

Oxides of Nitrogen have far greater significance in photochemical smog reaction than any of the other

inorganic gaseous contaminants. NOx in the presence of sun light will undergo reactions with a number of

organic compounds to produce all the effects associated with photochemical smog. NOx has inherent

ability to produce deleterious effects by themselves like toxicity. It acts as asphyxiate when in

concentrations great enough to reduce the normal oxygen supply from the air. The 98th Percentile of NOx

recorded within the study area was in the range of 14.0 μg/m3to 20.8 μg/m

3.The 24 hourly average values

of NOx were compared with national ambient air quality standards and it was found that all the sampling

locations recorded values much lower than the applicable limit of 80μg/m3 for industrial, residential and

rural areas.

4. Ozone (O3)

Ozone (O3) or Trioxygen, is a triatomic molecule, consisting of three oxygen atoms. It is an allotrope of

oxygen that is much less stable than the diatomic allotrope (O2). Ozone in the lower atmosphere is an Air

pollutant with harmful effects on the respiratory systems of animals and will burn sensitive plants;

however the Ozone layer in the upper atmosphere is beneficial, preventing potentially damaging

ultraviolet light from reaching the Earth’s surface. Ozone is present in low concentrations throughout the

Earth’s atmosphere.

The 98th Percentile of O3 recorded within the study area was in the range of 11.7 μg/m

3 to 18.2μg/m

3The

8 hour average values of Ozone were compared with the national ambient air quality standards and found



that the recorded values were within the applicable limits of residential and rural area limits for all the

locations in study area.

5. Carbon Monoxide (CO)

Carbon monoxide is present in small amounts in the atmosphere, chiefly as a product of volcanic

activity but also from natural and man-made fires (such as forest and bushfires, burning of crop residues,

and sugarcane fire-cleaning). The burning of fossil fuels also contributes to carbon monoxide

production..

Carbon monoxide is colorless, odorless, and tasteless, but highly toxic. It combines with hemoglobin to

produce carboxyhemoglobin, which takes the space in hemoglobin that normally carries oxygen, but is

ineffective for delivering oxygen to bodily tissues. A level of 50% carboxyhemoglobin may result in

seizure, coma, and fatality.

The 98th Percentile of CO recorded within the study area was in the range of 126 μg/m3to 638 μg/m

3.

The 8 hourly average values of CO were compared with national ambient air quality standards and it was

found that all the sampling locations recorded values much lower than the applicable limit of 2000μg/m3

(2 mg/m3) for industrial, residential and rural areas.

6. Benzene (C6H6)

Benzene is a clear, colorless, highly flammable and volatile, liquid aromatic hydrocarbon with a gasoline-

like odor. Benzene is found in crude oils and as a by-product of oil-refining processes. Benzene is found

in the air from emissions from burning coal and oil, gasoline service stations, and motor vehicle exhaust.

Acute (short-term) inhalation exposure of humans to benzene may cause drowsiness, dizziness,

headaches, as well as eye, skin, and respiratory tract irritation.

The 98thPercentile of Benzene recorded within the study area was in the range of 0.33 μg/m

3to 0.83

μg/m3

7. Ammonia (NH3)

Ammonia is a colorless inorganic compound of nitrogen and hydrogen with the formula NH3, usually in

gaseous form with a characteristic pungent odor. Ammonia is irritating to the skin, eyes, nose, throat, and

lungs. It is essential for many biological processes and has various industrial applications.

Ammonia occurs naturally and is produced by human activity. It is an important source of nitrogen which

is needed by plants and animals. Bacteria found in the intestines can produce ammonia. Ammonia is a

colorless gas with a very distinct odor. This odor is familiar to many people because ammonia is used in

smelling salts, many household and industrial cleaners, and window-cleaning products.

The 98thPercentile of Ammonia recorded within the study area was in the range of 9.3μg/m

3to14.3μg/m

3

Remaining Parameters (Lead, Nickel, Arsenic and Benzo (a) Pyrene) are all falling below detectable

Limits.

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Volcano

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Volcano

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Forest_fires

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bushfire

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Crop_residue

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sugarcane

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Fossil_fuels

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hemoglobin

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Carboxyhemoglobin

https://pubchem.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/compound/nitrogen

https://pubchem.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/compound/hydrogen

https://pubchem.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/compound/nitrogen



Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS)/CPCB are given in Table 3.13.

Table 3.13

NAAQ/CPCB Standards for Ambient Air Quality

S. No Pollutant Time

weighted

Average

Concentration in Ambient Air Method of Measurement

Industrial,

Residential,

Rural and

Other Area

Ecologically

sensitive area

(notified by

Central Govt.)

1 Sulphur Dioxide

(SO2), μg/m3

Annual* 50 20 Improved West and Geake

Ultraviolet fluorescence 24 hours** 80 80

2 Nitrogen Dioxide

(NO2), μg/m3

Annual* 40 30 Modified Jacob &Hochheiser

(Na-Arsenite)

Chemiluminescence 24 hours** 80 80

3 Particulate Matter (size

less than 10 μm) or

PM10μg/m3

Annual* 60 60 Gravimetric

TOEM

Beta attenuation 24 hours** 100 100

4 Particulate Matter (size

less than 2.5 microns)

or PM2.5 μg/m3

Annual* 40 40 Gravimetric

TOEM

Beta attenuation 24 hours** 60 60

5 Ozone (O3) μg/m3 8 hours** 100 100 UV photometric

Chemiluminescence

Chemical method 1 hour** 180 180

6 Lead (Pb) μg/m3 Annual* 0.5 0.5 ASS / ICP method after sampling

on EPM 2000 or equivalent filter

paper

ED – XRF using Teflon filter

24 hours** 1.0 1.0

7 Carbon Monoxide

(CO) mg/m3

8 hours** 2 2 Non Dispersive Infra RED (NDIR)

Spectroscopy

1 hour** 4 4

8 Ammonia (NH3)

μg/m3

Annual* 100 100 Chemiluminescence

Indophenol blue method

24 hours** 400 400

9 Benzene (C6H6)

μg/m3

Annual* 5 5 Gas chromatography based

continuous analyser

Adsorption and desorption

followed by GC analysis

10 Benzo (a) Pyrene

(BaP) – particulate

phase only ng/m3

Annual* 1 1 Solvent extraction followed by HPLC

/ GC analysis

11 Arsenic (As) ng/m3 Annual* 6 6 AAS / ICP method after sampling on

EPM 2000 or equivalent filter paper 12 Nickel (Ni) ng/m3 Annual* 20 20

*Annual arithmetic mean of minimum 104 measurements in a year at a particular site taken twice a week

24 hourly at uniform intervals.

**24 hourly or 8 hourly or 1 hourly monitored values, as applicable, shall be complied with 98% of the

time in a year. 2% of the time, they may exceed the limits but not on two consecutive days of monitoring.



3.5 Water environment:

Surface water and ground water samples were collected from different sources within the study area and

some important physical and chemical parameters including heavy metals were considered for depicting

the baseline status of the study area.

3.5.1 Water Quality Assessment

Groundwater and surface water collected from the study area to assess the water quality during the study

period. The groundwater samples were drawn from the hand pumps and open wells used by villagers for

their daily use. The details of the locations are given in the Table 3.14 and water quality locations are

represented in Figure 3.6& 3.7. Water sample analysis results have shown in Table 3.15(A&B) and

Table 3.16.



Table 3.14

Water Quality Monitoring Locations


W.R.T Site Latitude Longitude

Source Remarks Directio

n

Distance

km D M S D M S

Ground water

GW1 Site - - 17 16 39.9 79 12 15.2 Bore well Testing Purpose

GW2 Tondalvai SE 4.5 17 15 05.7 79 14 22.4 Hand pump Not Drinking Purpose

GW3 Iskilla NW 2.5 17 17 38.6 79 10 03.6 Hand pump Not Drinking Purpose

GW4 Munipampula NW 6.5 17 19 14.3 79 09 21.8 Well water Used for Domestic

GW5 Chinna Tummalagudem E 2.5 17 16 50.7 79 13 57.5 Borewell Used for Domestic

GW6 Kunkudupamla NE 6.5 17 19 50.9 79 14 24.1 Hand pump Used for Domestic

GW7 Kakkireni N 2.0 17 18 00.2 79 12 14.3 Hand Pump Used for Drinking

GW8 Pilligudem W 1.5 17 16 32.2 79 10 40.8 Borewell Used for Domestic

GW9 Uttutur WSW 2.0 17 16 07.2 79 10 01.5 Borewell Used for Domestic

GW10 Mandra SW 2.5 17 15 05.5 79 11 22.7 Hand pump Used for Drinking

GW11 Vanipakula SW 6.5 17 14 36.8 79 09 19.9 Borewell Used for Drinking

GW12 Shivanenigudem SW 8.2 17 15 29.2 79 07 41.4 Hand pump Used for Domestic

GW13 Narketpalli S 8.0 17 12 13.4 79 11 52.1 Bore well Not Drinking Purpose

Surface water

SW1 Akkenepally NE 4.6 17 17 28.9 79 14 39.2 Lake Used for Agricultural

SW2 Tondalvai SE 4.5 17 14 55.8 79 15 08.4 Lake Used for Agricultural

SW3 Munipampula NW 6.8 17 19 30.4 79 09 19.9 Lake Used for Agricultural

SW4 Musi River NW 8.0 17 20 29.7 79 09 35.2 River Used for Agricultural (2

Seasons)

SW5 Narketpally SSW 6.7 17 12 59.2 79 11 27.1 Pond Used for washing cloths



Selected water quality parameters for water resources within 10 km of the study area have been used for

describing the water environment and assessing the impacts on it. Studies on water environment aspects

of ecosystem play an important role in preparation of environmental impact assessment report and to

identify sensitive issues and take appropriate action by maintaining ecological homeostasis. To assess the

water quality impacts, water resources in the impact area have been grouped into two classes.

Surface water resources including streams, tanks, rivers etc.

Ground water resources in the deeper strata of the ground

Ground water from dug wells, tube wells and hand pumps cater to the drinking water needs of the villages

in the region. The quality of ground water was assessed by taking samples and analyzed as per CPCB

norms. Reconnaissance survey was undertaken and monitoring locations were selected based on the

following consideration.

Location of the aquifer

Usage and source.



Table 3.15(A)

Ground Water samples analysis

Parameter Unit GW1 GW2 GW3 GW4 GW5 GW6 IS 10500:2012

Acc’ble Per’ble

pH - 7.26 7.19 7.53 7.22 7.09 7.05 6.5-8.5 N R

Elec. Conductivity µs/cm 537 1951 1540 1850 2050 2425 - -

Odor - Agreeable Agreeable

TDS mg/l 339 1239 972 1258 1394 1551 500 2000

Turbidity NTU 2.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 1.0 1 5

Alkalinity as CaCO3 mg/l 212 342 376 344 365 354 200 600

Chlorides as Cl mg/l 20 265 212 287 323 434 250 1000

Sulphates as SO4 mg/l 22 102 98 112 132 163 200 400

Nitrate as NO3 mg/l 12 25 22 25 28 24 45 N R

Total Hardness as CaCO3 mg/l 233 595 474 646 688 686 200 600

Calcium as Ca mg/l 75 168 118 165 172 156 75 200

Magnesium as Mg mg/l 11 42 43 56 62 71 30 100

Sodium as Na mg/l 50 177 167 189 206 256 - -

Potassium as K mg/l 3 25 12 21 12 28 - -

Iron as Fe mg/l 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.3 0.3 N R

Flouride as F mg/l 1.5 2.4 2.1 2.3 2.0 2.4 1.0 1.5

Lead as Pb mg/l 0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 0.01

N R Cadmium as Cd mg/l <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 0.003

Chromium as Cr mg/l 0.024 0.029 0.01 0.014 0.003 0.022 0.05

Copper as Cu mg/l 0.014 0.01 0.03 0.01 0.009 0.019 0.05 1.5

Zinc as Zn mg/l 0.022 0.024 0.441 0.017 0.014 0.348 5 15

Mercury as Hg mg/l <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 0.001 N R

Phenolic Compounds mg/l <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 0.001 0.002

N R – No Relaxation



Table 3.15(B)

Ground Water samples analysis

Parameter Unit GW7 GW8 GW9 GW10 GW11 GW12 GW13 IS 10500:2012

Acc’ble Per’ble

pH - 7.06 7.09 7.03 7.11 7.02 7.27 7.34 6.5-8.5 N R

Elec. Conductivity µs/cm 2100 980 1338 1376 1654 2049 1986 - -

Odor - Agreeable Agreeable

TDS mg/l 1332 632 850 882 1043 1293 1273 500 2000

Turbidity NTU 1.5 0.5 0.5 2.5 0.5 1.5 1.0 1 5

Alkalinity as CaCO3 mg/l 311 265 349 321 312 365 387 200 600

Chlorides as Cl mg/l 434 118 145 163 281 323 355 250 1000

Sulphates as SO4 mg/l 97 58 67 102 87 158 115 200 400

Nitrate as NO3 mg/l 21 25 20 21 18 25 24 45 N R

Total Hardness as CaCO3 mg/l 649 353 585 443 613 668 620 200 600

Calcium as Ca mg/l 153 71 119 107 172 149 153 75 200

Magnesium as Mg mg/l 64 42 69 42 44 71 57 30 100

Sodium as Na mg/l 143 104 78 145 127 196 189 - -

Potassium as K mg/l 26 6 5 10 7 8 7 - -

Iron as Fe mg/l 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.2 0.3 N R

Flouride as F mg/l 2.1 2.1 1.8 2.3 1.8 2.1 2.1 1.0 1.5

Lead as Pb mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 0.01 0.01

N R Cadmium as Cd mg/l <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 0.003

Chromium as Cr mg/l 0.029 0.019 0.041 0.027 0.024 0.031 0.023 0.05

Copper as Cu mg/l 0.009 0.009 0.012 0.026 0.008 0.014 0.013 0.05 1.5

Zinc as Zn mg/l 0.036 0.033 0.016 0.17 0.01 0.184 0.011 5 15

Mercury as Hg mg/l <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 0.001 NR

Phenolic Compounds mg/l <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 0.001 0.002

N R – No Relaxation



Table 3.16

Surface Water analysis

Parameter Unit SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 IS:2296 – 1992 Inland surface water Stds

A B C D E

pH --- 7.25 7.09 7.36 7.28 6.85 6.5-8.5 6-9 6.5-8.5 6-8.5

EC µs/cm 1506 1542 1946 2331 1657 - - - - 2250

Odor -- Unobjectionable Unobjectionable - -

TDS mg/l 967 990 1245 1494 1048 500 - 1500 - 2100

TSS mg/l 52 39 14 20 27 - - - - -

Turbidity NTU 50 35 10 12 15 - - - - -

Alkalinity as CaCO3 mg/l 323 289 412 408 120 - - - - -

Chloride as Cl- mg/l 178 176 236 286 197 250 - 600 - 600

Sulphate as SO4 mg/l 78 108 105 134 187 400 - 400 - 1000

Nitrates as NO3 mg/l 54 45 56 82 71 20 - 50 - -

Total Hardness as CaCO3 mg/l 376 412 598 775 518 200 - - - -

Calcium as Ca mg/l 87 93 126 165 149 200 - - - -

Magnesium as Mg mg/l 38 43 68 87 35 200 - - - -

Sodium as Na mg/l 123 118 126 132 96 - - - - -

Potassium as K mg/l 12 15 11 9 23 - - - - -

Iron as Fe mg/l <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 0.3 - 0.5 - -

Fluoride as F mg/l 0.6 0.5 0.7 0.5 0.6 1.5 1.5 1.5 - -

Lead as Pb mg/l 0.012 0.011 0.007 0.005 0.004 0.1 - 0.1

Cadmium as Cd mg/l 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 - 0.01 - -

Chromium as Cr mg/l 0.026 0.028 0.036 0.038 0.014 - - - - -

Copper as Cu mg/l 0.011 0.017 0.012 0.025 0.012 1.5 - 1.5 - -

Zinc as Zn mg/l 0.011 0.02 0.02 0.024 0.016 15 - 15 - -

Mercury as Hg mg/l <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 0.001 - - - -

DO mg/l 6.2 5.8 3.2 3.6 5.9 6 5 4 4

COD mg/l 12 26 38 32 28 - - - - -

BOD at 27oC mg/l 3 4 5 4 4 2 3 3 - -

Class A Drinking water source without Conventional Treatment; Class B Outdoor Bathing; Class C Drinking Water Source with Conventional

Treatment Followed by Disinfection; Class D Fish Culture and Wild Life Population; Class E Irrigation, Industrial Cooling



Figure 3.6

Ground Water Quality Sampling Locations



Figure 3.7

Surface Water Quality Sampling Locations



3.5.2 Regional Scenario

Ground water

The pH limit fixed for drinking water samples as per IS 10500-2012 is 6.5 to 8.5 beyond this

range the water will affect the mucus membrane and or water supply system. During study period

the pH in the ground water samples was varying from 7.02 to 7.53. The pH of all samples was

falling within the acceptable limit.

The acceptable limit for total dissolved solids as per IS 10500:2012 is 500 mg/l, whereas the

permissible limit in absence of alternate source is 2000 mg/l, beyond this palatability decreases

and may cause gastro intestinal irritation. In water samples collected from the study area, the total

dissolved solids in groundwater are varying from 339 mg/l to 1551 mg/l. Only one sample is

falling within the acceptable limit and remaining 12 samples are above the acceptable limit but

within permissible limit.

The acceptable limit for chloride is 250 mg/l as per IS10500:2012 whereas the permissible limit

of the same is 1000 mg/l beyond this limit taste, corrosion and palatability are affected. The

Chloride levels in the ground water samples collected in the study area were ranging from 20

mg/l to 434 mg/l. The 5 samples are falling within acceptable limit and remaining 8 samples are

falling above the acceptable limit but within the permissible limit.

The acceptable limit as per IS10500:2012 for hardness is 200mg/l whereas the permissible limit

for the same is 600mg/l beyond this limit encrustation in water supply structure and adverse

effects on domestic use will be observed. In the water samples collected from the study area, the

hardness is varying from 233 mg/l to 688 mg/l. The 6 samples are falling above the acceptable

limit but within the permissible limits and remaining 7 samples were falling above the

permissible limits.

Fluoride is the other important parameter, which has the acceptable limit of 1 mg/l and

permissible limit of 1.5mg/l. However the optimum content of fluoride in the drinking water is0.6

to 1.5 mg/l. If the fluoride content is less than 0.6 mg/l it causes dental carries, above 1.5mg/lit

causes staining of tooth enamel, higher concentration in range of 3 – 10 mg/l causes Fluorosis. In

the water samples of study area the fluoride value were in the range of 1.5 to 2.4 mg/l. one

sample is falling within the permissible limit and remaining 12 samples were falling above the

permissible limit.

The general characteristics of all the ground water samples collected in the region shows fairly good

quality except some levels of Hardness and fluoride observed to be slightly higher than the stipulated

standards. The basic treatment for fluoride will reduce the concentration levels within the limits and can

be used for consumption.

Surface water

pH was varying between 6.85 to 7.36. The pH values for all the samples collected in the study

area during study period were meeting the Class ‘A’ norms as per IS: 2296-1992.



The total dissolved solids were in the range of 967 mg/l to 1494 mg/l, which were meeting the

Class ‘C’ norms as per IS: 2296-1992.

The chlorides were in the range of 176 mg/l to 286 mg/l, indicating that 4 samples were meeting

the Class ‘A’ norms as per IS: 2296-1992 and remaining one sample is meeting Class ‘C’ norms

as per IS: 2296-1992

The hardness is varying between 376 mg/l to 775 mg/l, in which all samples were above the

Class ‘A’ norms as per IS: 2296-1992

Fluoride content was in range of 0.5 mg/l to 0.7 mg/l, which were meeting the Class ‘A’ norms

as per IS: 2296-1992.

3.6 Noise Environment

Noise can be defined as unwanted sound or sound in the wrong place at the wrong time. It can also be

defined as any sound that is undesirable because it interferes with speech and hearing, is intense enough

to damage hearing or is otherwise annoying. The definition noise as unwanted sound implies that it has an

adverse effect on human beings and their environment including land, structures, and domestic animals.

Noise can also disturb natural wildlife and ecological systems.

Sound can be transmitted through gases, liquids, and solids. Noise impacts can be of concern during the

construction and the operational phases of projects. Noise should also be considered in relation to present

and future land use zoning and policies.

Construction noise can be a significant source of community noise. Of concern are impacts on people

near the construction site, who are totally unrelated to construction activities (e.g. area residents, office

workers, school children, staff, etc.) Factors which are important in determining noise levels that will

potentially impact such populations include distance from the noise source, natural or man-made barriers

between the source and the impacted population, weather conditions which could potentially absorb,

reflect or focus sound (such as wind speed, direction, temperature inversions), the scale and intensity of

the particular construction phase (excavation, erection, or finishing).

The Environment/health impacts of noise can vary from Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) to

annoyance depending on loudness of noise levels and tolerance levels of individual.

While measuring the day-night equivalent noise levels (Ldn), it is considered that one event at night is

equivalent to ten similar events during the day time. Ldn is similar to 24 hours equivalent sound level

(LEq) except that, during the daytime 10 dB (A) weighing is added. The Ldn for a given location in a

community may be calculated from the hourly (LEq) equivalent sound levels with a 10 dB (A) correction

added to the night time value (Ln).



Ldn= 10 Log (0.0416 [15 (10Ld/10

] + 9 (10Ln+10/10

]) + ......

Where Ld is the Equivalent noise levels at day (6.00 A.M to 10.00 P.M) and

Ln is the Equivalent noise levels at night (10.00 P.M to 6.00 A.M)

3.6.1 Noise Levels in the Study Area

Base noise levels are monitored in 11 different locations within study zone, using a continuous noise

measurement device. The day levels of noise have been monitored during 6 AM to 10 PM and the night

levels during 10 PM to 6 AM. The noise monitoring locations are given in the Table3.17 and the results

obtained are given in Table 3.18, noise monitoring locations are represented in Figure 3.8

Table 3.17

Noise monitoring locations

Code Name of the

Location

W.R.T. Site

Latitude(N) Longitude(E) Remarks Distance

km Direction

D M S D M S

N1 Site - - 17 16 39.9 79 12 15.3 Site

N2 Tondalvai 4.5 SE 17 15 06.5 79 14 18.1 Near Grama Panchayat

N3 Iskilla 2.5 NW 17 17 39.4 79 10 02.1 Near Village Junction

N4 Munipampula 6.5 NW 17 19 13.2 79 09 21.5 Near Andhra Bank

N5 Chinna Tummalagudem 2.5 E 17 16 37.4 79 13 54.3 Near Primary School

N6 Kunkudupamla 6.5 NE 17 19 48.2 79 14 23.4 Near primary School

N7 Kakkireni 2.0 N 17 18 04.9 79 12 19.3 Near Helth Centre

N8 Pilligudem 1.5 W 17 16 32.6 79 10 39.8 Near Mallanna Temple

N9 Mandra 2.5 SW 17 15 10.4 79 11 40.4 Near ZPHS

N10 Vanipakula 6.5 SW 17 14 38.3 79 09 18.4 Near Primary School

N11 Narketpalli 8.0 S 17 12 13.7 79 11 48.0 Near Nalgonda Road

Junction



Figure 3.8

Noise Monitoring Locations



Table 3.18

Noise Levels in the Study Area – dB (A)

Time (Hours) N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11

AA

Q S

tan

dard

s in

res

pec

t of

Nois

e S

O 1

23 (

E )

dt

14th

Feb

2000 –

Res

iden

tial

Are

a

AA

Q S

tan

dard

s in

res

pec

t of

Nois

e S

O 1

23 (

E )

dt

14th

Feb

2000 –

Com

mer

cial

Are

a

1.00 42.6 42.9 41.5 42.1 42.3 42.6 41.6 41.7 42.7 42.5 44.5

2.00 43.6 44.2 43.3 43.7 43.2 43.4 42.4 42.2 43.1 43.4 45.4

3.00 45.4 45.1 43.6 44.8 43.8 44.7 43.3 43.1 45.3 44.7 46.5

4.00 45.8 45.4 44.7 43.1 44.9 45.7 47.1 49.4 45.6 45.7 46.8

5.00 46.8 52.9 45.5 47.1 45.3 45.9 49.6 46.3 45.9 46.5 47.5

6.00 51.3 54.2 48.7 46.1 46.5 46.0 44.5 52.0 47.8 46.9 48.9

7.00 53.4 55.8 55.4 55.4 54.5 54.6 55.4 53.1 55.7 54.5 56.8

8.00 56.4 56.3 56.5 56.7 55.4 55.5 46.4 54.7 56.8 55.7 58.6

9.00 56.0 55.2 55.6 57.6 56.7 56.3 47.7 55.8 55.8 56.7 62.6

10.00 57.6 55.7 55.8 55.4 57.6 55.6 55.7 54.7 56.8 54.6 65.4

11.00 56.4 56.4 54.6 55.2 56.4 55.8 55.0 56.6 54.5 56.1 68.6

12.00 55.7 54.3 54.4 54.7 55.6 55.6 54.0 54.5 53.5 54.3 67.5

13.00 54.3 52.6 53.4 46.3 54.6 53.2 55.2 50.1 52.7 53.5 65.7

14.00 56.1 54.3 52.3 54.7 55.6 52.6 56.2 49.1 54.7 52.8 62.3

15.00 55.6 53.6 54.5 55.9 54.5 53.5 52.5 55.6 56.8 53.7 60.2

16.00 56.4 55.2 55.4 56.2 55.6 55.1 53.2 54.7 57.8 54.8 63.2

17.00 54.8 54.0 52.3 55.6 56.4 56.2 58.9 52.8 55.6 55.7 65.4

18.00 53.3 54.3 53.5 56.5 52.4 55.1 51.4 52.2 52.9 56.5 61.3

19.00 49.1 47.1 51.4 52.4 50.3 46.2 49.7 45.3 48.6 54.7 58.7

20.00 46.5 48.0 47.6 46.3 48.5 50.5 50.2 46.6 43.3 51.6 55.6

21.00 45.8 43.9 46.5 45.2 46.5 49.5 44.9 47.1 44.9 48.6 51.6

22.00 44.5 42.7 45.6 45.4 45.3 45.5 46.9 42.7 43.0 45.6 46.5

23.00 45.6 43.0 44.6 44.4 44.3 45.2 47.8 43.1 43.3 44.6 45.8

24.00 43.5 43.2 43.5 42.3 42.6 44.3 43.7 43.3 42.1 42.9 44.3

Minimum 42.6 42.7 41.5 42.1 42.3 42.6 41.6 41.7 42.1 42.5 44.3

Maximum 57.6 56.4 56.5 57.6 57.6 56.3 58.9 56.6 57.8 56.7 68.6

Day Equivalent 54.7 54.1 53.8 54.6 54.6 54.1 53.6 53.3 54.5 54.4 63.3 55 65

Night Equivalent 44.0 43.3 43.4 43.2 43.3 44.0 44.7 43.9 43.2 43.8 45.2 45 55



3.6.2 Observations

The values of noise observed in some of the rural areas are primarily owing to vehicular traffic and other

anthropogenic activities. In rural areas wind blowing and movements of birds would contribute to noise

levels especially during the nights. The day equivalents during the study period are range between 53.3 to

63.3 dB (A), whereas the night equivalents were in the range of 43.2 to 45.2 dB (A). From the results it

can be seen that the day equivalents and the Night equivalents were within the Ambient Noise standards

of residential. However, some of the locations in Noise levels are above the Ambient Noise standards of

residential but within the Ambient Noise standards of commercial.

3.7 Traffic Study

A traffic study may be required for any project at the sole discretion of the statutory authorities. A traffic

study will be required when there is the potential for the project to create a significant number of traffic

conflicts under future conditions. The potential for traffic conflicts will depend upon the trip generation of

the project as well as the congestion in the area surrounding the project site. Typically a project which

generates fewer than 25 peak hour trips will not be expected to significantly contribute to traffic

congestion, whereas a project which generates more than 50 peak hour trips will generally be considered

potentially significant trip generator.

The potential for significant impacts is highly dependent upon the circulation system in the project

vicinity. If the project access is through a congested intersection, a relatively small trip generator could

significantly increase the potential for traffic conflicts. If a project is located in a congestion free area with

many alternative routes available to disperse project traffic, a relatively large trip generator may have no

significant impact. The trip generation of the project and the sensitivity of the project vicinity to

additional traffic are both critical in determining the need for a traffic study.

The methodology adopted for carrying out the traffic study was to select the major roads around the

project site and count the various categories of vehicles moving on these roads. The traffic study details

area given in Table 3.19 and Table 3.20. The vehicular traffic on the existing road were determined and

converted into passenger car units (PCUs) and compared with IRC 106-1990 guidelines for capacity of

urban roads in plain areas.

The existing level of service is very good, in future after execution of the project even after addition

of around 50 PCUs in peak hour, the level of service will be in very good class.



Table 3.19

Muthkur- Narketpally Road (Adjacent to the site)

Hours

Two wheeler Three Wheeler Passenger cars Trucks, Buses

and lorries Total vehicles

v/hr PCU/hr

(0.75) v/hr

PCU/hr

(1.2) v/hr

PCU/hr

(1) v/hr

PCU/hr

(3.7) Total

Total

PCU/hr

06-07 am 56 42 34 68 12 12 0 0 102 122

07-08 am 76 57 46 92 23 23 5 19 150 191

08-09 am 112 84 68 136 34 34 8 30 222 284

09-10 am 133 100 87 174 45 45 12 44 277 363

10-11 am 143 107 123 246 56 56 14 52 336 461

11-12 pm 132 99 102 204 43 43 16 59 293 405

12-01 pm 121 91 98 196 32 32 13 48 264 367

01-02 pm 112 84 76 152 44 44 9 33 241 313

02-03 pm 98 74 76 152 48 48 8 30 230 303

03-04 pm 76 57 67 134 54 54 7 26 204 271

04-05 pm 86 65 78 156 57 57 11 41 232 318

05-06 pm 93 70 86 172 54 54 13 48 246 344

06-07 pm 65 49 56 112 43 43 12 44 176 248

07-08 pm 54 41 45 90 32 32 10 37 141 200

08-09pm 34 26 32 64 21 21 8 30 95 140

09-10pm 23 17 16 32 11 11 7 26 57 86

10-11pm 12 9 7 14 8 8 6 22 33 53

The highest peak observed is 461 PCU/hr during 10am to 11 am

Road width 10 m

IRC- 106-1990

Standards

2 way/2 lane

(Undivided)

Roads with no frontage access, no standing

vehicles very little cross traffic 1500 PCU/hr



Table 3.20

NH 9 (Hyderabad to Vijayawada) (To &Fro)

Hours

Two wheeler Three Wheeler Passenger cars Trucks,Buses

and lorries Total vehicles

v/hr PCU/hr

(0.75) v/hr

PCU/hr

(1.2) v/hr

PCU/hr

(1) v/hr

PCU/hr

(3.7) Total

Total

PCU/hr

06-07 am 234 176 23 46 287 287 323 1195 867 1704

07-08 am 255 191 34 68 456 456 254 940 999 1655

08-09 am 365 274 45 90 488 488 345 1277 1243 2128

09-10 am 487 365 55 110 587 587 478 1769 1607 2831

10-11 am 532 399 62 124 667 654 568 2102 1829 3279

11-12 pm 523 392 61 122 654 643 543 2009 1781 3166

12-01 pm 465 349 57 114 676 634 445 1647 1643 2743

01-02 pm 367 275 48 96 643 643 432 1598 1490 2613

02-03 pm 387 290 56 112 578 578 476 1761 1497 2741

03-04 pm 435 326 59 118 687 687 512 1894 1693 3026

04-05 pm 480 360 60 120 745 745 524 1939 1809 3164

05-06 pm 465 349 54 108 678 678 512 1894 1709 3029

06-07 pm 376 282 48 96 587 587 576 2131 1587 3096

07-08 pm 254 191 37 74 534 534 556 2057 1381 2856

08-09pm 212 159 27 54 476 476 645 2387 1360 3076

09-10pm 154 116 21 42 387 387 665 2461 1227 3005

10-11pm 132 99 12 24 432 432 634 2346 1210 2901

The highest peak observed is 3279 PCU/hr during 10 am to 11 am

Road width 40 m

IRC- 106-1990

Standards

2 way/4 lane

(Divided)

Roads with no frontage access, no standing

vehicles very little cross traffic 3600 PCU/hr

3.8 Soil quality

The present study on soil quality establishes the baseline characteristics in the study area surrounding the

project site. The study has been addressed with the following objectives.

To determine the baseline characteristic.

To determine the soil characteristics of the proposed project site.

To determine the impact of industrialization/urbanization on soil characteristics.

To determine the impacts on soils from agricultural productivity point of view.

3.8.1 Criteria adopted for selection of sampling locations

For studying soil characteristics, sampling locations were selected to assess the existing soil conditions

representing various land use conditions and geological features. The homogenized soil samples collected

at 10 different locations were packed in a polyethylene plastic bag and sealed. The sealed samples are sent

to laboratory analysis. The important physical, chemical parameter concentrations were determined from



all samples. The details of the soil sampling locations are given in Table 3.21. The analytical results of

the soil samples are given in Table 3.22. The Soil Sampling locations are given in Figure 3.9.

Table 3.21

Soil sampling locations

Code Name of the

Location

W.R.T. Site

Latitude (N) Longitude

(E) Remarks Distance

km Direction

D M S D M S

S1 Site - - 17 16 39.6 79 12 17.9 Barren Land

S2 Tondalvai 4.5 SE 17 15 36.6 79 14 00.9 Agriculture Land

S3 Iskilla 2.5 NW 17 17 38.2 79 10 55.1 Agriculture Land

S4 Munipampula 6.5 NW 17 19 23.7 79 09 25.1 Agriculture Land

S5 Chinna Tummalagudem 2.5 E 17 16 57.8 79 14 02.6 Agriculture Land

S6 Kunkudupamla 6.5 NE 17 19 41.5 79 14 30.4 Agriculture Land

S7 Kakkireni 2.0 N 17 17 50.8 79 12 14.6 Agriculture Land

S8 Pilligudem 1.5 W 17 16 33.3 79 10 34.1 Agriculture Land

S9 Mandra 2.5 SW 17 15 01.9 79 11 29.6 Agriculture Land

S10 Vanipakula 6.5 SW 17 14 31.3 79 09 04.3 Agriculture Land

S11 Narketpalli 8.0 S 17 12 38.6 79 11 47.8 Agriculture Land



Figure 3.9

Soil Sampling Locations



Table 3.22

Soil Analysis Report

Parameters Unit S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11

Standard Soil Classification –

(Indian Council of Agricultural

Research, New Delhi)

Texture -- Powde

r&

Lumps

Powd

er&

Lump

s

Powd

er&

Lump

s

Powd

er&

Lump

s

Powd

er&

Lump

s

Powd

er&

Lump

s

Powd

er&

Lump

s

Powd

er&

Lump

s

Powd

er&

Lump

s

Powd

er&

Lump

s

Powd

er&

Lump

s

--

Colour -- Grey Grey Grey Grey Grey Grey Grey Grey Grey Grey Grey --

Bulk Density g/cc 2.0 1.19 1.17 1.29 1.18 1.33 1.73 1.80 1.39 1.5 1.5 --

Moisture content % 0.45 12.4 10.6 16.07 9.1 8.20 2.5 0.32 5.7 2.8 1.55 --

pH ( 10% Solution) -- 6.89 7.02 7.22 7.18 7.11 6.93 7.12 7.28 7.15 7.21 7.12

Acidic<6.0, Normal to Saline 6.0-

8.5, Tending to become Alkaline8.6

to 9.0, Alkaline above 9.

EC ( 10% Solution) µs/cm 36 103 98 205 228 242 121 193 87 136 50

Normal<1000, Critical for

germination 1000-2000, Critical for

growing 2000 - 4000, Injurious to

most crops>4000

Organic Carbon % 0.59 0.94 0.66 1.05 0.50 0.36 0.86 0.34 0.92 0.53 0.82 Low < 0.5 , Medium 0.5 – 0.75, High

> 0.75

CEC 52 223 224 229 263 278 209 376 156 286 229 --

SAR 0.77 0.79 0.79 4.36 5.52 1.44 1.17 1.13 0.75 0.94 3.59 --

Ava. Nitrogen as N Kg/Ha 356 294 336 268 264 248 324 284 300 310 324 Low below 280, Medium 280-560,

High above 560

Ava Phosphates as P Kg/Ha 8.8 7.2 8.0 11.6 4.8 4.8 11.6 7.6 9.6 5.6 8.4 Low below 10, Medium 10-25,High

above 25

Ava Potassium as K Kg/Ha 244 216 142 618 640 200 192 354 402 644 606 Low below 110, Medium 110-280

High above 280

Calcium as Ca mg/Kg 432 2553 2042 2474 2670 4791 3198 1492 2395 3374 3340 --

Chlorides as Cl mg/Kg 246 197 246 246 394 443 246 197 197 147 295 --

Sulphate as SO4 mg/Kg 62 49 62 62 98 110 62 49 49 37 73 --



Sodium as Na mg/Kg 84 188 190 952 1270 528 266 347 174 247 784 --

Boron as B mg/Kg 6.87 23.07 22.67 0.35 32.22 15.61 29.09 33.62 16.47 59.32 43.5 --

Zinc as Zn mg/Kg 6.36 49 34.28 0.70 17.64 22.27 33.63 31.26 27.35 65.16 83 --

Copper as Cu mg/Kg 3.34 13.14 13.38 0.19 11.95 5.21 15.31 4.6 5.61 17.41 11.63 --

Magnisium as Mg mg/Kg 285 1024 1372 690 809 1670 428 343 285 1095 166 --

Chromium as Cr mg/kg 7.42 14.22 13.63 0.13 22.29 9.86 18.92 8.57 9.53 15.41 15.75 --

Lead as Pb mg/kg 11.14 11.1 15.18 0.15 13.26 7.02 10.4 6.03 10.24 13.13 16.41 --



3.8.2 Observations

The analytical soil samples results collected during the study period is summarized below. The

pH of the soil is an important property; plants cannot grow in low and high pH value soils. The

normal range of the soils is 6.0 to 8.5 are called as normal to saline in soils. Most of the essential

nutrients like N, P, K and Cl are available in plants at the neutral pH except for zinc and

manganese which are available at low pH range. The soils having pH below 7 are considered to

be acidic from the practical stand point, those with pH less than 5.5 and which respond to limiting

may be considered to qualify to be designated as acidic soils. On the basis of pH measurements

the degree of soil acidity may be indicated. The pH values in the study area are varying from 6.89

to 7.28 indicating that all soils are falling in normal to saline class.

Based on the electrical conductivity, the soils are classified in four groups, normal critical for

germination, critical of the growth of sensitive crops, injurious to most crops. The electrical

conductivity in the study area is varying from 36 to 242 μs/cm indicating that all samples are

falling in normal range.

Organic carbon in the study area is varying from 0.34 to 1.05 %. 3 samples are falling in low

range, four samples are falling in Medium range and remaining 5 samples are falling in High

range.

The other important parameters for characterization of soil for irrigation are N, P, K are known as primary

nutrients. Ca, Mn, S as secondary nutrients. The primary and secondary nutrients are known as major

elements. The classification is based on their relative abundance, and not on their relative importance.

Nitrogen encourages the vegetative development of plants by imparting a healthy green color to the

leaves. It also controls to some extent the efficient utilization of phosphorous and potassium. Its

deficiency retard growth and root development, turns the foliage yellowish or pale green, hastens

maturity, causes the shriveling of grains and lowers crop yield. The older leaves are affected first.

An excess of nitrogen produces leathery dark green leaves and succulent growth. It also delays the

maturation of plants, impairs the quality of crops like barley, potato, tobacco, sugarcane and fruits

increase susceptibility to diseases and causes lodging of cereal crops by indicating an undue

lengthening of the stem internodes. The available nitrogen as N in the study area is varying from 248

to 356 kg/Ha indicating that 3 samples are falling in low range and remaining 8 samples are falling

in medium range.

Phosphorous influences the vigor of the plants and improves the quality of the crops. It encourages

the formation of the new cells, promotes root growth and hastens the leaf development, the

emergence of ears, the formation of grains, and the maturation of the crops; it also increases

resistance to disease to disease and strengthens the stems of cereal plants, thus reducing the tendency

to lodge. When applied to leguminous plants it hastens and encourages the development of nitrogen

fixing nodule bacteria. If phosphorous is deficient in the soil, plants fail to make a quick start, do not

develop a satisfactory root system, remain stunted and sometimes develop a tendency to show a

reddish or purplish discoloration of the stem and foliage owing to an abnormal increase in the sugar

content and the formation of anthocyanin. It has also been observed that cattle feeding on the

produce of phosphorous deficient soils become dwarfed, develop stiff joints and loose velvety feel of



the skin. Such animals show an abnormal craving for eating bones and even soil itself. In the study

area available, phosphorous is varying from 4.8 to 11.6 kg/Ha indicating that 9 samples are in low

range and remaining 2 samples are falling in medium range.

Potassium enhances the ability of the plants to resist diseases, insect attacks, cold and other adverse

conditions. It plays an essential part in the formation of starch and in the production of translocation

of sugars, and is thus of special value to carbohydrates rich crops, like sugarcane, potato and sugar

beet. The increased production of starch and sugar in legumes fertilized with potash benefits the

symbolic bacteria and thus enhances the fixation of the nitrogen. It also improves the quality of

tobacco; citrus etc. with an adequate supply of potash cereals produce plump grains and strong

straw. But an excess of element tends to delay maturity, though not to the same extent as nitrogen.

Plants can take up and store potassium in much larger quantities than what needed for optimum

growth and this excess uptake is known as luxury consumption. With the maturity or death of plants,

potassium is washed from the plant body readily. Vegetables and legumes are particularly heavy

consumers of potassium. The deficiency of potassium produces the characteristic ringing of alfalfa

leaves with rows of small white spots, reddish brown discoloration of cotton leaves, drying,

scorching and curbing of leaf margins of Potato, and Intraveinal Chlorosis and flaring along the

edges of Maize leaves. The older leaves are affected first. The available potassium in the study area

is varying between 142 to 644 Kg/Ha indicating that 5 samples are falling in medium range and

remaining 6 samples are falling in high range.

3.9 Ecological Environment

An ecological survey of the study area was conducted particularly with reference to recording the existing

biological resources in the study area. Ecological studies are one of the important aspects of

Environmental Impact Assessment with a view to conserve environmental quality and biodiversity. The

present objective is to study an area 10 km radius from the proposed project site.

Ecological systems show complex inter-relationships between biotic and abiotic components including

dependence, competition and mutualism. Biotic components comprise of both plant and animal

communities, which interact not only within and between themselves but also with the abiotic

components viz. physical and chemical components of the environment.

The assessment of flora and fauna of the study area was done as per the MoEF guidelines. The main

objective behind gathering information about the ecology and biodiversity of the study area was to assess

the existing baseline ecological conditions in the study area, correlate it with the data available with the

Department of Forests and develop mitigation measures for possible impacts of the project to the existing

ecology.

Nalgonda District falls in the AP-1 Krishna/Godavari Zone climatic zone of Andhra Pradesh state as per

the National Agricultural Research Project (NARP) along with Khammam, Prakasam Districts. As per the



Agro-Climatic Regions formulated by The Planning Commission, Nalgonda District falls in the Southern

Plateau and Hills Region characterized by shallow& deep red loamy soils and sandy soil.

3.9.1 Objectives of Ecological and Biodiversity studies

The main objective of the survey is to collect the information about the ecology and biodiversity of the

project site and its surrounding of the project site within 10 km radius.

Generate baseline data from field observations from various terrestrial and aquatic ecosystems;

To assess the distribution of flora and fauna in and around of the project site

Compare the data so generated with authentic past records to understand changes

Characterize the environmental components like land, water, flora and fauna.

To assess the impacts of the project on the immediate ecology and biodiversity

3.9.2 Methodology adopted for the survey

To accomplish the above objectives, a general ecological survey covering an area of 10 km radius from

the proposed project boundary was done as follows:

1. Reconnaissance survey for selection of sampling sites in and around the site on the basis of

meteorological conditions;

2. Compilation of secondary data from published literature of Forest Division

3. Primary data generation through systematic studies which was done through:

Generation of primary data to understand baseline ecological status, fauna structure and important

floristic elements;

Preparing a checklist of plants observed at the site.

Determining the bird population by taking random readings at every location.

Observing mammals, reptiles, amphibians, insects through their calls, droppings, burrows,

pugmarks and other signs.

Interaction with local residents

4. Collection of secondary data from Forest Working Plan and Gazetteers. The compilation of primary

and secondary data for flora and fauna is appended.

5. Primary data collected from core and buffer zone of the project site, surrounding villages namely

Mandra-2.5, Piligudem-1.5 km, Uthatur-2.0 km, Kakkireni-2.0 km village’s etc.

3.9.3 Flora

According to the classification of Forest Types Zones of India proposed by Champion and Seth (1968)

the vegetation group occurring in the area belongs to Tropical Dry Deciduous Forest (Group 5).

The core area of the proposed project is barren land and covered with grasses, acacia species. There are

no notified areas used by protected, important or sensitive species of flora and fauna within 10 km radius

of the project. The list of flora observed at the study area and surrounding of the project site given in

Table 3.23.



Table 3.23

List of Flora in the Study Area

S. No Scientific Name Family Name Common Name

1 Acacia niloticaindica Fabaceae Babul

2 Ficusreligiosa Moraceae Peepul tree

3 Annona squamosal Annonaceae custard-apple

4 Casuarinaequisetifolia Casuarinaceae Oak tree

5 Cyperusrotundus Cyperaceae Nut grass

6 Psidiumguajava Myrtaceae Guava

7 CocosNusifera Aracaceae Coconut Tree

8 Filiciumdecipiens Sapindaceae Fern-leaf

9 Calotropisprocera Asclepiadaceae Rubber bush

10 Nerium oleander Apocynaceae Oleander

11 Miscanthussinensis Poaceae Chinese silver grass

12 Partheniumhysterophorus Asteraceae Congress grass

13 Ficusbenghalensis Moraceae Banyan tree

14 Citrus aurantifolia Rutaceae Lime

15 Sennasurattensis Caesalpiniaceae Bushy Cassia

16 Lawsoniainermis Lythraceae Henna

17 Cassia fistula Caesalpiniaceae Golden shower tree

18 Albiziasaman Mimosaceae Coco tamarind

19 Musa paradisiaca Musaceae Banana

20 Acacia catechu Mimosaceae Arabic Gum

21 Sennaauriculata Fabaceae legume tree

22 Borassusflabellifer Aracaceae Palmyra palm

23 Mimosa pudica Fabaceae sensitive plant

24 CissusQuadrangularis Vitaceae succulent twiner

25 Azadirachtaindica Meliaceae Neem

26 Tamarindusindica Fabaceae Tamarind Tree

27 Mangiferaindica Anacardiaceae Mango Tree

28 Ziziphusjujuba Rhamnaceae jujube

29 Opuntialittoralis Cactaceae culinary

30 Bauhinia purpurea Caesalpiniaceae Butterfly tree

31 Indopiptadeniaoudhensis Mimosaceae Gainti

32 Lantana camara Verbenaceae wild-sage

33 Phoenix sylvestris Arecaceae wild date palm

34 Tectonagrandis Lamiaceae Teak

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Musaceae

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Legume

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tree

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Rhamnaceae

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Opuntia_littoralis

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cactaceae

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Culinary

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Verbenaceae

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Arecaceae

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lamiaceae



Table 3.24

Plants of Economic importance

3.9.4 Fauna

The core area is not isolated from its surroundings by any barrier, there are no chances for any kind of

isolation or restriction of any wild animal to the core area or the buffer area. As they are capable of

moving from place to place either for food or shelter or mate, it is not proper to list them separately for

different areas.

Hence, common lists are prepared based on available secondary data and on the basis of direct

observation, indirect or circumstantial evidence such as foot prints, feathers, skin, hair, hooves etc. The

list of fauna observed during primary survey and based on secondary sources is given in Table 3.25

S. No. Botanical Name Common Name

Cereals

1 Oryzasativa Rice

2 Eleusinecoracana Ragi

3 Zea mays Maize

Millets

1 Sorghum spp. Jowar

Pulses

1 Cajanuscajan Red gram

2 Cicerarietinum Bengal gram

Vegetables (leafy)

1 Hibiscus cannabinus Ambadi

2 Allium cepa Onion

Vegetables (fruit)

1 Momordicacharantia Bitter gourd

2 Lycopersiumesculentum Tomato

3 Trichosanthesanguina Ridge gourd

Fruits

1 Cocosnucifera Coconut

2 Tamarindusindica Tamarind

4 Psidium guava Guava

5 Mangiferaindica Mango

6 Citrus Lemon

Oil seeds

1 Ricinuscommunis Castor

2 Arachishypogaea Groundnut



Table 3.25

List of Fauna in the Study Area

S. No Scientific name Common name Family WPA Schedule

Mammals

1 Lepusnigricollis Common Hare Leporidae Schedule-IV

2 Hystrixindica Indian Porcupine Hystricidae Schedule-IV

3 Sus scrofa Wild pig Suidae Schedule-III

4 Cannisaureus jackal Canidae part-II Schedule-II

5 Harpestesedwardsi Common mongoose Herpestidae Schedule -II

6 Rattusnorvegicus Field mouse Muridae Schedule-III

7 Rattusrattus House rat Muridae Schedule-III

8 Macacamulatta Monkey Cercopithecidae

9 Funumbulussp Stripped squirrel Sciuridae Schedule-III

Reptiles

10 Hemidactylussp House Lizard Gekkonidae Schedule-II

11 Calotesversicolor Garden Lizard Agamidae Schedule-III

12 Ptyasmucosus Rat snake Colubridae Schedule-II

13 Najanaja Cobra Elapidae Schedule-IV

14 Bungaruscandidus Krait Elapidae Schedule-IV

15 Viperarusseli Viper Viperidae Schedule-IV

16 Chamaeleochamaeleon common chameleon Chamaeleonidae

Amphibians

17 Bufomelanosticus Indian Toad Bufonidae Schedule-IV

18 Rhacophorusmaculatus Indian Tree frog Rhacophoridae Schedule-IV

Avian Species

19 Clanga hastate Common Eagle Accipitridae Schedule-IV

20 Eudynamysscolopaceus Common Koel Cuculidae Schedule-IV

21 Milvusmigrans Black Kite Accipitridae Schedule-IV

22 Passer domesticus House Sparrow Passeridae Schedule-IV

23 Columba livia Rock Pigeon Columbidae Schedule-IV

24 Coraciasbenghalensis Indian roller Coraciidae Schedule-IV

25 Gruidae Crane Gruidae Schedule-IV

26 Athenebrama Spotted Owlet Strigidae Schedule-IV

27 Haliasturindus Brahminy Kite Accipitridae Schedule-IV

28 Corvussplendens House Crow Corvidae Schedule-V

29 Bubulcus ibis Cattle egret Ardeidae Schedule-VI

30 Pycnonotuscafer Red vented bulbul Pycnonotidae Schedule-VI

Source:- Divisional Forest Office &information gathered from surrounding villagers during primary survey

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Leporidae

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hystricidae

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Suidae

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Canidae

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Muridae

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Muridae

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cercopithecidae

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sciuridae

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Gekkonidae

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Agamidae

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Colubridae

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Elapidae

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Viperidae

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chamaeleonidae

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Coraciidae

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Heron

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bulbul



3.9.5 National Parks/ Wild life Sanctuaries

There are no wildlife sanctuaries and National Parks within 10km radius of the project site. Mahaveer

Harina Vanasthali national Park is at 65 km distance from the proposed project. Sensitivity map is shown

in Figure 3.10.

3.9.6 Endangered animals

Based on the survey conducted, the study area does not have any species as per the IUCN Red list.

Site Photographs



Figure 3.10 Sensitivity Map

3.10 Google Imagery and Topo map for 10 km radius

The satellite based remote sensing is a sustainable global information system because it has the potential

to meet the needs and demands of the present and future. The synoptic Average, which provides

capability for integration of real time information on regional and global scales, is a unique characteristic

of this information system. Its versatility lies in its inherent capability to conceptualize situation to give

clear perceptions for defining short term and long term objectives.

3.11 Land Use land Cover

The satellite based remote sensing is a sustainable global information system because it has the potential

to meet the needs and demands of the present and future. The synoptic Average, which provides

capability for integration of real time information on regional and global scales, is a unique characteristic

of this information system. Its versatility lies in its inherent capability to conceptualize situation to give

clear perceptions for defining short term and long term objectives.



An activity could bring about changes in the Land use and Land cover in the vicinity. A data based on

Land use and land cover indicates ecosystems existing in and around the center of an economic activity,

to safeguard to allow comparison at a future date to draw conclusions on the nature. The study reported

here is with the honest intention of building such a database on Landuse and land cover in an area within

about 10 km radius of the proposed project. The details of the landuse present in the 10 km study area are

given below in Table 3.26; Land use Landcover Map and satellite imagery shown in figure is shown in

Figure 3.11and 3.12.

Table 3.26

The details of the land use present in the 10 km study area

S. No. Color LULC Class Area in Hectares Area in Sq.km

Built Up Land

1

Settlements 1151.5 11.5

Agricultural Land

2

Crop Land 26453.0 264.5

3

Fallow Land 1457.8 14.6

4

Plantation 2203.3 22.0

Forest Land

5

Forest 66.2 0.7

Waste Lands

6

Rocky Area 626.9 6.3

7

Scrub Land 2660.1 26.6

Water body

8

River/Canal 512.8 5.1

9

Water Body 873.1 8.7

Others

10

Mining 193.7 1.9

Total 36198.2 362.0



Figure 3.11

Satellite Imagery



Figure 3.12

Landuse Landcover



3.12 Socio Economic Survey

3.12.1 Demography and Socio-Economics (secondary data description)

This section illustrates the prevailing socio-economic aspects of people inhabiting in villages around

proposed plant boundary. It also attempts to comprehend the social phenomenon so as to represent the

demographic, occupational, gender and diversity among the project area villages, thereby postulate

impactful developmental interventions.

3.12.2 Methodology Adopted for the Study

The study area covers 36 villages in the 10 km radial distance from the periphery of the proposed project

site in Chityala, Ramanna Peta and Narkat palli Mandals of Nalgonda district. The study adopts a two-

fold methodology for data collection, namely, review of published secondary data and collection of

primary data. Secondary data was collected from district census statistics of 2011, which includes:

demography, occupational structure, literacy profile and Social structure etc.

Similarly, the primary data was collected through transact walks, administering structured questionnaire,

Focus group discussions, observation and key stakeholder interactions in project area villages.

The salient features of the demographic and socio-economic aspects are described in the

following sections. Similarly, village wise demographic data as per 2011 census is presented in

subsequent Sections.

Socio-Economic profile of the study area:

3.12.3 Distribution of Population

As per 2011 census the study area consists of 130349 and the distribution of population in the study area

is given in Table 3.27

Comprehensive survey about infrastructural

details-Kunkudapamla village

Reconnaissance survey-Vanipakala village



Table 3.27

Distribution of Population in the Study Area

Source: District Primary Census statistics of Andhra Pradesh -2011

As illustrated in the above table, the gender composition, as percentage of men and women constitute

about 50.5% and 49.4% in the study area respectively.

3.12.3.1 Average Household Size

According to the Census data of 2011, the study area had an average family size of 3.9 persons per

household. This represents moderate family size and also in similarity with other parts of the district.

3.12.3.2 Population Density

It is estimated that the average density of population of the study area is 245 persons per km2.

3.12.3.3 Sex Ratio

To reiterate; the male and female constitute 50.5% and 49.4% respectively and number of females per

1000 males is 977. The widening gap in sex ratio reveals certain sociological aspects with regards female

births rate in rural areas. This is a result of growing infant mortality among female children, single person

family structure and migration of industrial workers.

3.12.4 Social Structure

The Socio-Economic study observed that 23.6% of population belongs to scheduled category, wherein

1.18% population belongs to Scheduled Tribes (ST), whereas Scheduled Castes (SC) comprises of

22.46% of total population. The distribution of population in the study area by social structure is shown in

Table 3.28.

S. No. Particulars 0-10 km

1 No. of Households 22633

2 Male Population 45593

3 Female Population 44565

4 Total Population 90158

5 Male Population (0-6 years) 4828

6 Female Population (0-6 years) 4308

7 Total Population (0-6 years) 9136

8 Average Household Size 3.9

9 % of males to the total population 50.5

10 % of females to the total population 49.4

11 Sex Ratio (no of females per 1000 males) 977



Table 3.28

Distribution of population by social structure

S. No Particulars 0-10 km

1 Schedule caste 20245

2 % to the total population 22.46

3 Schedule Tribes 1062

4 % to the total population 1.18

5 Total SC and ST population 21307

6 % to total population 23.63

7 Total population 90158


3.12.5 Literacy Levels

The analysis of the literacy levels in the study area reveals that an average literacy rate of 59.13% as per

2011 census data. The distribution of literates and literacy rates in the study area is illustrated in Table

3.29.

However, the male literacy of the study area is 34.38%, whereas literacy rate among women, which is an

important indicator for social change, is estimated to be 24.76%.

Table 3.29

Distribution of literate and literacy rates


1 Male Population 45593

2 Female Population 44565


4 Male literates 30992

5 Female literates 22319

6 Total literates 53311

7 Male literacy rate (%) 34.38

8 Female literacy rate (%) 24.76

9 % of Male literates to the Male Population 67.98

10 % of Female literates to the Female Population 50.08

11 Total Literacy rate (%) 59.13


3.12.6 Occupational Structure

The occupational structure of project area is studied with reference three categories via., main workers,

marginal workers and non-workers. The main workers include 4 categories of workers defined by the

Census Department consisting of cultivators, agricultural laborers, those engaged in manufacturing,

processing and repairs in household industry; and others including those engaged in household industry,

construction, trade and commerce, transport and communication and all other services.



The marginal workers are those workers engaged in some work for a period of less than six months

during the reference year prior to the census survey. The non-workers include those engaged in unpaid

household duties, students, retired persons, dependents, beggars, vagrants etc.; institutional inmates or all

other non-workers who do not fall under the above categories.

As per 2011 census, there is a total of 40.53% main workers in the study area. The marginal workers and

non-workers constitute to 7.15% and 52.31% of the total population respectively. Therefore, non-workers

are predominant in the total distribution of workers by occupation. The occupational structure of the study

area is given in Table 3.30.

Table 3.30

Occupational structure



2 Total workers 42992

3 Work participation rate (%)

(Total Workers/Total population)*100 47.68

4 Main workers 36544

5 % of main workers to total population 40.53

6 Marginal workers 6448

7 % of marginal workers to total population 7.15

8 Non-workers 47166

9 % of non-workers to total population 52.31

10 Dependency Ratio 1.09


3.12.6.1 Dependency Ratio

Based on the occupational structure of the study area the dependency rate of non-workers on the workers

category has been estimated at 1.09. The study also noted that, majority of the educated youth are also

part of the non-working population as they don’t have any job opportunities in the area. The prevalence of

low industrialization and subsistence agriculture has affected the employability of local population,

therefore there is a need for income generation activities to strengthen the livelihoods of local population.

3.12.7 Infrastructure and accessibility; Primary Observations

The following graph illustrates the current Infrastructural details in project area villages which includes,

presence of educational institutions, working profile, housing typology and social composition.

Telangana Waste Management project (TWMP) at Nalgonda District (TS). 2016


Inferences/Insinuations

Demographic aspects

As it is illustrated in the above graph, the Sex ratio is observed as 977 women for 1000 men, and

population belongs to socially weaker sections amounts to 23.63.

Occupational Structure

Similarly, according to 2011 census, main workers constitute 40.53% of the total population whereas

marginal workers and non-workers constitute to 7.15% and 52.31% of the total population respectively.

To reiterate, distribution of workers by occupation indicates that the non-workers are the predominant

population.

Literacy profile

The male literacy rate is observed as 34.38 and female literacy rate is observed as 24.76 and hence the

total literacy has been recorded as 59.13.

Health care facilities and accessibility

The data collected from the field revealed that 70% of the population has access to Govt. hospitals, where

as 30% have access to Private hospitals.

Accessibility to Educational Institutions

It was observed, that 100% of villages are accessed with primary and secondary schools.

Water Resources

Major water sources in surveyed villages are tanks and bore

wells. However, drinking water provided through Krishna

River in the project area villages. However, the villagers have

stated that ground water is heavily contaminated by Fluoride,

due to which people are dependent on treated water for

drinking purposes.

Similarly, most of the villagers are been affected with fluorosis,

bone dysfunctional diseases are commonly observed in the

project area.

Housing Typology

The study noted that 70% of housing is Pucca and other 30% are Kutcha houses in the project area

villages

Iskilla village- Community Water tank



Communication facilities

Post offices: 80% of villages surveyed are accessed with postal services, while other 20% of villagers

have to access nearby town to get postal benefits.

Electricity: All villages are accessed with electricity supply for both phases.

Bank facilities: 90% of villages are not accessed with bank facilities.

Heritage/pilgrim interests:

Some of the villagers have old temples

Awareness about Government schemes and programmes

Most of the villages surveyed are benefitted by government schemes such as old age pension schemes,

widow pensions, MGNREGA (Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Gaurantee Act), housing

schemes, mobile health service-104 services, swatchh bharat mission etc. Swatchh bharat mission,

nevertheless has been implemented in the project villages not only as the National priority but also as a

drive for societal up-liftment. The SE study observed that Mission has been very successful in majority of

the villages, where in some villages have achieved 98% of private toilets in individual households and

100% free from Open Defecation. Alongside, the villagers are also aware of the developments so far as

the welfare schemes and programs the Government.

Other Observations

The study reveals that some of the villages have mobilized CSR support from private enterprises to avail

better civic facilities. Some villages got CSR funds from Multinational companies to purchase computers

in the schools and panchayat office and benches, community water tanks and Reverse Osmosis Treatment

plants etc.

The socio-Economic study revealed that the youth in the project area are devoid of employment

opportunities. They can be a potential source of workers with minimum handholding and vocational

education skills. The youth have expressed their willingness to setting up of industries in the area as it

provides them gainful employment opportunities.



The study also noted an active presence of Self-Help-Groups in the project area villages. Many of these

groups are acting as micro-finance entities, rotating small amount of loans among the group members.

CSR works would carry out in future

The proposed TSDF would take a pivotal role in developing health, education, skill development,

environmental management of the villages in the project area.

Suggestions for improvement of Socio-Economic Status

The socio-Economic status of the population in the project area shall be improved through CSR and

focused community development interventions. Some of the salient activities are illustrated below:



Need to develop Sustainable water sources through village level Overhead tanks for the

consumption of people and their livestock is the prime factor to be considered as the most of the

villagers are not vulnerable in getting proper drinking facilities.

Need to provide of drinking water through Reverse Osmosis Treatment plants as majority of

villages have higher levels of presence by Fluoride in the ground water. These RO plants can be

community owned and community may also collect minimum user charges from the villagers to

address maintenance of plant.

Periodical health checkup camps need to be conducted along with regularization of 104 mobile

health services which are currently meeting the health care needs of the villages.

Providing capacity building trainings and strengthening of SHG activities.

Distribution of vitamin and de worming tablets to Anganwadi and school going children,

distribution of iron tablets to women will bring a tremendous change in the health of women and

children.

Youth empowerment programs though awareness creation about various government schemes,

providing appropriate opportunities with relevance to their qualification and skills, conducting

skills inculcating programs etc.,

Enhancing women empowerment through conducting skill training programmes for rural women

in tailoring, manufacturing household items would enhance their income thereby create better

livelihood opportunities for the rural women. These products can be purchased or marketed by

company, which will provide additional employment opportunity of the rural women &

adolescent girls.

Veterinary camps and Para-Vet services to enhance the milk production of existing milk

producing households.

There has been a need for provision of agriculture extension services in the project area as some

villages have good sources of water through bore wells and agriculture Canals. Similarly,

Farmers’ Clubs can also be formed in these villages to enhance the awareness of farmers on best

practices to enhance farm productivity, efficient water usage and sustainable agriculture.

A number of CSR activities can be initiated in the project area villages on convergence mode

whilst partnering with exiting Government schemes and financial support from developmental

institutions like NABARD.



Table 3.31 Demographic details in the study area of 10 Km radius

Name No HH TOT_

P

TOT_

M

TOT_

F P_06 P_SC P_ST

P_

LIT

P_

ILL

TOT_

WORK

_P

Total_

CL_P

Total

AL_P

Total_O

T_P

NON_WO

RK_P

0-2 Km radius

Kakkireni 614 2473 1256 1217 259 388 1 1268 1205 1301 333 800 148 1172

2-5 Km radius

Palliwada 446 1947 982 965 265 862 4 972 975 902 124 540 238 1045

Iskilla 415 1584 801 783 167 449 0 812 772 824 154 520 147 760

Uthatoor 389 1390 704 686 147 466 7 794 596 763 187 333 233 627

Yennaram 490 2017 1046 971 196 399 110 1083 934 970 198 404 364 1047

Akkene Palle 1094 4454 2290 2164 408 929 0 2487 1967 2305 589 1249 421 2149

Chippala Palle 139 507 268 239 46 201 0 311 196 225 16 184 25 282

Thondalvai 764 3083 1592 1491 364 843 22 1712 1371 1604 351 980 239 1479

Thirumalagiri 107 460 231 229 59 252 0 242 218 228 21 144 61 232

Sub Total 3844 15442 7914 7528 1652 4401 143 8413 7029 7821 1640 4354 1728 7621

5-10 Km radius

Laxma Puram 442 1872 961 911 137 321 11 1019 853 1001 381 456 122 871

Janam Palle 464 2230 895 1335 180 309 29 1437 793 963 130 504 277 1267

Dubbaka 472 1839 903 936 165 470 31 984 855 900 228 422 249 939

Muni Panpula 606 2217 1104 1113 215 792 47 1280 937 1035 97 564 353 1182

Bachuppala 107 427 213 214 49 116 0 193 234 222 99 114 9 205

Suraram 267 1059 545 514 93 259 0 535 524 605 298 198 84 454

B.Thurka Palle 163 739 346 393 80 234 0 368 371 389 73 253 53 350

Kunkudu Pamula 201 783 389 394 75 176 0 420 363 395 99 173 123 388

Ammanabole 1445 5641 2860 2781 554 1495 64 3243 2398 2809 531 1529 701 2832

Nakkala Palle 330 1329 676 653 153 209 22 626 703 772 87 607 72 557

Sha Palle 364 1489 758 731 154 441 6 824 665 775 118 462 194 714

Sabbidiguda 101 417 210 207 37 65 0 219 198 232 44 170 18 185



Nemmani 612 2381 1166 1215 229 394 0 1455 926 1209 230 585 215 1172

Pothineni Palle 150 619 311 308 50 312 0 326 293 295 50 91 151 324

Madhayedavally 368 1399 722 677 130 206 1 860 539 732 116 377 146 667

Narketpalle 2603 10394 5375 5019 1201 1712 254 7007 3387 4308 372 1138 2655 6086

Akkenepalle Vari

Lingotam 518 2062 1058 1004 234 365 45 1228 834 1046 80 596 351 1016

Shivaneni Gudem 303 1234 628 606 130 321 15 684 550 560 104 179 264 674

Vanipakala 603 2264 1122 1142 241 557 16 1176 1088 1165 269 489 386 1099

Wattimarthy 504 1840 939 901 159 359 4 1133 707 862 174 208 459 978

Chityala (CT) 3399 13752 7052 6700 1388 2321 197 9597 4155 5499 255 1155 3802 8253

Duppelli 563 2041 1020 1021 177 419 9 1179 862 1125 280 704 112 916

Dattappaguda 580 2229 1120 1109 210 542 46 1200 1029 1092 191 653 242 1137

Podichedu 530 2096 1048 1048 249 599 8 1124 972 1041 226 680 127 1055

Parada 688 2567 1278 1289 257 394 88 1390 1177 1179 249 665 243 1388

Eduluru 1278 5263 2673 2590 518 1450 16 2954 2309 2673 292 1752 422 2590

Vemalkonda 514 2060 1051 1009 160 618 9 1169 891 986 134 467 311 1074

Sub Total 18175 72243 36423 35820 7225 15456 918 43630 28613 33870 5207 15191 12141 38373

Grand total 22633 90158 45593 44565 9136 20245 1062 53311 36847 42992 7180 20345 14017 47166

CHAPTER 4

ANTICIPATED

ENVIRONMENTAL

IMPACTS & MITIGATION

MEASURES



CHAPTER 4

ANTICIPATED IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES

4.1 Identification of Impacts

Any developmental activity in its wake will bring about some impacts associated with its origin, which

can be broadly classified as reversible, irreversible, long and short-term impacts. In this chapter, an

endeavor has been made to identify various environmental impacts associated with the operation of

facility and other activities wherein, there may be a chance of pollution. Based on the possible worst case

emissions and waste generation from the proposed project and also taking into consideration the baseline

environmental status at the proposed project site, the environmental factors that are likely to be affected

(Impacts) are identified, quantified and assessed. Both instrumental (positive) and detrimental (negative)

impacts are accounted for this purpose. The prediction of impacts helps in the preparation of a sound

environmental management plan which has to be executed during the on-going activities for the proposed

project to minimize the adverse impacts on the environmental quality.

A large number of adverse impacts occur from facility operations. These impacts can be fatal accidents

(e.g., scavengers buried under waste piles) infrastructure damage (e.g., damage to access roads by heavy

vehicles) pollution of the local environment (such as contamination of groundwater and/or aquifers by

leakage and residual soil contamination during landfill usage, as well as after landfill closure) off-gassing

of methane generated by decaying organic wastes (methane is a greenhouse gas many times more potent

than carbon dioxide, and can itself be a danger to inhabitants of an area); harboring of disease vectors

such as rats and flies, particularly from improperly operated landfills.

4.2 Methodology

The potential impacts on the environment from the proposed project are identified based on the nature of

the various activities associated not only with the project implementation and operation, but also on the

current status of the environmental quality at the project site.

4.3 Potential Impacts

The potential significant environmental impacts associated with the project are grouped as below.

Air Environment

Impacts on ambient air quality

Impacts on ambient odor

Impacts on ambient noise

Water Environment

Impacts on surface & ground water quality

Impacts on aquatic life

Land Environment

Impacts on land use

Impacts on soil fertility



Impacts on agriculture

Socio Economics

Impacts on infrastructure

Impacts on employment

Indirect Impacts

Impacts on public health and safety

Impacts on aesthetics

4.4 Prediction of Impacts

The impact assessment is carried out for the following phases and presented in the following paragraphs.

Impacts during development phase

Impacts during operation phase

4.4.1 Impacts during Development Phase

Construction phase works include site clearance, site formation, building works, infrastructure provision

and any other infrastructure activities. The impacts due to construction activities are short term and are

limited to the construction phase. The impacts will be mainly on air quality, water quality, soil quality and

socio-economics.

4.4.2 Impact on Air Quality

The principal potential source of air quality impact arising from the construction of the proposed project

is fugitive dust generation. The dust, measurable as Suspended Particulate Matter and Respirable

Suspended Particulates would be generated as a result of construction activities. The construction

program of the projects shall commence immediately after obtaining statutory clearances.

The potential dust sources associated with construction activities are loading and unloading of the

materials, top soil removal, travel over unpaved roads and wind erosion etc. The construction works

associated with the proposed development are broadly given below.

1. Site development and foundation works

2. Dust generation due to vehicles bringing raw materials

3. Un loading of raw materials, removal of un wanted waste material from site

4. Civil constructions and provision of infrastructure required for various activities proposed

Among all the construction activities, site formation has the highest potential for causing dust nuisance to

the nearby air sensitive locations. During the construction of the project, existing houses nearby may be

subject to the potential dust impacts.

Exhaust emissions from vehicles and equipment deployed during the construction phase is also likely to

result in marginal increase in the levels of SO2, NOX, PM, CO and un-burnt hydrocarbons. The impact of

such activities would be temporary and restricted to the construction phase. The impact is generally

confined to the project area and is expected to be negligible outside the plant boundaries.



4.4.2.1 Mitigation Measures Proposed – Air Quality

For the proposed project site levelling and grading will be carried out, where ever possible to maintain the

natural elevations they will not be disturbed, only levelling activity will be carried out for providing

roads, sewage network, storm water system, and places required for providing buildings for

administrative and plant shed erection. According to the engineering assessment; most of the excavated

material shall be reused within the project boundary. The movement of cut and fill material will be

limited.

Most of the construction dust will be generated from the movement of construction vehicles on unpaved

roads. Unloading and removal of soil material shall also act as a potential source for dust nuisance. The

control measures proposed to be taken up are given below.

1. The important dust suppression measures proposed will be regular water sprinkling on main haul




2. The duration of stockpiling will be as short as possible as most of the material will be used as

backfill material for the open cut trenches for road development.

3. Temporary tin sheets of sufficient height (3m) will be erected around the site of dust generation

or all around the project site as barrier for dust control.

4. Tree plantations around the project boundary will be initiated at the early stages by

5. Plantation of 2 to 3 years old saplings, regular watering will be done, so that the area will be

moist for most part of the day.

6. To reduce the dust movement from civil construction site to the neighborhood the external part of


Given the implementation of proper control measures for dust suppression, no adverse impacts are

expected and compliance with the Ambient Air Quality is achieved at ASR’s (Air Pollution Sensitive

Receivers) at all time.

4.4.3 Impact on Water Quality

The proposed project will involve various construction activities. The following section summarizes the

activities likely to be undertaken during the proposed development and describes the potential impacts on

water quality from each activity.

i) Site formation

Preparation of designated area of land for subsequent development activities involves levelling of the

ground surface, removal of vegetation, stockpiling and generation of construction waste. Construction of

temporary infrastructure such as drainage culverts may be required. The site formation may produce large

quantities of run-off with high suspended solids loading in the absence of appropriate mitigation

measures. This potential problem may be aggravated during rainy season.

ii) Construction of Buildings

In rainy season during the construction phase due to construction of various civil structures site runoff

results significant pollution in the receiving water bodies and washing of various construction equipments

will also result in water pollution.



iii) Site workshop

The used engine oil and lubricants, and their storage as waste materials as the potential to create impacts

if spillage occurs. Waste oil may infiltrate into the surface soil layers, or runoff into local Water courses,

increasing hydrocarbon levels. Proper precautionary measures should be taken to prevent any spillage of

the above materials and their subsequent runoff into the water bodies.

iv) Presence of workers

During construction, impacts from the workers include waste and wastewater generated from eating areas,

and sewage from temporary sanitary facilities. Sewage is characterized by high levels of BOD, ammonia

and E.Coli. Significant water quality impact will happen only if the sewage is discharged directly into the

receiving waters without any prior treatment.

4.4.3.1 Mitigation Measures – Water Quality

During site development necessary precautions will be taken, so that the runoff water from the site gets

collected to working pit and if any over flow is, will be diverted to nearby greenbelt/ plantation area.

During construction activity all the equipments washed water will be diverted to working pit to arrest the

suspended solids if any and the settled water will be reused for construction purposes, and for sprinkling

on roads to control the dust emission, etc. The domestic sewage generated will be treated in portable STP

or sent to septic tank/soak pit.

4.4.4 Impact of Noise Levels

The major activities, which produce periodic noise, during construction phase, are as follows:

Foundation works

Fabrication of structures

Plant erection

Operation of construction equipment

Movement of vehicles etc

4.4.4.1 Mitigation Measures

All noise generating equipment will be used during day time for brief period of its requirement. Proper

enclosures will be used for reduction in noise levels, where ever possible the noise generating equipment

will be kept away from the human habituation. Therefore, impact on noise environment due to proposed

project would be insignificant. All vehicles entering into the project will be informed to maintain speed

limits, and not blow horns unless it is required.

4.4.5 Impact Due to Solid Waste Generation

This category of waste generation in the proposed project is due to different types of raw materials being

used during construction stage in general may comprise the following

Cement concrete

Bricks, tiles,

Cement plaster

Steel (RCC, door/ window frames, roofing support, railings of staircase etc)

Rubble, sand, Stone (Marble, granite, sand stone)



Timber/wood

Paints/varnishes

Besides above there are some major and minor components namely conduits, pipes, electrical fixtures,

panels, etc. all the above items will be segregated and stored at the site and once the facility established

will be process the same in respective treatment facilities within the site.

4.4.5.1 Mitigation Measures for Solid Waste

The solid waste generated during this period being predominantly inert in nature. Hence maximum effort

would be made to reuse and recycle them. The most of the solid waste material can be used for filing/

levelling of low-laying areas within the site. All attempts should be made to stick to the following

measures.

1. All construction waste shall be stored within the site itself. A proper screen will be provided so

that the waste does not get scattered.

2. Attempts will be made to keep the waste segregated into different heaps as far as possible so that

their further gradation and reuse is facilitated.

3. Materials, which can be reused for purpose of construction, levelling, making roads/ pavement

will also be kept in separate heaps from those which are to be sold or land filled.

4. The local body or a private company may be arranged to provide appropriate number of skip

containers/ trolleys on hire.

The use of the construction material basically depends on their separation and conditions of the separated

material. A majority of these materials are durable and therefore, have a high potential for reuse. It would,

however, be desirable to have quality standards for the recycled materials. Construction waste can be used

in the following manner.

1. Reuse of bricks, tiles, stone slabs, timber, piping railings etc to the extent possible and depending

upon their conditions.

2. Sale/ auction of materials which cannot be used at the site due to design constraint

3. Plastics, broken glass, scrap metal etc will be stored and processed within the site premises.

4. Rubble/ brick bats can be used for building activity, such as levelling, under coat of lanes where

the traffic does not constitute heavy moving loads.

5. Larger unusable pieces can be sent for filing up low laying areas.

6. Fine material such as sand, dust, etc can be used as cover material

7. The unearthed soil can be used for levelling as well as for lawn development

8. The broken pieces of the flooring material can be used for levelling in the building or can be

disposed off

9. The unused or remaining paints/varnishes/wood can either be reused or can be disposed off.

4.4.6 Impact on Land Use

Due to the development of Integrated Common Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, Disposal and

Recycling Facilities providing necessary air pollution control measures, wastewater treatment and

disposal measures, noise pollution control measures, etc, the impacts on the land use will be envisaged as

sufficient greenbelt will be provided around the boundary to enhance the aesthetics of the project area.



4.4.7 Demographic and Socio Economic

The impact of the proposed unit on demography and socio economic conditions of the study area would

be as follows.

1. Additional strain on civic amenities like road, transport, communication, drinking water,

sanitation & other facilities to meet the work force requirement

2. Increase in demand for services like hotels, lodges, public transport etc.

3. Employment opportunities for construction labourers, skilled and unskilled workers etc.,

4. Economic up liftment of the area.

5. Increase in Labour rates.

6. More work to the civil construction and transportation companies

4.5 Impact during Operation

During the operation phase of the proposed project there would be impacts on the air environment, water

environment, Land environment and socio-economic aspects.

4.5.1 Prediction of Impacts on the Air Environment

Prediction of impacts from the proposed project on the ambient air quality was carried out using air

quality simulation models. The main sources of air pollution are as follows.

1. Area source emissions from Landfill operations

2. Line source emissions from Vehicular movement



4.5.2 Atmospheric Dispersion of Stack Emissions

In order to estimate the ground level concentrations due to the emissions from the proposed project, EPA

approved American Meteorological Society/Environmental Protection Agency Regulatory Model -

AERMOD 7.0.3 dispersion Model has been used. AERMOD dispersion Model provides option to model

emissions from a wide range of sources that are present at a typical industrial source complex. The model

considers the sources and receptors in undulated terrain as well as plain terrain and the combination of

both. The basis of the model is the straight line steady state Gaussian Plume Equation, with modifications

to model simple point source emissions from stacks, emissions from stack that experience the effect of

aerodynamic down wash due to nearby buildings, isolated vents, multiple vents, storage piles etc.

AERMOD dispersion model with the following options has been used to predict the cumulative ground

level concentrations due to the proposed emissions. Area being rural, rural dispersion parameters is

considered

Predictions have been carried out to estimate concentration values over radial distance of 10 km

around the sources

A combination of Cartesian and Polar receptor network has been considered

Emission rates from the sources were considered as constant during the entire period

The ground level concentrations computed were as is basis without any consideration of decay

coefficient

Calm winds recorded during the study period were also taken into consideration



24-hour mean meteorological data extracted from the meteorological data collected during the

study period as per guidelines of IMD/CPCB has been used to compute the mean ground level

concentrations to study the impact on study area.

4.5.3 Pollution Sources

4.5.3.1 Area Sources

Daily waste will be discharged by tipping at the working area on a landfill, within the area demarcated for

the cell. Daily/Weekly cover (optional) is primarily used for prevention windblown dust, litter and

odours, deterrence to scavengers, birds, reduction of infiltration (during unseasonal rain) and in improving

the sites visual appearance. Soil used as daily / weekly cover shall give a pleasing uniform appearance

from the site boundary. To achieve this thickness of about 150mm is usually adequate and shall be

adopted.

4.5.3.2 Point Sources

The point source emissions considered for the proposed project are Incinerator and DG set. The DG set

will be used only during power failure for emergency requirements. Hence the impacts from the DG set

will be felt only during power failure in absence of Power plant. The inputs used to run the model are

stack details, emissions details are given in Table 4.1 and twenty four hours mean meteorological data is

given in Table 4.2

The Predicted maximum Ground level concentration of 24 Hour average PM, SO2 and NOx

concentrations considering 24 hour mean meteorological data of study season are superimposed on the

maximum baseline concentrations obtained during the study period to estimate the post project scenario,

which would prevail at the post operational phase. The overall scenario with predicted concentrations

over the maximum baseline concentrations is shown in the following Table 4.3 and isopleths are shown

in the Figure 4.1 to 4.3.

Table 4.1

Stack Emissions Details

Details Incinerator DG Set

Capacity 55 TPD 500 KVA

Type of fuel Haz wastes Diesel

Height of the stack (m) 30 8

Temp of flue gas (°C) 160 530

Internal Dia. of the stack (m) 0.6 0.25

Velocity of flue gas (m/s) 22 12

Flue gas Flow rate (m3/s) 6.22 0.6

PM Emissions (g/s) 2.4 --

SO2 Emissions (g/s) 9.5 0.02

NOx Emissions (g/s) 13.7 0.124



Table 4.2

24 Hours Mean Meteorological Data for Winter Season

Year Month Day Hour Stability

Class

Temperature

°C

Relative

Humidity

%

Wind

Direction

Degree

Wind

Speed

m/s

2016 1 5 1 6 20 64 135 2.47

2016 1 5 2 6 19 68 110 2.33

2016 1 5 3 6 19 73 135 2.28

2016 1 5 4 6 17 82 135 2.37

2016 1 5 5 6 17 82 135 2.27

2016 1 5 6 5 17 88 90 1.46

2016 1 5 7 5 18 83 135 2.34

2016 1 5 8 4 19 83 135 2.43

2016 1 5 9 4 23 65 45 2.84

2016 1 5 10 3 25 59 135 2.66

2016 1 5 11 2 26 52 135 2.91

2016 1 5 12 1 27 49 90 3.03

2016 1 5 13 1 28 36 135 3.21

2016 1 5 14 1 28 35 110 2.72

2016 1 5 15 2 27 34 135 2.61

2016 1 5 16 3 28 32 45 2.24

2016 1 5 17 4 28 28 135 2.37

2016 1 5 18 5 25 39 135 2.58

2016 1 5 19 6 23 47 45 2.23

2016 1 5 20 6 22 46 135 2.77

2016 1 5 21 6 21 56 90 2,21

2016 1 5 22 6 21 56 45 2.35

2016 1 5 23 6 20 60 135 2,34

2016 1 5 24 6 20 64 135 2.33

Table 4.3

Post Project Scenario – Units: μg/m3

Particulars Particulate Matter

(PM)

Sulphur dioxide (SO2) Oxides of Nitrogen

(NOx)

Baseline Scenario (Max) 56.3 16.3 20.8

Predicted GLC (Max) 3.4 9.5 14.1

Overall Scenario (Worst Case) 59.7 25.8 34.9

NAAQ Standards 2009 100 80 80



Figure 4.1

Predicted 24- Hourly Average GLCs of PM (μg/m3) at 10 km Radius



Figure 4.2

Predicted 24- Hourly Average GLCs of SO2 (μg/m3) at 10 km Radius



Figure 4.3

Predicted 24- Hourly Average GLCs of NOx (μg/m3) at 10 km Radius



4.5.4 Air Pollution Mitigation Measures

4.5.4.1 DG Set

DG set will be used only in case of power failure. The DG set will be provided with acoustic erective and

adequate height of stack meeting MOEF/CPCB guidelines. So impact due to D. G. Set will be temporary

& for short time.

4.5.4.2 Incinerator

Incinerator will be provided with a stack height meeting MOEF Guidelines (minimum 30m), Spray dryer,

Multi cyclone, Bag house, Wet scrubber.

The gases are passed through multi-cyclone for removal of particulates. Dry lime and activated carbon are

injected for neutralization of acidic gases (HCl, HF, SO2) and removal of organic constituents. Flue gases

are passed through bag filters for complete removal of particulates and then to wet alkaline scrubber for

neutralization

Dioxins: To prevent reformation of dioxins by rapidly lowering the flue gas temperatures, particularly

from 500 °C to less than 200 °C by adopting rapid quench / catalyst / adsorption by activated carbon etc.

Mercury: If the feeding waste contains mercury and its compounds, activated carbon treatment for

control of these emissions is given. (Ex. activated carbon, conversion into mercuric chloride and then to

mercuric sulphide etc.)

Mist: Often there is a need to eliminate the mist in the stack emissions, therefore, where necessary de

mister may be provided.

4.5.4.3 Secured Landfill

During operation part of the Secured land fill, to minimize the odor and gases generation, daily it will be

covered with soil/ash and during rainy period with temporary cover (HDPE/Plastic sheets).

4.6 Impact on Water Quality

The water demand of the project will be met through groundwater or Grampanchayat Supply. To

minimize the water consumption; water saving options will be planned.

Improve energy efficiency of operations

Installation of flow restrictors on water supply line

Dry sweeping of all areas before mopping/washing

Eliminate leaks of the pipelines

Storm water harvesting

Rain water holding tanks

Recycling of water etc

The details of the wastewater generation from various activities are given in Table 4.4.



Table 4.4

Wastewater Generation Details

S. No Utility Phase-I Phase-II Phase-III Total Remarks

Cum/day Cum/day Cum/day Cum/day

1 Domestic 4 2.5 2.5 8 Septic tank/soak pit or portable

STP

2 Floor Washings 2 1 1 4 Settling/Recycling

3 Recycling 10 10 Settling/Recycling Land filling

of settled sludge

4 Landfill operations

(leachate)

10 10 Incineration/ Forced Evaporation

/ spraying on landfill

5 Bio medical waste 4 4 Treatment/Recycling to

Incinerator

6

Boiler - - 20 20 Ash quenching/green belt

Cooling Tower - - 30 30

Total 30 3.5 52.5 86

4.6.1 Leachate Collection/ Treatment and Disposal

Leachate collection and removal is provided above the geo-membrane in two layers viz. the primary and

the secondary liner. The primary liner serves as leachate collection and removal system, while the

secondary liner serves as leak detection system and a signal of potential liabilities in terms of

environmental pollution.

Leachate is collected by a network of lateral and header pipes embedded in a drainage layer, all of which

eventually drain into a leachate collection sump. The collected leachate is transferred to a leachate

treatment system. Leachate, thus collected is transferred to the forced evaporation system and the residue

after decanting is subjected back to the land-filling process.

The leachate collection system in an engineered landfill takes the form of an under-drain beneath the

waste material. It is required to ensure there is no more than a limited head of pressure above the base

liner to cause leakage of liquid from the base of the landfill. The design maximum pressure head in the

landfill is limited to 300mm.

Drainage is affected by a layer of about 300mm thick graded sand / gravel having high permeability.

Within this layer a network of HDPE pipes are placed to collect leachate and conduct it quickly to the

collection sump for removal from landfill. The pipes are typically perforated only over the upper half to

allow the leachate to enter the pipe and thereafter to be contained within the pipe network system. The

layout of the pipe network generally includes sufficient redundancy to ensure that if a blockage occurs

somewhere in the network the leachate simply backs-up a little then flows into the system a little further

up-gradient. Two layers of the leachate collection system are provided one over the other. Slotting area of



the pipe is done only on the top 120o portion of the pipe and to an extent of 100 Sq. cm per running meter

of the pipe.

The pipe must have sufficient strength to withstand the load imposed by the overlying waste and the earth

moving activities associated with the placement and the compaction of the waste (Min 6 Kg/ Sq.cm). The

main pipe (headers) feeding leachate to the sump has the capability to be cleaned out in case of clogging.

However, the design must include sufficient redundancy of pipe work to ensure alternative drainage paths

are available in the event of localized clogging of any part of the system.

4.6.2 Water Impacts Mitigation Measures


leachate generated at treatment, incineration are treated together (excluding domestic wastewater) in

incineration/ Forced evaporation/spraying on landfill. The domestic effluent generated will be treated in

septic tank followed by soak pit or portable STP and the treated water is used for greenbelt development.

The effluent generated from floor washings, recycling activity, etc will be collected in collection tank

followed by settling tank and the settled water is reused. The effluent from bio medical waste is treated in

ETP and recycling to incinerator or circulation back to system. The waste water generated from boiler and

cooling tower used in ash quenching and for greenbelt development purpose. There will not be any

wastewater discharge to any nearby water body and adopts the zero wastewater discharge concept.

4.7 Rain Water Harvesting and Strom Water Management




etc.).









4.8 Noise Environment

The Major source of noise in proposed project will be from unloading of Hazardous waste, Bio- Medical

Waste and E-Waste, Boiler/power plant, Incinerator, DG set, Stabilization of Hazardous waste, etc.

4.8.1 Noise Mitigation Measures









generating sources.



4.9 Prediction of Impacts on Land Environment

Environmental Impacts on land environment have been classified primarily into two broad aspects, i.e.

direct impacts on the soil and land in the area and impacts on the flora and fauna of the area. Land

environment in the area has potential for contamination arising out of solid waste stored on to the landfill

area. The leachate generated from the land fill area is collected in the leachate holding tank and the

leachate is used back on to the landfill for dust suppression, mixing in stabilization process, etc. If any

excess leachate is left over, it will be treated in solar evaporation pond or spray dryer. As a result of this

there is no contamination of the soil due to the wastewater generated and hence the impacts due to the

proposed facility on the land environment are negligible.

To address the impacts on flora and fauna, it has been observed that there are no endangered species in

the project area and green belt will be developed along the boundary and adjacent to roads. Under CSR

activities adjacent open lands, parks, etc will be improved by plantation.

4.10 Predicted Impacts of the Landfill

The project has proposed secured scientific landfill which comprises Govt. of India Regulations and

Hazardous Wastes (Management & Handling) Rules 1989 and its subsequent amendments in 2000, 2003,

2008 and 2009 as the Hazardous Wastes (Management, Handling and Transboundary Movement) Rules

with containment measures,

Composite bottom liner to prevent Leachate percolation

Landfill gas management system

Rodent controlled

Dust control etc

There shall be no loss of carbon sequestration on account of the proposed activity since the area is almost

barren. Development of a thick greenbelt all long the boundary of the site will more than compensate for

the loss. As there are no rare or endangered or endemic or threatened (REET) species, the proposed

project will not pose any problem to any REET species. Hence, the impact of the project on biota is

negligible.

4.11 Impacts on the Community

Public Safety: A number of activities those are likely to be carried out in the facility that has significant

adverse impacts on the public safety. With the implementation of a strong environmental management

plan, the communities residing near the project site are unlikely to be exposed to any long-term hazards.

Aesthetics: The project site is located away from the settlements and proposed greenbelt around the site,

as a part of the environmental management plan will help in improving the aesthetics of the environment.



4.12 Impact on Ecology

There is no ecological and otherwise sensitive areas viz. wildlife sanctuary, national parks, archeological

important areas within 10 km radius of the project site. There are no known rare, endangered or

ecologically significant animal and plant species. Except for a few wild species of plants and grasses and

a few animals that are very commonly spotted in any rural environment, the study area does not have any

endangered or endemic species of animals. Due to the development of green belt at the project vicinity the

impact on the ecology will be minimal.

4.13 Impact on Socio Economics

The proposed facility is likely to provide direct and indirect employment and likely to increase the socio-

economic status of the nearby villages in the study area. Due to proposed project the facilities for public

transport, water supply telecommunications, education, public wealth etc., are likely to improve.

4.14 Odour Management

The goal for effective odour management is to eliminate objectionable odours by reducing the frequency,

intensity, duration, and offensiveness of odours that people might experience. The following describes

some of the specific odour causing compounds and conditions that can arise from solid waste handling:

Waste Transportation

Odours from waste transportation can vary greatly depending on the type of waste and the method of

transport. These odours are normally transient in nature and rarely the source of ongoing odour impacts.

Typical odour causing compounds from waste transportation include volatile organic acids which can be

prevented by containing the wastes as CPCB guidelines.

Storage Facility

The primary objective of storage is to temporarily store the waste before sending it to landfill depending

upon their characteristics. Some biological activity will occur in these storages, and the gases generated

can be a source of odours. The potential for waste odours to be carried away by air movement will

increase if the waste is left uncovered. It is important that putrescible waste be kept relatively cool in an

enclosed container and be removed and disposed quickly. It is also important that the container be

adequately cleaned after that waste is removed so that putrescible residues do not remain to decompose

further and generate odour.

Landfill facility

The most common odour-causing compounds at landfill cell are hydrogen sulphide, sulphur dioxide,

ammonia etc., these odour causing compounds are produced through the decomposition of wastes. In

addition, methane can be generated by waste decomposition. These problems can be addressed by control

of transportation; appropriate waste storage and containment; minimization of the area and time that the

active portion of the landfill remains exposed to the environment; and generally careful operation and

maintenance of the landfill facility



4.14.1 Odour Control Measures

Storage Facility

The proposed facility will receive and store the waste in an enclosed area. While handling odourous

wastes, care shall be taken to avoid smell nuisance.

Landfill Cell

For landfill cell following methods can be used to control odour:

Excluding Development Close to the Site.

Green belt development to form a surface capable of sorbing and forming sinks for odorous

gases. Leaves with their vast area in a tree crown, sorbs pollutants on their surface, thus

effectively reduce their concentrations in the ambient air and source emissions.

Ensuring that the operation is carried out under the best management practices

Storing putrescible waste in order to minimize its decomposition and control release and dispersal

of its odourants

Cleaning and removing spilled debris from storage and transport containers

Minimization of the area and time that the active portion of the landfill remains exposed to the

environment

Herbal spray on hazardous waste after disposing it in the landfill cell

CHAPTER 5 ANALYSIS OF

ALTERNATIVES (Technology & Site)



CHAPTER 5

ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES TECHNOLOGY & SITE

5.1 Introduction

The proposed facility has four principal waste disposals / recycling or recovery facilities such as

Hazardous Waste TSDF, e-Waste Recycling Facility, Bio-medical waste disposal Facility, Alternative

Fuel Recovery & Recycling Facilities. In addition to the above, there shall be temporary and long term

storages for interim storage and for intractable/ in-compatible wastes respectively. The proposed site

will be guided under the rules provided by hazardous waste management rules act 1989 and its

subsequent amendments.

5.1.1 Site Selection

Environmentally sound management of hazardous wastes would require common hazardous waste

management facilities for industrial clusters spread all over the country, as it is not possible to have

hazardous waste management facility for each unit. Hence common facilities become more necessary

in the wake of large number of small, medium industries in our country, which either have no funds or

space for development of hazardous waste management facility. For establishing a common facility for

treatment, storage, disposal and recycling facilities of hazardous waste CPCB has issued guidelines for

site selection criteria (HAZWAMS/25/2002-2003), under this criteria the following areas have to

excluded or rejected (knock out Criteria).

Areas with unstable geological features like unstable or weak soils; organic soil, soft clay or

clay-sand mixtures, soils that lose strength with compaction or with wetting, clays with a shrink-

swell character, sand subjected to subsidence and hydraulic influence.

Subsidence: e.g. owing to subsurface mines, water, and oil or gas withdrawal or solution prone

subsurface.

Wet lands.

Historical migration zones.

Flood prone areas

Area with 500 m from water supply zone and within 200 m from property line

Natural depression and valleys where water contamination is likely

Areas of ground water recharge and extremely high water table zone

Unique habitation areas, close to national parks with scenic beauty and formerly used landfills

Areas with high population, unique archaeological, historical, paleontogical and religious

interests,

Agricultural and forests lands and existing dump sites

Atmospheric conditions that would prevent safe disposal of an accidental release

Major natural hazards, e.g. volcanic activity, seismic disturbance, etc

Sensitive locations, e.g. storing flammable or explosive materials, airports

An unfavorable local hydro-geological situation, e.g. springs or drinking water well within very



close proximity to the chosen area

Extremely bad access i.e. no existing access roads to the selected site which may involve long

distance more than 5 km from main roads

Great differences in altitude between the area of waste collection and the selected site

5.1.2 Compliance of the Site with Site Selection Criteria

Three sites were identified for establishing the proposed project using above mentioned knock out

criteria and among the three selected sites, the site 2 is selected as it is meeting the siting criteria and

does not have any R & R issues and sufficient land is also available. The details of the three sites with

respect to siting guidelines are given in Table 5.1, and siting criteria for alternate sites are given in

Table 5.2.

Detail investigations were evaluated for site 2 as per site evaluation criteria given in

(HAZWAMS/25/2002-2003) and presented in Table 5.3. The site 2 has got weightage of 74 on a scale

of 100 and it is falling in between good and ideal class based on various site specific studies such as;

Site specific information: proximity to the waste source, slope of site, topography,

accessibility, meteorology, etc

Hydro geology /geology, ground water table fluctuation, ground water directions, ground water

quality, depth of hard rock, soil type, geo technical features, etc.

Socio-economic features, land use, demography, transportation impact etc.



Table 5.1

Rejection or Knock-Out Criteria

Identification Location

S. No Criteria Site 1

Urumadla Village, Chityala

Mandal, Nalgonda District,

Telangana

Site 2

Kakkireni Village, Ramannapeta

Mandal, Nalgonda District, Telangana

Site 3

Mandara Village, Ramannapeta


Telangana

Answer

Y / N

Answer

Y / N

Answer

Y / N

1 Existing or planned drinking water

protection and catchment areas

Y

Agricultural Bore well is

present in study area

N

N

Seasonal stream passing from center

of the site

2 High flood prone areas N N N

3 Areas with unstable ground N N N

4 Closer than 200 meters to populated

areas

N

Urmadla village is located 1.5

km NW from site boundary

N

Pilligudem village is 1.5 Km W from site

and Kakkireni Village is located 2 km N

from site boundary

N

Mandara Village is located 2.2 Km S

from site boundary

5 Closer than 200 meters to river

boundaries

N N N

6 Close to National Parks, Monuments,

Forests with large No. of flora and

faunda, historical, religious and other

important cultural places 500 m

N N Y

Sri Pathabi Ramalyam is located 300

m SW from site boundary

7 Existing use of site

(Agricultural/Forest/Old dump site)

Agricultural Land Agricultural Land /Barren Land Agricultural Land

REMARKS



Site is suitable for detailed EIA study (Y/N) Site is rejected Because its

primary Agricultural Land &

Agricultural bore well-

presented within site boundary

Y Site is rejected because of Seasonal

stream is passing through site center

& Sri Pathabi Ramalyam Temple is

located 300 m SW from site

boundary.

Table 5.2

Siting Criteria for Alternate Sites

S. No Parameter Criteria Site 1

Urmadla Village, Chityala


Telangana

Site 2

Kakkireni Village,

Ramannapeta Mandal,

Nalgonda District,

Telangana

Site 3

Mandara Village,

Ramannapeta Mandal,

Nalgonda District,

Telangana

1. Lake or pond

(Distance from Surface

Water body)

Should not be within 200 m There are no lake or pond within

200m of boundary

There are no lake or pond

within 200m of boundary

There are no lake or pond

within 200m of boundary

2. River

Should not be within 100 m There is no river within 100 m

from the site

There is no river within 100

m from the site

There is no river within

100 m from the site

3. Flood plain Should not be within 100

year flood plain

Not in the flood plain Area Not in the flood plain Area Not in the flood plain Area

4. High way – State or

National

Should not be within 500 m National Highway -9,

Hyderabad to Vijayawada

Highway is located 7 Km N

from site boundary

National Highway -9,


Highway is located 9Km S

from site boundary

National Highway -9,


Highway is located 7 Km

S from site boundary

5. Habitation – Notified

habituated area

Should not be within 500 m Urmadla village is located 1.5

km NW from site boundary

Pilligudem village is 1.5 Km

W from site and Kakkireni

Village is located 2 km N

from site boundary

Mandara Village is located

2.2 Km S from site

boundary

6. Public Parks Should not be within 500 m There are no public parks within

500m

There are no public parks

within 500m

There are no public parks

within 500m

7. Critical habitat area –

area in which one or

more endangered

Not suitable N N N



species live

8. Reserved Forest area Not suitable N

Y

N

9. Wet lands Not suitable N N N

10. Air Port Should not be within zone

around the airport(s)

N

N N

11. Water supply No Water supply well within

500 m

Agricultural Bores presented

with in site boundary.

N N

12. Coastal Regulation

Area

Not suitable Not Applicable does not fall

under CRZ.

Not Applicable does not fall

under CRZ

Not Applicable does not

fall under CRZ

13. Ground Water Table

level

GW table should be >2m

from the base of the landfill

Water level , BGL is more than

5 m

Water level , BGL is more

than 5 m

Water level , BGL is more

than 5 m

14. Presence of monuments

/ religious structures

Not suitable None in study area. None in study area Sri Pathabi Ramalyam

Temple is located 300 m

SW from site boundary



Table 5.3

Site Evaluation – Selected Site - (HAZWAMS/25/2002-2003)

S.

no Criteria

Relative values

Weightage Overall

Ranking 5 4 3 2 1

100% 80% 60% 40% 20%

units Excellent Ideal Good Poor Bad C

1

General

Information

(25% weightage)

Transportation Economy km 0 to 5 5 to 10 10 to 20 20 to 40 >40 4 3

Slope (First Scale) % 1.5 1.5 to 1.2 1.2 to 0.75 0.75 to 0.5 < 0.5 3 2.4

Slope (Second scale) % 1.5 1.5 to 2.5 2.5 to 7.0 7.0 to 15 >15

Topography Shape Convex

Concave 4 3.2

Flood Proness

5 5

Optimum wind direction

(downstream village) km >1 1 to 0.5 0.5 to 0.2 0.2 to 0.1 < 0.1 4 4

Infrastructure

(Accessibility) NH SH Local road

No road 3 1.8

Infrastructure (Power

supply) 2 1.6

A

25 21

2

Hydrology

(12.5%

weightage)

Distance from surface

water body / drinking

water

km > 5 5 to 3 3 to 2 2 to 1 <1 6 3.6

Annual rainfall cm/year <25 25 to 80 80 to 150 150 to 250 >250 6.5 5.2

B

12.5 8.8

3

Hydrogeology

(12.5%

weightage)

Groundwater depth Post

Monsoon m >15 15 to 10 10 to 5 5 to 1 <1 3.125 1.875

Groundwater flow

direction (distance to D/S

village)

km > 5 5 to 3 3 to 1 1 to 0.5 <0.5 3.125 2.5



Groundwater quality

bad

good 3.125 1.25

Groundwater gradient m/km <5 5 to 10 10 to 20 20 to 50 >50 3.125 1.875

C

12.5 7.5

4 Geology (12.5%

weightage)

Subsidence

Settled soil

Filled up

soil 4.5 4.5

Depth of bedrock m >15 15 to 10 10 to 5 5 to 1 <1 4 3.2

Seismic conditions Intensity V VI VII VIII IX 4 4

D

12.5 11.7

5

Geotechnical

(12.5%

weightage)

Permeability (1x10-6

cm/s) <0.1 0.1 to 1 1 to 10 10 to 100 >100 6.25 3.75

Engineering property

(MA, Pl, Sheer) 6.25 5.00

E

12.5 8.75

6

Socio Economic

/Ecological (25%

weightage)

Demography km >5 5 to 2.5 2.5 to 1.0 1.0 to 0.2 <0.2 6.25 3.75

Land use Pattern

Waste land /

saline

Grazing /

fallow

Single crop

/ non

irrigated

Double crop /

irrigated Plantation 6.25 6.25

Transportation impacts

passing

populated

areas

6.25 5.0

Special ecological

features 6.25 1.25

F

25 16.25

EXCELLENT:100, IDEAL:80, GOOD:60, POOR:40, BAD:20

Total 74.00



5.2 Technological Aspects

Hazardous wastes, Bio-Medical Waste, E Waste, etc., have become an important environmental and

public health issue which concerns many countries in the world. In the modern framework of hazardous

waste management, a four pronged strategy has been adopted

1. Minimizing the quantity of waste

2. Recycling of waste

3. Treatment of the waste

4. Collection, transport and disposal of waste in an environmentally sound manner

All four of these approaches are important and are not exclusive of each other. When dealing with a

given hazardous waste problem, often there is a need to utilize a combination of the four general

approaches outlined above

5.2.1 Waste Minimization

The first priority in hazardous waste management is to reduce the quantity of waste to minimum. Three

major waste reduction schemes which are often used are summarized as below:

i) Process Modification

Often the industrial process can be altered in such a way that the use of raw materials is optimized and

the amount of-hazardous waste is reduced to barest minimum. For example, in zinc electroplating, the

sulphate salt is substituted by the chloride compound with slight modification of the process; this can

eliminate the cyanide problem.

ii) Waste Concentration

The waste can be concentrated using evaporation, precipitation or decantation techniques which mean

that the volume of waste can be considerably reduced using these methods. Incineration, viz., oxidation

of inflammable-waste is often practiced in order to reduce the volume of waste to be handled. It is an

excellent method of waste disposal, but the cost of operation usually exceeds the net gains.

iii) Waste Segregation

Segregating the hazardous waste streams from non-hazardous streams decreases the volume of

hazardous wastes, thus, making it easier to treat



5.2.2 Recycling Wastes

Many substances in refuse wastes have value. They include glass, wood fiber from paper products, and

metal. Scientists have developed ways of recycling many wastes so they can be used again. Almost all

materials are recyclable. However, in some more energy will be expended in recovery than the

recovered value warrants. The two broad ways of processing hazardous waste are waste reuse and waste

recycling. We shall briefly deal with them.

1. Waste Reuse

In some cases waste material can be used as a raw material with very little processing. Transfer of the

waste "as is" without reprocessing, to another facility is known as waste reuse or waste exchange.

Unwanted materials of commence such as outdated chemicals or untested materials not meeting the high

quality control requirements of purchasing industry, can be reused without processing. Process wastes

such as cardboard for making paper pulp, copper or other metal salt solutions for metal recovery, oils

that can be used as fuels. This includes a variety of other materials that can be reused as industrial feed

stocks.

2. Waste Recycling

Recycling differs from reuse in that the waste must first be treated before it can be used in a

manufacturing process. When a transfer of waste "as is" is not possible, reprocessing the waste for

material recovery is known as recycling. For example, bag house dust from scrap steel processors,

containing up to 25 per cent zinc oxide, can be combined with waste sulphuric acid to make galvaniser's

pickle acid. The spent pickle liquor containing 8-10 percent zinc sulphate and some iron salts is then

usable, as fertilizer in agricultural fields. Use of waste organic solvents is the best example of recycling

waste.

5.2.3 Treatment of Waste

After material recovery, the waste water containing hazardous waste chemicals should be detoxified and

neutralized through treatment. There are many technologies available for treating hazardous wastes

before they are ultimately disposed of. Their aim is to modify the physical and/or chemical properties of

the wastes so that they are rendered harmless. Selection of a treatment process depends on many factors

such as the nature of the waste, the desired characteristics of the output stream, and economic and

energy considerations. The treatment technologies can be divided into the following groups, namely:

Physical treatment

Chemical treatment

Biological treatment

Solidification, and Incineration



i) Physical Treatment

Physical treatment conducted using various methods such as phase separation. Phase separation includes

three steps, namely: lagooning, prolonged storage in tanks and sludge drying in beds. Lagooning and

tank storage are collectively used to separate particulate impurities

ii) Chemical treatment

This treatment is used to facilitate complete breakdown of hazardous wastes and more usually to modify

the chemical properties of the wastes, e.g., to reduce water solubility or to neutralize acidity or

alkalinity. The techniques involve oxidation, chemical reduction, neutralization, heavy metal

precipitation, oil/water separation and solvents/fuels recovery.

iii) Biological treatment

The gross impurities obtained from treatment of sewage are collectively known as sludge, which is

given biological treatment, before disposal. This is known as sludge processing which has become

important since improvements in industrial waste water treatment. The typical technologies for sludge

processing include conditioning, digestion, composting, thickening or dewatering and solidification.

Conditioning: In this step the sludge is exposed to atmosphere for a stipulated period until a

desired consistency is reached

Digestion: In this process the sludge is treated with bacteria which break down the long chain

compounds into simpler ones

Composting: In this step the organic matter in the waste sludge is converted into a usable stable

material

iv) Solidification

Processes convert the liquid waste into insoluble, rock-hard material and are used as pretreatment prior

to landfill disposal. This is usually done by mixing the waste with various reactants to produce a solid

mass. The basic aim of solidification process is to immobilize the hazardous constituents of the waste, so

that these do not leach out at the landfill disposal site.

v) Incineration

Thermal oxidation through incinerator is one of the proven technologies for destruction of hazardous

waste in all the forms i.e. solid / semi solid / liquid and gaseous, based on the feeding system, so as to

render them innocuous in the form of non-toxic and non-hazardous residues.



5.2.4 Collection, Transportation and Disposal

Waste disposal is a multiphase activity, the different stages of which, i.e. collection, interim storage,

transport; treatment and disposal are highly interdependent, both technically and organizationally. Safe

collection and transport of hazardous waste form a critical link in the chain between its point of

generation and its place of treatment and disposal. In many respects, the same precautions apply to

hazardous waste in transit as apply to the carriage of dangerous goods; however, additional problems

arise from the hazardous nature of certain wastes because:

Waste in general has no perceptible economic value to the generator;

The chemical and physical properties of a waste may not be precisely known because it is

frequently a complex mixture from which all economically useful components have been

extracted:

Mixing of non-compatible wastes for convenience in transit could create an acute hazard, either

immediately or on treatment and disposal (for example, a mixture of ether waste containing a

sodium residue with an aqueous ether waste will explode)

Therefore, for a safe and secure disposal of hazardous waste, there should be a proper collection, transport

and storage system. The non-compatible wastes should be segregated and transported separately.

5.3 Disposal of Hazardous Waste

The final disposal of the hazardous wastes also needs to be carefully planned. There are four different

ways in which hazardous wastes can be finally disposed

Landfill disposal.

Incineration.

Dumping at sea

Underground disposal

We shall now discuss each of the above method of disposal of hazardous wastes.

5.3.1 Landfill Disposal

The disposal of hazardous waste by land filling is an important method of disposal in many countries.

Landfilling means storing harmful substances under the ground. This involves hauling the refuse to an

area allocated for this purpose. In India such areas range from unsanitary open dumps to properly

operated sanitary landfills. Open dumps are a poor method of waste disposal because they cause

environmental problems. For example, they can ruin the appearance of all area and provide a home for

rats and other rodents who spread disease. If garbage is exposed, it rots and smells foul. Most dumps

allow some burning, which fills the surroundings with smoke. In addition, rain water can drain through

refuse and carry harmful substances to streams.



Properly operated sanitary landfills cause little damage to the environment. The area to be filled with

waste must be lined with a nonporous substance such as clay, or high density polyethylene (HDPE)—

plastic membrane to prevent the wastes from leaking to the surrounding areas. The wastes are packed and

dumped at the site and covered with earth each day. They cover of earth prevents insects and rodents from

getting into refuse. Operators of these sites forbid burning. In time, sanitary landfill sites become filled

up; many communities then cover the site for a final time and use the area for recreational purpose.

A typical landfill site consists of an artificial double liner at the bottom and a cover at the top. The above

design of landfill site does not have any provision for monitoring and repair of the site. In the recent past,

a new concept has developed in which the landfill site is constructed on a structure consisting of concrete

cells. The cell is a space for plant personnel to visit and observe any fault and repair the same.

5.3.2 Incineration

Incineration burns waste products. This is another method many industries and large cities use if they do

not have enough vacant areas for disposal sites nearby. Most hazardous wastes are detoxified in this

process. This is also an excellent method of waste minimization, waste detoxification and disposal, but its

cost of operation is very high, if the heat content of waste is not reutilized.

5.3.2.1 Advantages

Incineration is a process for the high-temperature oxidation of gaseous, liquid or solid wastes, convening

them into gases and an incombustible residue. The flue gases are released to the atmosphere with or

without recovery of heat and with or without cleaning; and any slag or ash produced is deposited in a

landfill. In general, incineration may be considered as an alternative method of detoxifying some non-

recoverable highly toxic wastes. It is an excellent method of reducing waste volume, and in addition

offers the possibility for recovering the heat content of the waste. In some communities heat from

municipal waste incineration isused to produce steam. This steam drives turbines that produce electric

power. Recycling of heat thus reduces the cost of operation of incinerators.

5.3.2.2 Waste Input

Generally, the wastes having inflammable characteristics are incinerated. The following types of wastes

are commonly treated in hazardous waste incinerators:

Solvent waste and sludge’s

Waste mineral oils

Varnish and paint wastes and sludge’s

Plastics, rubber and latex waste sludge’s and emulsions

Oils, emulsions and oil/water mixtures

Phenolic wastes

Mineral oil sludge’s



Resin waste

Grease and wax wastes

Pesticide wastes

Acid tar and spent clay

Organic wastes containing halogen, sulphur or phosphorus compounds.

Wastes having high chlorine, sulphur, nitrogen and phosphorus contents, polychlorinated biphenyls

(PCB) and those containing heavy metals and carcinogenic substances need special incineration

technologies and precautions. A large number of municipal incinerators lack adequate air pollution

control devices. Burning in many of these devices may release gases and solid particles that may harm

human health, damage property and kill plants. The flue gases from ordinary incinerators can be

dangerous in the absence of pollution control devices. Furthermore, as you have read earlier, incineration

sometimes becomes a costly affair.

5.3.3 Dumping at Sea

Another method of disposal of hazardous wastes involves dumping wastes at deep sea, designed to

prevent contamination of groundwater. Disposal at sea, of waste generated on land, is based on the

misconceived notion that-the enormous volume of water available for dilution enables the seas to be used

as a dump without permanent damage. However, this is an erroneous conviction. The decision to choose

this method of disposal is generally based on financial considerations. The site of disposal is determined

by the geographical location of the waste producer.

Disposal of waste at sea is controlled by international legislation and by the national legislation required

for the ratification of the international legislation. To prevent pollution of the seas by the direct discharge

of waste, the international legislation bans the dumping of extraordinarily hazardous wastes such as

organic silicon compounds, halogenated organics, mercury and its compounds, cadmium, carcinogenic

waste and plastics into the sea. The last of these can seriously disturb fishing and navigation.

5.3.4 Underground Disposal

It maybe excessively expensive to dispose of certain hazardous wastes, such as radioactive nuclear

wastes, in an environmentally acceptable manner at landfill still sites or incinerate them at thermal

treatment plants. These wastes are generated in all operations associated with the use of nuclear energy

for national defense or peaceful purposes such as mining of radioactive ore, production of nuclear fuel,

laboratory experiments and medical treatment. Underground disposal may provide an environmentally

and economically viable option in case of radioactive wastes. The underground disposal of hazardous

waste is acceptable only in inactive or partially active mines that meet specific geological and technical

criteria. Worldwide, only one deep-mine disposal facility is currently in operation: a worked-out

halite/potash salt mine at HerfaNeurode in the Federal Republic of Germany (now united Germany).



Salt mines are often used for radioactive waste disposal because the excellent properties of salt deposits

prevent the interaction of wastes with other geological formations. The very existence of a salt deposit is a

proof that the underground site has been unaffected by water for millions of years. Salt is impermeable to

liquids and gases. Due to its hygroscopic nature, salt is capable of absorbing water entering the formation

from outside and of repairing minor fractures by re-crystallization, thus maintaining the original

impermeability. This feature is frequently supplemented by impermeable upper strata consisting of

wastes, usually rock, from mines or other industries.

The atmosphere in salt mines is extremely dry, so metal equipment and containers do notrust. There is no

risk of methane explosions as in coal mines. Bursting of carbon dioxide gas inclusions in the salt mines

may be observed during excavation of rocks but this does not pose a risk, particularly after mining

operations have ceased. Thermal conductivity of salt is good. Salt is strong, permitting the excavation of

spacious, stable galleries. In addition, salt has certain plasticity under pressure, allowing the dispersion of

strain and increasing the overall stability.

Based on the several options present for safe treatment, storage, disposal & recycling of various wastes in

the proposed projects the following options are considered which meeting the national standards.

Hazardous wastes: Recycling, treatment stabilization, secured landfill, incineration

Bio medical wastes: Disinfections, shredding, incineration, secured landfill

E Wastes: Dismantling, cutting, disposal to authorized dealers, incineration

5.4 Plasma Gasification

Plasma gasification is the process which converts organic matter into synthetic gas using plasma

technology. A plasma torch powered by an electric arc is used to ionize gas and catalyze organic matter

into synthetic gas and solid waste (slag). It is used commercially as a form of waste treatment; however, it

has been also tested for the gasification of biomass and solid hydrocarbons, such as coal, oil sands, and oil

shale. The process can both generate electricity while reducing the volume of waste.



Figure 5.1

Layout of Plasma Gasification

5.4.1 Feedstock

The feedstock for plasma waste treatment is most often municipal solid waste, organic waste, or both.

Feedstock may also include biomedical waste and hazardous waste materials. Content and consistency of

the waste directly impacts performance of a plasma facility. Pre-sorting and recycling useful material

before gasification provides consistency. Too much inorganic material such as metal and construction

waste increases slag production. In turn this decreases syngas production. However the benefit is that the

slag itself is chemically inert and safe to handle. Certain materials may affect the content of the gas

produced, however shredding waste before entering the main chamber helps. This creates an efficient

transfer of energy. This ensures more materials are broken down.

5.4.2 Commercialization

Plasma gasification is in commercial use for waste disposal. Plasma arc gasification is a means to destroy

bio medical waste and also destroys hazardous waste. The main advantages of plasma gasification is

Clean destruction of hazardous waste streams.

Prevents hazardous waste from reaching landfills.

No harmful emissions or toxic waste.

Production of clean alloyed slag which could be used as construction material.

Processing of organic waste allows production of combustible syngas which can be used in

various applications, e.g. electric power and thermal energy generation.

Production of value-added products (metals) from slag.



5.4.3 Pros and Cons of Plasma Gasification

Main Advantages of Plasma Technology are as follows

Far less toxic emissions compared to landfills or other waste-to-energy facilities.

Toxic waste can be safely processed, such as asbestos and medical wastes.

Syngas is a byproduct of the process, which is as clean as or cleaner than natural gas and can be

used to produce energy, such as bio fuel.

Metal is nearly 100 percent recoverable and can be used to make new steel.

Low dioxin emissions.

Waste is shrunk to 1 percent its original size; One-tenth the size of byproducts of incineration.

Main disadvantages of plasma technologies for waste treatment are:

Waste gasification and combustion ultimately releases carbon dioxide to the atmosphere instead

of sequestering a large fraction of the carbon in a landfill;

Large capital costs relative to current landfills;

Requires large electrical energy input if the waste stream does not contains a large fraction of

unoxidized hydrocarbons;

The highly corrosive plasma flame may lead to frequent maintenance and component replacement

with associated facility down time;

The filters and gas treatment systems are themselves sources of toxic waste, some of which (e.g.

acidified water) are poor candidates for plasma processing

5.4.4 Conclusion

Plasma gasification technology is commercially proven and viable, while also meeting all current

regulatory requirements. Plasma gasification is positioned to take hold as a practical, economical and

environmentally responsible alternative to conventional forms of waste disposal and power generation.

Considering demerits of Plasma Gasification, Project management has decided to adopt landfill system.

5.5 No Project Option

It has been made mandatory by the government to dispose of Solid (Hazardous, Bio-medical, E Waste,

etc.,) waste in systematic and scientific disposal way and pollution control boards have been asked to

ensure it. For systematic & scientific disposal of hazardous wastes, a CHWMF becomes necessary where

care is to be taken to avoid any negative effects on the environment.

The industries in and around Nalgonda are facing huge cost burdens in terms of Hazardous Waste

Transportation and Disposal to the Common TSDF available in Hyderabad. This has also led to

unauthorized/ unorganized disposal of such waste leading to environmental pollution. Hence in the

absence of this project, there are chances that this situation may continue to prevail.



Benefits and Advantages of project

Management of hazardous waste with additional benefit of green and clean Environment.

It minimizes the pollution load on environment from industrial hazardous waste.


of violation of rules.

It reduces the number of hazardous waste sites in the area and also eliminates the pollution

potential.




industries



the region

The proposed project will not cause depletion of natural resources or the significant adverse impacts on

environment. On the contrary, it will produce value added resources such as facilitating better

management of the industrial wastes. Hence, “No Project Option” is not considered.

CHAPTER 6

ENVIRONMENTAL

MONITORING PROGRAM



CHAPTER 6

ENVIRONMENTALMONITORING PROGRAM


Environmental monitoring program describes the processes and activities that need to take place to

characterize and monitor the quality of the environment. Environmental monitoring is used in the

preparation of environmental impact assessments, as well as in many circumstances in which human

activities carry a risk of harmful effects on the natural environment. All monitoring strategies and

program have reasons and justifications which are often designed to establish the current status of an

environment or to establish trends in environmental parameters. In all cases the results of monitoring will

be reviewed, analyzed statistically and submitted to concerned authorities. The design of a monitoring

program must therefore have regard to the final use of the data before monitoring starts.

The monitoring program will have three phases

1. Construction phase

2. Monitoring phase

3. Post monitoring phase

6.2 Construction Phase

The proposed project envisages setting up of Integrated Common Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage,

Disposal and Recycling Facilities at Kakkireni Village, Ramanapeta Mandal, Nalgonda District,

Telangana, The major construction activities involved in setting up the unit are construction of sheds for

treatment units, stores, administrative blocks, canteen etc., major components in the industry are secured

landfill, incinerator, auto clave, shredder, diesel generator, cathode ray tube cutter and other civil,

mechanical and electrical equipment. The construction activities require clearing of vegetation,

mobilization of construction material and equipment. The construction activities are expected to last for

few months.

During construction Phase of secured landfill at every stage quality of construction will be monitored viz.

base preparation, liners quality, drainage layers, leachate collection system, storm water management

system, gas vent systems, etc. The generic environmental measures that need to be undertaken during

project construction stage are given in the following Table 6.1

Table 6.1

Environmental Measures during Construction Phase

S.

No

Potential Impact Detailed action to be followed

as per EMP

Parameters for

Monitoring

Frequency of

Monitoring

1. Air Emissions All equipment’s are operated

within specified design

parameters.

Random checks of

equipment logs/

manuals

Periodic

Vehicle trips to be minimized Vehicle Logs Periodic during site



to the extent possible clearance &

construction activities

Any dry, dusty materials stored

in sealed containers or

prevented from blowing.

Stockpiles or open

containers of dusty

materials.

Periodic during

Construction activities

Compaction of soil during

various construction activities

Construction logs

Maintenance of construction

DG set emissions to meet

stipulated standards

Gaseous emissions

(SO2, HC, CO, NOx)

Periodic emission

Monitoring

Ambient air quality within the

premises & adjacent villages of

the proposed unit to be

monitored.

PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx,

and CO

As per CPCB/ SPCB

Requirement

2. Noise List of all noise generating

machinery onsite along with

age to be prepared.

Equipment logs, noise

reading

Regular during


Night working is to be

minimized.

Working hour records Periodic during

Construction activities

Generation of vehicular noise Maintenance of records

of vehicles

Implement good working

practices (equipment selection

and siting) to minimize noise

and also reduce its impacts on

human health (ear muffs, safe

distances, and enclosures).

Site working practices

records, noise reading

No machinery running when

not required.

Acoustic mufflers/enclosures to

be provided in large engines

Mufflers/enclosures

shall be in place.

Prior to use of

equipment.

Noise to be monitored in

ambient air within the plant

premises.

Continuous Noise

recording

Asper CPCB/SPCB

requirement

The Noise level will not exceed

the permissible limit both

during day and night times.

All equipments operated within

specified design parameters.

Random checks of

equipment logs/

manuals

Periodic during


Vehicle trips to be minimized Vehicle logs



to the extent possible

3. Soil Erosion Minimize area extent of site

clearance, by staying within the

defined boundaries

Site boundaries not

extended / breached as

per plan document.

Periodic during


Protect topsoil stockpile Effective cover in

place.

4. Wastewater

Discharge

No direct discharge of

wastewater to be made to

surface water, groundwater or

soil.

No discharge hoses

shall be in vicinity of

watercourses.

Periodic during


The discharge point would be

selected properly and sampling

and analysis would be

undertaken prior to discharge

Discharge norms for

effluents as given in

Permits

Periodic during


Take care in disposal of

wastewater generated such that

soil and groundwater resources

are protected.

Discharge norms for

effluents as given in

permits

5. Drainage and

Effluent

Management

Ensure drainage system and

specific design measures are

working effectively.

The design to incorporate

existing drainage pattern and

avoid disturbing the same.

Visual inspection of

drainage and records

thereof

Periodic during


6. Waste Management Implement waste management

plan that identifies and

characterizes every waste

arising associated with

proposed activities and which

identifies the procedures for

collection, handling & disposal

of each waste arising.

Comprehensive Waste

Management Plan

should be in place and

available for inspection

onsite. Compliance

with MSW Rules, 1998

and Hazardous Wastes

(Management and

Handling Rules), 2003

Periodic check during


7. Non-routine events

and accidental

releases

Plan will be drawn, considering

likely emergencies and steps

required to prevent / limit

consequences.

Mock drills and records

of the same

Periodic during


8. Health Employees and migrant labour

health check ups

All relevant parameters

including HIV

Regular checkups as

per Factories Act



6.3 Operation Phase

During operational phase period air emissions from incinerator, power plant, DG set, landfill if any,

wastewater characteristics, ash generation quantity, etc., are monitored, are given in Table 6.2. The

following attributes which merit regular monitoring based on the environmental setting and nature of

project activities are listed below:

Point Source emissions and ambient air quality in nearby villages

Groundwater Levels and ground water quality

Water & wastewater quality & quantity

Solid waste characterization (Ash, leachate treatment plant & Septic tank/soak pit sludge)

Soil quality

Noise levels (equipment and machinery noise levels, occupational exposures and ambient noise

levels)

Ecological preservation and Afforestation.

Table 6.2

Environmental Monitoring during Operational Phase

S. No Potential Impact Action to be Followed Parameters for

Monitoring

Frequency of

Monitoring

1. Air Emissions Stack emissions from

Incinerator

As per CFE conditions-

Operating hours,

Temperature, Pressure,

TOC of residues, LOI of

residues, Stack temp, CO,

PM, HCl, HF, SO2, NOx,

TOC, Mercury, Heavy

metals, dioxins & furans

As per CFE

conditions given

by SPCB or EC

conditions given

by MOEF and

CPCB protocol for

TSDF.

Gas quality from landfill

areas

VOC, H2S As per CFE

conditions given

by SPCB or EC

conditions given

by MOEF and

CPCB protocol for

TSDF.

Stack emissions from

Power plant and DG sets

As per CFE conditions PM,

SO2, NOx

AAQ within the project

premises.

All vehicles to be PUC

certificate.

As per CFE conditions /

NAAQ Standards

Vehicle logs to be

Maintained

Meteorological data Wind speed, direction,

temp., relative humidity

and rainfall.

2. Noise Noise generated from

operation of boiler,

Continuous Noise Level

recording

Periodic during

operation phase



cooling towers, etc to be

monitored

Once in month by

third party

3. Wastewater

Discharge

(leachate)

Compliance to

wastewater discharge

standards

pH, TSS, TDS, BOD, COD

& Oil& grease (Heavy

metals if required)

Daily at regular

intervals

Once in a month

by third party

4. Solid waste/Haz.

Waste

Check compliance to

HWM rules

Quality & quantity

monitoring

Periodically /

CPCB norms.

5. Ground Water

Quality

Monitoring ground water

quality, through

piezometers

as per CPCB guidelines Periodically & as

per CPCB norms.

6. Flora and Fauna Vegetation, greenbelt /

green cover development

No. of plants, species Once a year

7. Soil quality Checking & Maintenance

of good soil quality

around

Physico-chemical

parameters and metals.

Once a year

8. Health Employees and migrant

labour health check ups


(BP, HIV, chest X-ray, Eye

vision, etc.) and HIV for

BMW workers

Regular checkups

as per factories act.

6.4 Post Operational Phase

Post-closure monitoring of the landfill will be done primarily as a compliance requirement in addition to

social responsibility; this also provides an early warning towards possible adverse impacts on human

health and the environment. The post-closure program of monitoring for water quality in the ground water

and surface waters down gradient of the landfill will be similar to that established for the operational

stage of the facility. The frequency of monitoring may be varied from time to time depending on changing

circumstances.

There is no need for the post-closure monitoring of air quality, noise or visual effects during the post-

closure period however this need will be reviewed periodically and should any aspects warrant further

monitoring they will be included in the program.The details of the post closure monitoring are given in

Table 6.3.



Table 6.3

Environmental Monitoring during Post Operation phase

S.

No

Potential Impact Action to be Followed Parameters for

Monitoring

Frequency of

Monitoring

1. Air Emissions Gas quality from landfill

areas

VOC, H2S As per CFE

conditions given by

SPCB or EC

conditions given by

MOEF and as per

CPCB protocol for

TSDF.

AAQ within the project

premises

All vehicles to be PUC

certificate.

As per CFE conditions /

NAAQ Standards Vehicle

logs to be maintained

Meteorological data Wind speed, direction,

temp., relative humidity

and rainfall.

2. Wastewater

Discharge

(leachate) if

present

Compliance to

wastewater discharge

standards

pH, TSS, TDS, BOD, COD

& Oil& grease

Once in a month

(during initial period

more regularly)

3. Ground Water

Quality and

Water Levels

Monitoring ground

water quality, and water

levels within plant site

As per CPCB protocol Periodically and

CPCB protocol for

TSDF.

4. Flora and Fauna Vegetation, greenbelt /

green cover

development

No. of plants, species Once a year

5. Health Employees and migrant

labor health check ups


(BP, Sugar, chest X-ray,

Eye vision, etc.)

Regular checkups as

per factories act.

6.5 Environmental Laboratory Equipment

The proposed project will have an in-house environmental laboratory for the routine monitoring of Air,

Water, Soil, Meteorology and Noise. For all non-routine analysis, the plant will utilize the services of

external recognized laboratories and facilities. The procedures given in IS standards or CPCB approved

methods will be followed of analysis and sampling of various environmental parameters.

The list of laboratory equipment need for the environmental monitoring is given in Table 6.4.



Table 6.4

Equipment Needed for Environmental Monitoring

Name of the Equipment No of Instruments

Online monitoring for incinerator stack 1

Weather Station, which can record wind speed, wind direction

Temperature, Relative Humidity (Automatic or manual),

1

Respirable Dust samplers 3

Fine Dust samplers 3

Portable Flue Gas Combustion Analyser 1

Portable Noise level meter (Dosimeter) 1

Portable Wastewater Analysis Kit 1

BOD Incubator 1

COD Digester with colorimeter 2

Electronic Balance 1

Spectro photo meter 1

Hot Air Oven 1

Laboratory Water Distillation and demineralization unit 2

General glass ware and laboratory chemicals, etc

MoEF approved parties will be monitoring at regular intervals

6.5.1 Environmental Management Cell

An efficient environmental management cell headed by a Project Incharge/head having a minimum of 5

to 10 years of experience will be formed. The project Incharge/head will be supported by team of

members (managers, operators, chemists, technicians, etc.) having minimum of 2 to 3 years experience in

their respective fields of work. The organizational setup of the environmental management cell is given

below in Figure 6.1.

Figure 6.1

Organization setup of Environmental Management



6.6 Pollution Monitoring Facilities

Incinerator stack, Power plant and DG set stack should have provision of platform and port hold to stack

sampling meeting MOEF standards with necessary power point. Environmental laboratory shall have

above equipment/instruments to analyze air and wastewater parameters.

6.6.1 Reporting Schedules of the Monitoring Data

It is proposed that voluntary reporting of environmental performance with reference to the EMP should be

undertaken. The environmental monitoring cell shall co-ordinate all monitoring program at site and data

thus generated shall be regularly furnished to the State regulatory agencies. The frequency of reporting

shall be on six monthly basis to the local state PCB officials and to Regional office of MoEF. The

Environmental Audit reports shall be prepared forthe entire year of operations and shall be regularly

submitted to regulatory authorities.

6.6.2 Public Health Monitoring

The value of Public Health studies in seeking to establish whether or not a site or facility has caused

significant adverse health effects is well known. In this situation the results form a public health study

may not fulfill the primary objective of such a program, which is to detect health changes before the

manifestation of adverse health effects. However, three-stage health monitoring program is proposed.

Monitor the health of workers within the project site to identify adverse health effects, and

Periodically obtain feedback from local doctors regarding any potential indicators of adverse

health effects due to environmental cause in the communities surrounding, and particularly down-

stream of the landfill.

By organizing health camps on a regular basis.

6.6.3 Budgetary Provision for EMP

In order to comply with the environmental protection measures as suggested in the above sections, the

project management has made budgetary provision for environmental protection and safety measures.

Cost towards environmental mitigation measures are given in Table 6.5.



Table 6.5

Budget of Implementation of Environmental Management Plan

S. No Particulars Capital Cost (Rs.

Crores)

Recurring Cost

(Rs. Lakhs/annum)

During Construction Phase

1

Air Pollution Control Systems, Water Pollution Control

Systems, Noise Control Measures, Solid waste Control

systems, etc.

1.0 2

During Operation Phase

1 Air Pollution Control Systems 10.0 25

2 LT collection system, holding tank, STP, etc 1.0 5

3 Gas collection, management, odour control etc 1.0 5

4 Noise Control measures – Acoustic enclosures for DG

set, Noise barriers for pumps, etc 0.5 2

5 Greenbelt development 1.0 2

6 Rainwater harvesting, storm water drains, 0.5 1

7 Online Stack monitoring 2.0 5

8 Ambient Air quality monitoring, Laboratory

equipments, etc 2.5 2

9 Third party monitoring, energy audit, environmental

audit, training programs, etc 0.5 5

Total 20 54

Capital Cost of the project is Rs.260Crores

CHAPTER 7

ADDITIONAL STUDIES



CHAPTER 7

ADDITIONAL STUDIES

7.1 Risk Assessment & Disaster Management Plan

The principal objective of the risk assessment study is to identify and quantify the major hazards and

the risk associated with various operations of the proposed project, which may lead to emergency

consequences (disasters) affecting the public safety and health. Based on this information, an

emergency preparedness plan is to be prepared to mitigate the consequences. The approach involves

hazards identification, hazards assessment and evaluation, developing Disaster Management Plan

(DMP).

7.1.1Risk Analysis

Risk analysis includes an estimate of the probability or likelihood that an event will occur. Estimation

of random incidents totally uncorrected with plant activities may also be taken. Risk can be

characterized in qualitative terms as high medium or low, or in quantitative terms using numerical

estimates and statistical calculations. For practical purposes a risk analysis may be based on a

subjective, common- sense evaluation. Both probability and consequences are extremely important in

evaluating risk. A high risk situation can be the result of a high probability with severe consequences

(e.g. irreversible health effects or death due to an airborne toxic dust, a fire or explosion with injuries

or fatalities), whereas moderate risk situations can be a result of either high probability with mild

consequences or low probability with more severe consequences. Diminishing the likelihood of an

accident or minimizing the consequences will reduce risk overall.

A relative ranking of hazards requires extensive mathematical evaluations, application of statistics and

extensive support from experts. Application of readily available information and common sense when

combined with site-specific evaluations such as the vulnerability analysis will complete much of the

risk analysis process.

7.1.2 Evaluating Hazards

The need for the sophisticated techniques for evaluating hazards depends on the result of Preliminary

Hazard Analysis. Various techniques for evaluation hazards are:

Hazard and Operability Study (HAZOP)

Accident Consequence Analysis

Event Tree Analysis

Fault Tree Analysis

Failure Modes, Effects and Criticality Analysis.

In order to be in a state of readiness to face the adverse effects of accidents, an Emergency

Preparedness Plan (EPP) has to be prepared. Such a plan must. Inter-alia, cover the possible hazardous

situations in the locality and the causes, areas most likely to be affected, on-site and off-site plans,



establishment of Emergency Control Centers (ECC), location of emergency services and duties of

officers/staff during emergency.

The EPP document for accidents is to be designed to provide for measures to contain the incident and

for minimization of effects due to fire, explosives, release or escape of toxic gas, spillage of hazardous

substances in storage, processing or during transportation. The necessary preventive and protective

steps required to be taken before, during and after an accident need to be worked out in operational

terms and detailed in the document.

7.2 Identification of Major Hazard Installations Based On GOI Rules, 1989 as amended in 1994

& 2000

By Studying accidents occurred in industries in India over a few decades, a specific legislation

covering major hazard activities has been enforced by Government of India in 1989 in conjunction

with Environment Protection Act, 1986. This is referred here as GOI rules 1989. For the purpose of

identifying major hazard installations the rules employ certain criteria based on toxic, flammable and

explosive properties of chemicals.

7.2.1 Identification of Toxic, Flammable, Explosive Chemicals

Toxic Chemicals: Chemicals having the following values of acute toxicity and which owing to their

physical and chemical properties are capable of producing major accidents:

S. No Toxicity Oral toxicity

LD50 (mg/kg)

Dermal toxicity LD50

(mg/kg)

Inhalation toxicity

LC50 (mg/l)

1. Extremely toxic 1-50 1-200 0.1-0.5

2. Highly toxic 51 – 500 201-2000 0.5 - 2.0

Flammable Chemicals: Flammable gases: Gases which at 200C and at standard pressure of 101.3

KPa are:-

Ignitable when in a mixture of 13 percent or less by volume with air, or

Have a flammable range with air of at least 12 percentage points regardless of the lower

flammable limits.

Note: The flammability shall be determined by tests or by calculation in accordance with methods

adopted by International Standards Organization ISO Number 10156 of 1990 or by Bureau of Indian

Standards ISI Number 1446 of 1985.

Extremely flammable liquids: chemicals which have flash point lower than or equal to 230C

and boiling point less than 350C

Very highly flammable liquids: chemicals which have a flash point lower than or equal to

230C and initial boiling point higher than 35

0C.



Highly flammable liquids: chemicals which have a flash point lower than or equal to 600C but

higher than 230C.

Flammable liquids: chemicals which have a flash point higher than 60oC but lower than 90

0 C.

Explosives: Explosives means a solid or liquid or pyrotechnic substance (or a mixture of substances)

or an article.

Which is in itself capable by chemical reaction of producing gas at such a temperature and

pressure and at such a speed as to cause damage to the surroundings;

Which is designed to produce an effect by heat, light, sound, gas or smoke or a combination of

these as a result of non-detonative self sustaining exothermic chemical reaction?

7.2.2 Applicability of Manufacture, Storage and Import of Hazardous Chemicals Rules, 1989 &

subsequent amendments

A systematic analysis of the chemicals and their quantities of storage has been carried out to determine

threshold quantities as notified by GOI Rules, 1989 and the applicable rules are identified. The results

are summarized in Table 7.1.

Table 7.1

Description of applicable provisions of GOI rules’1989 as amended in 1994 & 2000

Applicable rules Description

1 Short Title And Commencement

These rules are called as Manufacture, Storage and Import of Hazardous

Chemical Rules, 1989.

2 Definitions

In these rules, unless the context otherwise requires

3 Duties Of Authorities

4

General Responsibility Of The Occupier During Industrial Activity

Take adequate steps to prevent major accidents

Provide information to persons working onsite

Impart training, provide equipment and antidotes

5 Notification of major accidents to concerned authority

If any major accident occurs, occupier to inform Concerned authority as listed in

Schedule 5 and submit report as per the format in Schedule 6

(applies after commencing of the activity)

6 Industrial Activity To Which Rules 7 to 15

7 Notification of site to competent authority

8 Updating of site notification following changes in threshold quantity

9 Transitional provision for the existing activity

10 Preparation of safety reports for commencement of activity

11 Updating of safety reports based on modification

12 Provision of further information on safety reports to the authority

13 Preparation of onsite emergency plan by the occupier



14 Preparation of offsite emergency plan by the occupier

15 Information to be given to persons liable to be effected by a major accident

16 Disclosures of Information

Where for the purpose of evaluating information notified under rule 5 or 7 to 15,

the concerned authority discloses that information to some other person, that

other person shall not use that information for any purpose, and before disclosing

the information the concerned authority shall inform that other person of his

obligations under this paragraph.

17 Collection, development and dissemination of information on hazardous

chemicals employed by the occupier

18* Import of hazardous chemicals

19 Improvement Notices

If a person has contravened the provisions of these rules, the concerned authority

shall serve on him a notice

20 Power Of The Central Government To Modify The Schedules

Occupier shall develop information in the form of safety data sheet as specified in Schedule 9. Every

container of the hazardous chemical should be labelled with name of the manufacturer or importer of

the hazardous chemical.

7.2.3 Storage facilities of hazardous chemicals

The storage capacities / details of the major hazardous chemicals proposed to be used in the project are

given in Table 7.2.

Table 7.2

Details of Chemicals and Applicability of GOI rules

Solvent Storage

Type

Storage

Capacity (Tons)

Listed in

Scheduled

Threshold Quantity (Tons) for

Application of Rules

5,7-9,13-15 10-12

Diesel Tankers 17 Schedule

3 (part II)

5000 50000

From the above table it can be inferred that there would be no major Hazardous chemical stored at the

proposed plant, which would attract the GOI rules 4 5,7-9 and 13-15, as the quantity likely to be stored

at site lies below the stipulated threshold quantities.

7.2.4 Nature Of Possible Hazards

Hazard Area Probable Cause Of The Accident

Explosion

Boilers / Transformers / Receivers for

the Air compressors. Malfunctioning of the Safety Valve

Flammable Petroleum Product Storage

Tank / Drum Storage area

External fire causing pressure built up in the

tanks / barrels

Fire H.S.D. / FO Storage Area Flammable vapor / air mixture and source of



ignition.

Flammable Petroleum Product

Storage Tank / Drum Storage Shed

/Production Area

Formation on pool in the dyke wall and

source of ignition.

External fire Built up of internal pressure

Failure of the top cover Tank on Fire

Spillage Acid / Alkali Storage Area Spillage of Acid / Alkali due to rupture of

the pipe line, collapse of the storage tank

7.2.5 Maximum credible accident analysis for diesel storage area

Identification of causes and types of hazards is the primary task for planning for risk assessment.

Hazard can happen because of the nature of chemicals handled and also the nature of process involved.

So for risk analysis first step is to identify the hazardous chemicals which are to be studied for risk

analysis.

Identification of Hazardous Chemicals is done in accordance with The Manufacture, Storage and

import of Hazardous Chemical Rules, 1989.

Schedule 1, of the Rule provides a list of the Toxic and Hazardous chemicals and the flammable

chemicals. It defines the flammable chemicals based on the flash point and boiling point.

"Major accident hazards (MAH) installations" is defined as the isolated storage and industrial

activity at a site handling (including transport through carrier or pipeline) of hazardous chemicals

equal to or, in excess of the threshold quantities specified in Column 3 of Schedule 2 and 3

respectively Schedule 3 has classified hazardous substances in an operating plant into 5 groups and

has provided the threshold quantities for application of above rules.

Group1 & 2 – Toxic substances

Group 3 – Highly reactive substances

Group 4 – Explosive substance

Group – 5 Flammable substances

The following Table 7.3 shows the list of major chemicals which have been identified as hazardous

chemicals in The Manufacture, Storage and import of Hazardous Chemical Rules, 1989 and which are

to be considered as Major accident hazards (MAH) installations. 20 KL/month of diesel fuel is

expected to be consumed at incinerator site.



Table 7.3

Hazardous Chemicals at Site

S.

No

Chemical Use Nature of Chemical

(Schedule 1 & 3)

Type of Storage

& No’s

Storage

Quantity

1 Diesel Supporting fuel

for Vehicles

Highly Flammable Horizontal & 2

No (each 10 KL)

20 KL

Summary Table on the Inventories

Chemical Codes/

Label TLV FBP MP FP

UEL LEL

%

HSD

(High Speed

Diesel)

Flammable 800 mg/m

3

TWA 215 - 376

0 C NA 32

0 C 6.0 0.6

TLV : Threshold Limit Value FBP : Final Boiling Point

MP : Melting Point FP : Flash Point

UEL : Upper Explosive Limit LEL : Lower Explosive Limit

Fire Explosive Toxicity Index (FETI) for HSD

The application of FETI would help to make a quick assessment of the nature and quantification of the

hazard in these areas.

F&EI of fuels used for the proposed Industrial Area

Chemical/Fuel NFPA Classification

GPH SPH *F&EI F&E

Category Nh Nf Nr MF

HSD 1 2 0 10 1.8 2.83 50.89 Light

*FEI = MF *(1+GPH) * (1+SPH)

The F&EI values are ranked into following categories

F&EI Category

S. No F&EI F&E Category

1 1-60 Low

2 60-90 Medium

3 90 and above Severe

Nature of Hazard from Oil Storage:

Diesel is a petroleum product. It is a highly flammable liquid having flash point between 320–96

0C.

However its auto ignition temperature is 2560C. Its boiling point ranges between 150

0-400

0C. Furnace

Oil is of similar characteristics having flash point above 660C. Major Hazards from oil storage can be

fire. Maximum credible accidents from oil storage tank can be



a) Tank Fire

b) Pool / Dyke fire.

Tank Fire

Oil is stored in floating roof tank. Leak in rim seal leading to accumulation of vapour is a source of

fire. Lighting can be a source of ignition and can cause tank fire. Overflow from tank leading to

spillage may cause vapour cloud formation. This can catch fire and it can flash back to the tank to

cause tank fire.

Pool / Dyke Fire

If there is outflow from the tank due to any leakage from tank or any failure of connecting pipes or

valves, oil will flow outside and form a pool. Where the tank is surrounded by a dyke, the pool of oil

will be restricted within that dyke. After sometime, the vapour from the pool can catch fire and can

cause pool or dyke fire.

Heat Radiation and Thermal Damage Criteria

The level of damage caused by heat radiation due to fire is a function of duration of exposure as well

as heat flux (i.e. radiation energy onto the object of concern). This is true both for the effect on

building and plant equipment and for the effect on personnel. However the variation of likely

exposures times is more marked with personnel, due to possibility of finding shelter coupled with

protection of the skin tissue (clothed or naked body). Further, it is assumed that everyone inside the

area by the pool fire will be burned to death (100% lethality) or will asphyxiate. Radiation at various

heat flux levels which are critical in risk analysis, are given in the Table 7.4.

Table 7.4

Effect of Heat Radiation

Exposure Time in seconds for % Fatality

Radiation Level (Kw/m2) 1% 50% 99%

1.6 500 1300 3200

4.0 150 370 930

12.5 30 80 200

37.5 8 20 50

The damage and fatality (percentage of the exposed people to be killed) due to the exposure time is

very important in determining the degree of fatality and corresponding effect distance. It is observed

that the exposed persons normally find shelter or protection from the heat radiation (e.g. against a

wall) within 10 seconds. However, exposure time of 30 seconds is normally assumed for pessimistic

calculation which applies if people do not run away immediately or when no protection is available.

The variation of the effects on humans due to heat flux and duration of exposure have been developed

in the form of a Probit Equation which gives following values for human fatality levels in Table 7.5.



Table 7.5

Heat Radiation and Fatality

Incident Radiation

Intensity (KW/m2)

Type Of Damage

37.5 Sufficient to cause damage to process equipment

25 Minimum energy required to ignite nearby wood at infinitely long

exposure (non piloted)

12.5 Minimum energy required for piloted ignition of wood, melting plastic

tubing etc. 1st degree burns for 10 seconds exposure.

4.5 Sufficient to cause pain to personnel if unable to reach cover within 20

seconds; however blistering of skin (1st degree burns) is likely.

1.6 Will cause no discomfort to long exposure

For the storage of HSD (Diesel), it is assumed that the complete liquid leaks due to tank failure or

ruptures and develops into a pool and gets ignited. Hazards distances have been arrived due to effect

of pool fires. For computing the damage distance from the tank failure area ALOHA software is used.

Full tank storage capacity has been considered. The out is given as Table 7.6

Table 7.6

Scenario (pool fire)

HSD Storage Tank

Scenario : Pool Fire

Input Data Results of computation

Spilled Quantity 10 KL Flame center height 28 m

Pool Diameter 17 m Mass burning rate liquid 933 kg/min

Wind Speed 2.4 m/s Total Amount burned 3472 kg

Heat Radiation at ground level KW/m2 Isopleths distance (m)

37.5 18

25.0 24

12.5 36

4.5 59

1.6 84

A perusal of the above table clearly indicates that 37.5 KW/m2

(100% lethality occurs within the radius of the pool which is computed at 18 m tank on pool fire. This

vulnerable zone will damage all fuel storage equipment falling within the pool radius.

Similarly the threshold limit for first degree burns is 1.6 KW/m2, this vulnerable zone in which the

thermal fluxes above the threshold limit for first degree is restricted to 84 m in case fuel storage area

catches pool fire.

The risk contours are given below in Figure 7.1



Figure 7.1 ALOHA Source point on the layout



7.3 On-Site Emergency Plan

An on-site emergency is caused by an accident that takes place in plant itself and the effects are

confined to the factory premises involving only the people working in the factory. On-site

emergency plan to deal with such eventualities is the responsibility of the occupier and is

mandatory. An on-site emergency plan should contain the following key elements:

basis of the plan: Hazard analysis

accident prevention procedure/measures;

accident/emergency response procedure/measures and

Recovery procedure.

7.3.1 Elements of Planning

The charts and maps should highlight the accident-prone areas of the industry so that in case of an

emergency. It provides a basis for taking any action.

7.3.1.1 Emergency Personnel’s Responsibility during Normal Office Hours

Site Controller: The Project Head (however called) or his nominated deputy will assume overall

responsibility for the plant / storage site and its personnel. His duties will be to:

Assess the magnitude of the situation and decide if staff needs to be evacuated

from their assembly points to identify safer places;

Exercise direct operational control over areas other than those affected;

Undertake a continuous review of possible developments and assess in

consultation with key personnel as to whether shutting down of the plant or any

section of the plant and evacuation of personnel are required;

Liaise with senior officials of Police, Fire Bridge, Medical and Factories

Inspectorate and provide advice on possible effects on areas outside the factory

premises:

Look after rehabilitation of affected persons on discontinuation of emergency;

Issues authorized statements to news media, and ensure that evidence is preserved

for enquiries to be conducted by the statutory authorities.

Fire & Security Officer: The Chief Fire and Security Officer will be responsible for fire fighting.

On hearing the fire alarm he shall reach the fire station immediately and advise fire and security

staff in the factory of the incident zone and cancel the alarm. He will also announce on PAS or

convey through telephones or messengers or canteens to the Communication Officer, Incident

Controller and Site Controller about the incident zone. He will open the gates nearest to the

incident and stand by to direct the emergency services.

Telephone Operator: On hearing the emergency alarm, he will immediately contact Site

Controller and on his advice call the local fire-bridge or mutual-aid scheme members. In case the

PAS internal/external telephone system becomes inoperative, he shall inform the Communication

Officer through a messenger. In case fire has been detected and the alarm is not in operation, he

shall receive information about location from the person who detected the fire and thereafter

immediately consult the Incident Controller and make announcement on PAS or telephone telling

the staff about location of the incident and to evacuate to their assembly points. He will continue to



operate the switch board advising the callers that the staffs is not available and pass all calls

connected with the incident to the Communication.

Departmental Heads: The Departmental Heads will report to Incident Controller and provide

assistance as required. They will decide the staff they require at the incident site.

Fire Pump Attendant: Two persons identified in each shift will work as fire pump attendants. On

hearing the fire alarm, they will immediately proceed to pump house to ensure that pumps are

operating and stand by to maintain them. At the end of emergency, they will be relieved of their

duty by the Fire and Security Officers.

7.4 Infrastructure

Emergency Control Room- Emergency Control Room is to be set up and marked on the site plan.

The Control Room will be the focal point case of an emergency from where the operations to

handle the emergency are directed and coordinated. It will control site activities and should be

furnished with external and internal telephone connections, list of essential telephone numbers, list

of key persons and their addresses.

Assembly Points- Assembly points are to be set up farthest from the location of likely hazardous

events where pre-designated persons from the works, contractors and visitors would assemble in

case of emergency. Up-to-date list of pre-designated employees of various departments (shift-

wise) must be available at these points so that roll call could be taken. Pre-designated persons

would take charge of these points and mark presence as the people come into it.

7.5 Operational Systems During Emergency

7.5.1 Communication System

There are different types of alarms to differentiate one type of an emergency from other as

described below:

Fire or Gas Normal Fire Siren

Emergency/Evacuation High-pitched wailing Siren

Alarms should be followed by an announcement over Public Address System (PAS). In case of

failure of alarm system, communication should be by telephone operator who will make

announcement in industrial complex through Public Address System which should be installed. If

everything fails, a messenger could be used for sending the information.

7.5.2 Warning System & Control

The Control Centers should be located at an area of the minimum risk or vulnerability in the

premises concerned, taking into account the wind direction, areas which might be affected by

fire/explosion, toxic releases, etc.

For promptness and efficiency, the factory premises/storage sites may be divided into ‘X’ number

of zones, which should be clearly marked on the site plan.



Emergency Services - Under this, each factory should describe the facilities of fire-fighting,

first-aid and rescue. Alternate sources of power supply for operating fire pumps,

communication with local bodies, fire brigade, etc. Should also be clearly indicated.

An adequate number of external and internal telephone connections should be installed.

A plan or plans of the works to illustrate-

a. Areas with large inventories of hazardous material.

b. Sources of safety equipment.

c. Fire-hydrant system and alternate supply sources.

d. Stock of other fire-fighting materials.

e. Assembly points, first-aid centres.

f. Surrounding habitation within 1/ 2 km distance.

g. Availability of first-aid equipment.

7.5.3 Mutual Aid

It is essential to have mutual aid arrangements as it is useful in cases of major fire and other

emergencies. Mutual aid arrangements are to be worked out in the plan to facilitate additional help

in say, fire-fighting or medical attention which might be beyond the capacity of an individual

factory/unit. To make the mutual aid plan a success, the following are considered essential:

Written procedure which spells out how call for help will be made and how it will be

responded.

The type of equipment which would be used and procedure for making replacement.

A quick hot-line method of communication.

A brief mention of the type of hazard in each plant and fire-fighting measures.

Orientation and joint training program for staff.

Joint inspections and drills.

7.6 Disaster Management Plan

Emergency prevention through good design, operation, maintenance and inspection are essential to

reduce the probability of occurrence and consequential effect of such eventualities. The overall

objective of the DMP/Emergency Response Plan (ERP) is to make use of the combined resources

at the site and outside services to achieve the following.

Localize the emergency on property and people

Minimize effects on property and people

Effective rescue and medical treatment

Evacuation.

A disastrous event strikes suddenly, violently and without warning. Identifying the potential

hazards ahead of time and advance planning can reduce the dangers of serious injury, loss of life

and damage to environment in the event of an incident occurrence.

The first response to a disaster is the job of the local government’s emergency services with the

help from the nearby municipalities and the volunteer service agencies. In a catastrophic disaster



only the govt. can provide the rescue search on the disaster site, resumption of electric power,

food, water, medicines, cloths, shelter and other basic human needs. It is the long term recovery

phase of disaster which places the most severe financial strain to govt. in-addition to damage to

public facilities and infrastructure. It takes longer time to get aid from the govt. for rescue work

when there is a natural calamity because of various constraints such as reaching the site, priority of

personnel involved, availability of material, equipment and rescue team personnel etc. It is always

advisable to develop teams within the organization for taking immediate rescue action if possible.

Industry has to prepare a detailed disaster control measures and give information such as the

quantity of hazardous material stored, the location of storage, the approximate population living in

the vicinity and the detail of the hazardous characteristic of the material to the Employees, District

Collector, Police, Fire service department, Director of Factories, State Pollution control Board and

the Public living in the vicinity regularly to enable the government to prepare the disaster

management plan. Educate employees and the public living in the vicinity the safety measures

required to be taken in the event of an accident taking place.

What are the types of disasters that can occur in a hazardous waste management site?

An earth quake leading to damage of liner and contamination of soil and ground water due

to leakage of chemicals, waste material and leachate.

Cyclone leading to flood water entering landfill site contamination of ground water and

soil.

Major explosion of chemicals fire and toxic gas release.

Contamination of soil and water sources due to leakage of contaminants from the landfill

waste or due to leakage of leachate.

Release of dangerous gases from the incinerator affecting the public in the vicinity.

7.6.1 An earthquake

During site selection stage based on the past seismic metrological data / reports earth quake prone

areas have to be avoided. Cover the site with public liability insurance as per the advice of

government. Design building to withstand minor shocks of earth quake without damage to

structures.

Maintain inventory of material and the location of stock on day today basis and submit the report

to disaster management authority (district collector) and the state pollution control board weekly /

monthly also maintain parallel record at H.O.

Maintain MSDS of stored materials toxicity of gases that can emanate due to reactions of stored

materials including the landfill material. Provide communication facilities internal and with people

living in the vicinity. Educate the employees and the surrounding peoples about the possible

dangers in case of an earthquake and the safety measures required to be taken.

Take preventive action of stopping work activities, informing and evacuating employees and the

public living in the vicinity to safe location as per the advice of government agency if there is an

advance earth quake warning from the agencies.



After an earth quake (if the site is affected), Inform disaster management authorities and state

pollution control board authorities over phone, e-mail or through messenger. Display Phone

Numbers of: District Collector, Police S.P, Fire Service Department, Factories Inspectorate and

nearby Hospitals. Inform company authorities through phone: Phone numbers: Project Head, EHS

Head, HR Head. Inform the insurance authorities about the incident. Phone Numbers: Local

Insurance officer and Divisional Manager

Test the nearby water sources and soil for contamination and the extent of damage and compare

data with the base data. If found contaminated, Inform public of the affected area not to use water

from the wells or bore wells through mobile public announcement system and by using media like

radio and TV. Arrange supply of drinking water from outside till the condition is normalized.

Use the services of the lab and expertise of pollution board and find solutions to arrest the leakage

of material and leachate and start remedial measures.

Divert material required for lining and transfer skilled employees for new pit construction from

other site along with additional number of equipments. Construct new pit and start transfer landfill

material / leachate in to the new pit. Test the soil contamination level and find out the level of

damage and treat the soil if required or remove the contaminated soil and safely transfer it in the

new land fill.

Check the water contamination level and advise authorities and public about the usability of water.

Asses the expenditure required for implementation of required remedial measures. Prepare cost

estimate of the total loss including the transport and remediation cost. Make insurance claim and

pay compensation if any advised by the govt. authorities to the affected victims.

7.6.2 Cyclone leading to land fill flood Control measures during planning and operation:

During site selection and approval of the site for hazardous waste disposal and should highlight the

history / possibility of cyclone / Floods, Tsunami in the particular area. If it falls in any of the

above better avoid usage of that site, for hazardous waste handling and storage.

Maintain base line data of quality of water and soil at least one year before start of site activities.

Check the possibility of breach of an upland water pond / tank or dam which can cause flood

before finalizing the location. Design buildings as per national building code to withstand for the

maximum wind speed experienced by the region without damage.

Cover the site with public liability insurance as per government advice. Check the maximum

rainfall in the location and the possibility of rain water entry from outside in to the site. Arrest the

outside water entry by raising the ground level or by constructing bund wall / compound wall and

providing proper drains along the boundary.

Ensure the storm water drainage system is well designed and maintained to drain storm water from

the site to outside drains and is sufficient to drain rain or flood water without allowing it to

accumulate near landfill. Maintain waste storage and landfill level above the drain level.



Ensure the leachate ponds capacity is sufficient and will not over flow due to rain water collection.

Get the warning advice from the weather forecasting department regularly. Stop all activities of

land fill and cover the land fill with liners regularly to prevent rain water contact with the waste

material before the start of rain fall. If possible provide temporary bund wall with sand bags to

reduce the damage to landfill bund due to the flowing water. Evacuate the place and move to safe

location as per the advice.

After the occurrence

Check the extent of contamination and damage to ground water source and the soil after the flood

and compare data with base data. Inform disaster management authorities and state pollution

control board authorities if contamination is detected through phone or through messenger. Phone

Numbers. Inform company authorities over phone. Phone numbers: Project Manager, HR

manager, EHS manager

Inform public of the affected area not to use water from the wells or bore wells through mobile

public announcement and by using media like radio and TV. Arrange supply of drinking water

from outside till the condition is normalized. Continuously test and monitor the soil and ground

water sources and advise public the condition regularly.

Check the soil contamination level if necessary start remedial action as per the advice of pollution

board. Plan for removing the contaminated soil and fill it in a new land fill pit.

Inform insurance company over phone. Phone Numbers: Assess the damage, prepare and submit

estimate of damage and claim insurance. If necessary relocate the affected public to an unaffected

site.

7.6.3 Major explosion of chemicals / fire and toxic gas release in landfill or Stores Control

measures during planning:

Analyze material samples before accepting the materials for disposal. Ensure material samples

collected and analyzed before taking the material inside the premises. Explosive materials should

not be accepted without treatment and check the incoming materials using an explosive meter.

Ensure good covered storage space available for incinerable waste material. Storage is well

ventilated to prevent accumulation and concentration of gases below explosive and flammable

limit. Install gas detectors and explosive level meters with early warning alarm. Avoid electric

fittings in flammable material storages use flame proof materials if felt essential.

Compartmentalize storage to limit the stock quantity and risk of fire spread. Locate incinerable

waste storages away from heat source and hot furnace areas.

Provide communication facility and sufficient number of security personal for 24 hours manual

watching.

Installation of smoke detection and warning and automatic fire hydrant with foam monitors,

automatic sprinklers, mist sprays and CO2 flooding system in incinerable waste storage will help a



lot in early detection and automatic fire fighting. Provide separate storage for reactive chemicals.

Provide spark proof equipments to handle solvent waste containers.

Ensure sufficient gap between storage sheds are maintained as per national building code to

prevent fire spread and easy movement of fire vehicles around the storage during an emergency.

Wind socks with wind speed indicators are installed in the site to see the wind direction from any

location. Lightning arrestors are installed to cover the whole site. Employ only qualified and

trained employees to supervise the storage activities.

Operation:

Ensure public liability insurance cover is in force for the site. Plan for the disposal of Low flash

point material immediately on arrival and minimize inventory of low flash point materials and

flammable materials. Reactive materials are separated and stored away from the flammable

materials store. Display No smoking warning boards around the waste material storages. Do not

allow any source of heat or spark in material storage.

Ensure static electricity is discharged from material containers by bonding the containers. Maintain

sufficient gap between stack for inspection and also for better ventilation. Do not use mechanical

handling equipments which produce sparks or static electricity.

Use spark proof equipment while handling low flash point and waste containing solvents. Ensure

good housekeeping is maintained in and around storage. Maintain record of quantity of material

stock and the MSDS of material in each shed for giving required information to disaster

management team on arrival at site. Install and maintain sufficient number of appropriate first aid

fire appliances and ensure the approach way is not blocked.

Train all the employees in first aid, fire fighting and the procedures to be followed in case of an

emergency. Replace leaky containers and clean spillage immediately. Remember inhaling gas

generated due to a fire or explosion is dangerous. Use of Self contained breathing apparatus

(SCBA) is mandatory for all rescue and fire fighting work in case of an explosion or fire. Check

the wind direction and inform everyone to stand on the upwind direction through public address

system or through phones. Advice evacuation of people at site and surrounding if found necessary.

Try and put off fire with the help of available hand appliances, fire hydrant water using internal

trained employees. Bring all available fire fighting appliances and also get help from nearby

industries in control and rescue operations only if they are trained and have the required PPE to

carry out the work safely. Phone Numbers of nearby industries: If the fire is found very major

leave it to professionals to deal with it.

Inform state fire and police department about the disaster through phone or through messenger.

Display Phone Numbers: Nearby Fire station, Police station at many locations. Inform company

authorities through phone. Phone Numbers: Use SCBA and rescue affected employees to safe

location and if necessary give first aid with the help of trained first aider.



Remember to wash with cool water in case of burn injury or chemical spills on human body and

eye at least for 15minits before shifting the victim to hospital. Measure the gas pollution level in

the environment and advice concerned. Inform disaster management authorities and state pollution

control board authorities through phone or through messenger. Phone Number; District collector,

Police. Inform nearby hospitals the possible gas that can release from the incident for quick

treatment.

Call additional ambulance if felt necessary the site controller will direct concerned department to

arrange without delay. Provide FIRST AID to the affected victim before moving them to hospitals.

Send the victims to hospital with their personal data and their medical history while sending for

treatment. Measure the contamination level of air and soil and report to authorities. Initiate

remedial measures such as supply of drinking water and measure air contamination level regularly

till the condition normalizes.

If felt necessary, Inform public living near the affected area to evacuate through public

announcement and by using media like radio and TV the direction of escape route and advise them

to use wet cloth to cover the nose while moving. Put off fire using the fire hydrant water and foam

compound or with the help of fire extinguisher.

Use Self Contained Breathing Apparatus and Collect gas samples analyze the type of gas emanated

and the toxicity level.

Inform Fire service and police personnel about the potential of the gas emanated due to the

reaction promptly. Block the road traffic at least 5 km distance depending on the toxicity of the gas

and the wind speed to prevent exposure of more number of public.

Provide first aid to burn injuries by pouring cool water before shifting the victim to hospital: Phone

Number of Hospitals: Shift the gas affected victims to well ventilated area and provide breathing

oxygen. Transport the affected to the hospitals with the advice of the possible name of gas inhaled

by the victim.

Check the extent of damage to the liners if any and arrange for immediate repair based on the

need. Prepare report of the incident and investigate and find out the root cause of accident. Inform

insurers about the incident. Estimate the loss incurred and make the insurance claim and pay for

the actual expenses inquired for treatment and compensation for the victim or the family members

of the victim.

7.6.4 Contamination of soil and water sources due to leakage of contaminants

Control measures:

First and the foremost are to collect soil and water samples from the site before starting operations

and establish the base line data. Cover the site with public liability insurance.

Make sure that the preparation of landfill pits done as per the laid out standard. Special care is

taken while laying the liners such as visual check for damage of liner material and proper welding

of joints to ensure that the leakage of leachate from the liner is absolutely nil also by conducting

leak proof tests ultrasonic or X-ray tests.



Avoid damage of liners during land fill operation by the use of sharp edged objects such as cutting

knives, dropping of crow bars and by moving heavy vehicle on the liners. Contamination of water

and soil due to leakage of leachate from the liners / due to over flowing from leachate ponds

especially during rainy season spillage while pumping or spillage during handling operation to be

avoided.

Flooring of material stores should not have cracks and should not allow seepage of material. The

floor should be provided with bund wall and collection pit.

Periodic checking of soil and water samples and compare data with base line data at least once a

month. If any adverse increase in parameters noticed increase the frequency of tests. Prepare

comparative analysis data if found more, than the base line data inform the pollution board

authorities.

After the incident:

If the operation is continued the condition is going to be disastrous after some time. Hence it is

necessary to initiate corrective measures as per the advice of the pollution control board. Follow

the corrective measures mentioned after an earth quake and flood.

7.6.5 Release of toxic gases from incinerator

Control Measures:

Ensure public liability insurance cover is taken for the site. Analyze the combination of waste

material that is proposed to be burned and check the possibility of toxic gas generation and get the

written report from lab before start feeding the waste material in the incinerator.

Install wind socks and wind speed monitor at site visible from all points. Employ qualified and

well trained operators to operate the incinerator. Maintain the temperatures of gases at locations as

per the incinerator operation instruction. Install instruments to detect and warn operators before the

toxicity level reaches higher than the statute limit.

Monitor the toxic content levels at the chimney exhaust continuously during the operation. If any

changes in parameters of gases noticed during the operation stop feeding the material and inform

the lab manager immediately and take corrective measures. Reanalyze the sample and decide the

combination of materials before restart.

Maintain the record of changes made for future reference. Inform the employees and the public

living in the vicinity about the safety measures required to be taken in case of an accidental

release.

After an incident:

Evacuate everyone from the site and the vicinity to safe place. Additional care to be taken while

evacuating, sick, old, infants and physically challenged persons. Detect the gas that is generated by

analyzing the gas and its toxicity level. Provide first aid to victims by removing them to safe and

well ventilated area. If necessary send the victim for treatment with information of the type of gas

victim is exposed to.

If necessary make insurance claim and meet the expenses.



7.7 Hazard Control Measures

7.7.1 Fire

To increase the level of safety in proposed project, installation of smoke alarms or automatic fire

detection /alarm systems will be proposed at strategic locations as an early warning of fire to the

occupants.

To prevent fire mishaps and to manage the emergency situation during fire in the proposed project

the following activities and precautions are proposed.

Emergency evacuation plan is important for all projects, and the same will be prepared as

per Fire & Safety rules.

Regular mock drills will be carried out to create awareness on procedures to be followed

in times of emergency situation/evacuation

It will be advised to keep oxygen cylinders, medical kits and masks to prevent smoke

inhalation especially for those with respiratory disorders for whom smoke inhalation can

be very dangerous.

Plant manager will be advised to ensure that the fire fighting equipments are in good

working conditions.

The plant will be provided with sufficient fire fighting gadgets (water, soil, cylinders, etc).

Simple steps to be followed during emergency are as follows.

Call the fire rescue department: During fire in plant, leave the premises by nearest available

exit. Call fire department and do not assume anyone else has called the fire department. If your

cloth catches fire, do not get panic or run, stop, drop and roll.

Cover your nose and mouth with a wet clean cloth: Stay calm cover your nose and mouth with

a wet, clean cloth to prevent smoke inhalation injury and choking. Never jump off or attempt to

climb down the side of a tall structure as it will mean certain death.

Do not run: During a fire, smoke containing poisonous gases such as CO tends to rise up. When

you run in a smoke filled room, you tend to inhale the smoke faster. CO dulls the senses and

prevents clear thinking, leading to panic. To prevent being asphyxiated, dip tissues or cloth in

water and cover your noise with it.

Head-count of the occupants: During an emergency, make good use of the evacuation procedure

and help each other to reach out of plant/building safely. Ensure nobody is left behind by doing a

head-count of occupants. Visitors should read and understand the evacuation plan before going

into the plant/building area and ensure their safety.

7.7.2 Natural Disasters

Disasters occur without notice. Most disasters are natural such as earthquake, floods, hurricanes,

sandstorms, landslides, tsunamis and volcanoes. We have no way of stopping them, but we can

learn to deal with the difficult situations that arise due to them.



During disasters like floods, fire, earth quake, landslides, rescue beings at site. Even before

external help arrives, people affected by the disasters help each other.

The government and many voluntary organizations send teams of workers trained in rescue

operations to disaster-affected areas. These teams join hands with the local community helpers

such as doctors, nurses, social workers and policemen.

Temporary shelters are built for displaced people. Doctors and nurses provide medical aid. They

treat the wounded and work to control epidemics. Social workers collect food and cloth from all

over the country for the disaster-affected people. The police maintain law and order. Media –

persons help in spreading news about the victims and their conditions. They also post

advertisements that urge people to donate for victims.

In extreme conditions, the army and Air force organize rescue operations. They clear roads, send

medical teams and help to move people to safer places. The air force drops food, water and clothes

in the affected areas. Organization like UN helps in providing aid during massive disasters.

Individually, people from all over the world also come forward to help during a disaster. They

donate blood while many donate money. Some even reach the disaster affected places to give an

extra hand in the rescue operation. Families adopt children who have lost their parents and thus

give them a new home.

Some of the points we can keep in mind when disaster happens

If there is a tornado, take shelter in a place without windows.

In an earthquake, remember to crouch under some heavy furniture or stand under the

doorframe for cover.

In case of a fire in the building, leave the building by nearby exit

If the site is flooded, then climb up to the roof.

Do not use the telephone, except to call for help, so as to leave telephone lines free for the

organization of response

Listen to the messages broadcast by radio and the various media so as to be informed of

development

Carry out the official instructions given over the radio or by loudspeaker

Keep a emergency kit ready. In all the different types of emergency, it is better to be

prepared than to get ready, to get information so as to get organized, to wait rather that act

too hastily

During floods turn off electricity to reduce the risk of electrocution

As soon as flood begins, take vulnerable people (old, children, sick, etc) to upper floor

Beware of water contamination, wait until the water is declared safe before drinking or

boil the water before drinking

Clean and disinfect the room that is flooded

During storms and hurricanes do not go out in a car or a boat once the storm has been

announced

If caught outside in a storm, take refuge as quickly as possible in shelter (never under a

tree), if there is no shelter, lie down flat in a ditch.



In a thunderstorm keep away from doors, windows, and electrical conductors, unplug

electrical appliances and aerials. Do not use any electrical appliances or the telephone

During earthquake keep calm, do not get panic, People who are indoors should stay there

but move to the central part of the building, people who are outside should stay there,

keeping away from buildings to avoid collapsing walls and away from electrical cables.

Anyone in a vehicle should park it, keeping away from bridges and buildings

During spread of clouds of toxic fumes, close doors and windows, seal any cracks or gaps

around windows and doors with adhesive tape. Organize a reserve of water (by filling

wash basins, baths, etc. Turn off ventilators and air conditioners.

7.7.3 Electrical Accidents

Electrical hazards can cause burns, shocks, and electrocution which can lead to serious injury and

even death. When dealing with potentially serious electrical hazards stop and think! Instead of

taking a chance and risking your personal safety, call trained professionals to handle problems.

Many times people prefer to take electrical matters into their own hands. Other small aspects of

electrical repair in a business setting may be taken care of without needing professional service

technicians. If you do decide to take matters into your own hands, safety precautions can avoid

injuries and other losses.

7.7.3.1 Prevention of Electrical Accidents

Flexible cords connected to appliance should be wired to confirm to the international color code.

Color of insulation wire is

Brown represents live wire,

Blue represents neutral wire and

Green/yellow stripes represent earth wire.

What you should look for when selecting an electrical appliance are given below

a. The appliance should be suitable for operation on local electrical supply of 240 volts AC

and frequency of 50 Hz.

b. The appliance should preferably be tested and certified by a national or reputed standards

testing authority

c. Look for certified plugs on the flexible cords connected to the appliances. If the appliance

is double insulated and has a 2-pin plug, then it should be fitted with a suitable certified

plug.

d. An essential formality when buying any appliances is a duly completed guarantee card

with the dealers/retailer's official stamp and details of the appliance (serial number, etc.).

Safety precautions to be taken when using electrical appliances

a. Avoid using handheld appliances when your hand and/or body are wet.

b. Do not use or leave appliances where liquid can splash onto them.

c. Flexible cords connecting the appliance and the plug should be in good condition, if the

cord is frayed, chaffed, cut or melted, have the entire cord replaced by a competent person.



d. Check accessories such as plugs attached to appliances for cracks and burnt marks and

have them replaced. If undue overheating occurs or burnt marks appear in any electrical

appliance, have it checked.

Some common causes of electrical accidents in the house

a. Faulty wiring: This usually occurs when unauthorized extension or rewiring is done by

unqualified persons. Some of the usual faults are the omission of earth wires and the

reversing of the live and neutral wires. Without an earth wire, the exposed metal parts of

appliances may deliver a lethal shock to the user when a fault develops.

b. Improper flexible cords: This can be caused by connecting the flexible cord wrongly to the

plug. In the case of appliances which have exposed metallic parts, a 2-core instead of a 3-

core flexible cord is used. When the appliance is faulty, the exposed metal parts may

become live and a fatal accident could result.

c. Faulty appliance: Attempts to repair faults in electrical appliances by people not trained to

do so can result in accidental shock.

To prevent Electrical accidents, the following points should be kept in mind:

All electrical wiring, rewiring or extension work must be carried out by licensed electrical

contractors. On completion, the contractors should test before electricity supply is

connected.

Repair of appliances and replacement of flexible cords should be carried out only by

competent persons.

To ensure electrical safety in the facility, a current-operated Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker

(ELCB) or Residual Current Circuit Breaker (RCCB) set to operate at a very small leakage

current is recommended. (This is usually marked 100 mA or 0.1 A on the label). In case of

dangerous electrical leakage to earth, it should automatically cur off the supply of

electricity.

DO NOT use multi-way adaptors. Over loading can cause fire. One socket outlet is for one

appliance only.

DO NOT carry out wiring extension, Engage a licensed wiring contractor for the work.

DO NOT use a two-way lighting adaptor for any extension.

DO NOT connect any electrical appliance to lighting outlets. A lighting outlet does not

have an earth wire to prevent danger.

ENSURE the switch is in "OFF" position before changing bulbs.

DO NOT make joints to lengthen the lead of the electrical appliances. If the lead wire is

worn out or too short, replace it with a new wire.

DO NOT drive nails carelessly on the wall. There may be concealed wiring.

USE individual socket outlet for every electrical appliance.

KEEP AWAY from danger areas such as a substation for whatsoever reasons.

CHECK before carrying out excavation work to prevent damaging any underground cable.

The operator may receive severe electric shock or even be electrocuted.

TAKE PRECAUTION when working in the vicinity of overhead lines to avoid any

unforeseen incident.

DO NOT meddle with any broken overhead wire. Report the matter immediately to the

nearest electric office.

DO NOT climb any electric pole. You may receive an electric shock or get electrocuted.



DO NOT throw anything onto the overhead lines.

NEVER attempt to retrieve anything stuck to overhead lines by whatever means.

DO NOT climb transmission line towers. No one is safe from its high voltage shock.

DO NOT erect any structure close to transmission lines.

DO NOT fly kites close to overhead lines.

TAKE PRECAUTION when working in the vicinity of overhead lines to avoid any

unforeseen incident.

NEVER stand on a damp or wet surface when using electrical equipment.

USE a portable electrical tool, which is properly earthed.

DO NOT tap electrical power without a proper plug.

DO NOT use any electrical tool which has a damaged casing, cap, switch , lead or plug.

7.7.3.2 First Aid and Emergency Procedures

Burns can cause due acid spillage and leakage of electricity. Curative measures for any issues of

burns and First Aid procedures are given below:

Table 7.7 First Aid for Burns

Burns Covering Small Area Burns Covering Extensive Area

i. Allow cold tap water to run gently over

the area or immerse in cold water.

ii. It may be necessary to cover with gauze

or a clean handkerchief, and bandage.

i. Allow person to lie down.

ii. Cover burned areas with sterile dressing

or clean cloth and lightly bandage.

iii. If clothing is adhering, do not disturb;

leave the clothing alone.

iv. Keep person warm. If person is not

nauseated, he may have sips of water.

v. Arrange for immediate medical care.

Note:

Do not user ointments, greases, pastes or powder on burned area.

Do not prick the blisters caused by burns.

Tetanus Immunization - Protection against tetanus should be considered whenever the skin is

broken by injuries

7.8 Full Mock Drill Monitoring

The mock drills are to be conducted at regular intervals. For conducting mock drills a committee

has to be organized.

The committee may invite any other official/expert, if considered necessary.

7.8.1 Steps of Mock Drills

The Mock Drills should be carried out step by step as stated below.

First Step : Test the effectiveness of communication system.

Second Step : Test the speed of mobilization of the emergency teams.

Third Step : Test the effectiveness of search, rescue and treatment of

Casualties.



Fourth Step : Test Emergency isolation and shut down and remedial measures taken

on the system.

Fifth Step : Conduct a full rehearsal of the actions to be taken during an

emergency.

The Disaster Management Plan should be periodically revised based on experience gained from

the Mock Drill.

7.9 Geological Studies

7.9.1 Introduction

Evaluation of surface and sub-surface geological conditions and its behavior towards

environmental aspects is one of the important factors for systematic planning of a construction

project. Considering this, detailed studies were conducted within the proposed site at Kakkireni

village, Ramannapeta mandal, Nalgonda district, Telangana. This chapter is dealing with the

general conditions of the site & methodology and results of Electrical Resistivity tests.

7.9.2 Objectives

Study of the Geological and Hydrogeological conditions inside study area and its

surroundings.

Characterization of various Geological formations and their disposition in the 72 Acres of

land.

Detailed Geophysical investigations in the study area to decipher the subsurface lithology

and water table.

7.9.3 Site Topography

Topographically the proposed TSDF site area representing an undulated terrain with Minor natural

drains at several locations. The land elevation is progressively increasing from site center to

towards Northeast and Northwest directions. There are two prominent uplands present within the

site. These two uplands are located in the Northeast and northwestern part of the site boundaries. It

is understood from the topographical map of the site, that the Northeastern upland is having a

maximum elevation value of RL 330m. Similarly another upland located in the northwestern

corner of the site is having maximum elevation value of RL 325 m. The lowest elevation within

the site is observed along this natural drain with a RL between 310 and 305m. The overall

elevation difference from lowest to highest is about 15m. The river Musi is following from West to

East at a distance from 8 km from site center. Drainage pattern of the study area is dendritic to sub-

dendritic. Major soil observed in study area is red sandy soil.

7.10 Regional Geology

The district forms a part of the stable southern Indian Peninsular Shield consisting of older

Metamorphics, Peninsulaar Gneissic Complex (PGC), Dharwar Supergroup of Rocks. The

hornblende schists and amphibolites (older metamorphic) which are the oldest rocks occur, as

rafts, enclaves and discontinuous linear bands, within the Peninsular Gneissic complex. The PGC

occupies a major part of the district and comprises migmatitites, granites, granodiorite, tonalite-

trondhjenite suite of rocks and hornblende-biotiteschists. Metabasalt, metarhyolite and banded

haematite quartzite of Dharwar Supergroup are exposed as linear belts near Peddavuru on

Hyderabad-Nagarjunasagar road and also around Fatehpur of Miryalaguda taluk. The PGC and

Dharwar rocks are intruded by younger granites, basic dykes and quartz-pegmatite veins.



In the southern part of the district along the northern bank of the Krishna River the rocks of

Archaean Peninsular Gneissic Complex are un-conformably overlain by sedimentary rocks of

1100-600 m.y.age, constituting the Cuddapah Supergroup and Kurnool Group. The Cuddapah

Supergroup in the district is predominantly made up of arenaceous and argillaceous sediments

respectively, represented by quartzite and shale of Cumbum Formation (Nallamalai Group) and

Srisailam Quartzite. The Kurnool Group of rocks comprises calcareous (chemical precipitates)

sediments and quartzite.

7.10.1 Local Geology

Scheme area forms a part of the stable southern Indian Peninsular Shield consisting of Peninsulaar

Gneissic Complex (PGC), rock boulders are scattered in Northeast and northwestern part of the

site boundaries.

7.11 Geophysical Investigations

Application of Electrical Resistivity Methods will help us for identify the nature and thickness of

subsurface formation by studying the variation of their physical properties through the

measurements made at the surface. Several surface geophysical methods are deployed to reach the

purpose. All these methods rely upon the principle that each lithological assemblage has

independent physical properties. Identification of a property helps to recognize the formation. One

such property easily detectable is its electrical character for the passage of known strength of

current. Hence, geophysical investigations were conducted, at 8 possible locations within the

proposed sites. At every testing location the detailed information was collected up to 35 m depth

from the surface.

There are two popular surface electrical methods in Geophysical investigations namely

Schlumberger and Werner configurations. The Schlumberger method of Electrical Resistivity Test

(ERT) has been used in the present study with the help of a DC resistivity meter.

ERT Studies Conducted in study area



7.11.1 DC Resistivity Meter

The DC Resistivity Meter Model DDR-3 of IGIS make is used in the present geophysical

investigations. It is having features with high quality data acquisition capability as well as for its

field worthiness. The meter consists of two units, a current unit and a potential unit. While the

current unit serves the purpose of sending the required output of constant current, the potential unit

provides an accurate measurement and display of potential resistance values directly over a liquid

crystal display.

The field measurements for DC resistivity investigations basically involves sending a known

strength of current into the ground through the current electrodes and observing the resulting

voltage across the potential electrodes, to get the resistance values. The instrument has the facility

to provide the operator the direct readout of these resistance values on liquid crystal display.

Figure.7.2 Show the Resistivity Meter used in the present study.

7.11.2 Electrical Resistivity Tests (ERT)

Resistivity sounding is a process, in which depth investigation is made. In this, the center of the

configuration (o) is kept fixed and measurements are made by successively increasing electrode

spacing. The apparent resistivity values obtained with increasing values of electrode separations

are used to estimate the thickness and resistivity of the subsurface formations. The plot between

apparent resistivity and the distance between any two successive electrodes separation is used for

analysis of thickness and true resistivity of the subsurface formations.

The resistivity data is to be interpreted (analyzed) in terms of physical parameters viz., resistivity

and thickness of the formations and these parameters in-turn, along with hydro-geological

information are to be used to infer the nature of subsurface formations. In the present study

Inverse Slope method of interpretation is used to interpret the data acquired from the field.

Figure.7.2 DC Resistivity Meter Model DDR-3



7.11.3 Methodology

In Geo-electrical methods, current is sent into the ground through a pair of electrodes called

current electrodes and resulting potential difference across the ground is measured with the help of

another pair of electrodes called potential electrodes. The ratio between the potential difference

(V) and the current (I) gives the resistance (R), which depends on the electrode arrangement and

on the resistivity of the subsurface formations.

In Schlumberger configuration, all the four electrodes are kept in a line. The outer electrode

spacing is kept large, compared to the inner electrode spacing, usually more than 5 times. Field

resistance values will be obtained at every change of electrode spacing for calculating apparent

resistivity values. The disposition of electrodes for Schlumberger configuration is shown in

Figure 7.3 and the apparent resistivity a for a specified configuration is computed with below

mentioned formula.

Figure 7.3 Schlumberger configuration

a = k R

Where ‘k’ is the constant = [(AB/2)2 – (MN/2)

2] MN

‘AB’ is current electrode spacing and

‘MN’ is potential electrode spacing

R = V / I



7.11.4 Test Results

The Resistivity Information collected from the 10 selected ERT points located in the proposed site

was analyzed/ interpreted using inverse slope software. Figure.7.4 gives the location map of all

ERT points conducted within the site. Based on the obtain results, it is understood that the entire

study area representing uniformity of hard rock. Weathered rock is observed along with seasonal

stream, its developed due to rocks were subjected to Arial and Sub Arial weathering conditions.

Basically the country rock is granitic gneisses belonging to Peninsular Gneissic Complex (PGC).

Rock boulders are scattered in Northeast and northwestern part of the site boundaries.

Based on the electrical resistivity results, 6 projected sub-surface litho logical cross-sections, 5

individual litho logs, & fence diagram were generated. Figure.7.4 represents the location map of

ERT Tests and Figure.7.5 Index map of cross-section lines and the litho logical cross-sections

were presented from Figure.7.6 to Figure. 7.11 Similarly Figure.7.12 to Figure.7.16 represents

the individual litho-logs of each individual ERT point. Figure 7.17 represents Fence diagram of

studyarea.



Figure 7.4 Location Map of Electrical Resistivity Tests Conducted Within the Study Area



Figure 7.5 Index Map of Cross Section Generated Within the Study Area



Figure.7.6 litho logical cross-sections covering ERT No 10, 1&2



Figure.7.11 litho logical cross-sections covering ERT No 8&2



Figure.7.12 litho-logs of ERT No 1&2 Figure 7.13 litho-logs of ERT No 3&4



Figure 7.14 litho-logs of ERT No 5&6 Figure 7.15 litho-logs of ERT No 7&8



Figure 7.16 litho-logs of ERT No 9&10



Figure 7.17 Fence Diagram



7.12 Surface Soil Infiltration Tests

Infiltration is one of the characteristic properties of soil. Water entering into the soil at the surface

is called infiltration. Infiltration rate is dependent upon the nature and proportion of clay and sand,

the type of vegetation, the granularity, angularity and texture of sand. Infiltration rates are high in

sandy soils and low in clayey soils. In order to evaluate the infiltration capacity of the site two

Surface soil infiltration tests were conducted at two representative locations. Figure.7.19 gives the

location of these tests.

Figure 7.18 Surface Soil Infiltration Test using Double Ring Infiltrometer



Figure 7.19 Location Map of Infiltration Tests Conducted within study Area



7.12.1 Theory

Water entering the soil at the surface is called Infiltration. The Infiltration rate ‘f” at any time‘t’ is

given by Horton’s equation.

F = fc + (fo – fc) e-kt

Where

fo = Initial rate of infiltration capacity at time to

fc = Final constant rate of infiltration at saturation

k = A constant depending primarily upon the soil and vegetation it is equal to

fo – fc

Fc

e = base of natural Logarithm = 2.71828

Fc = Shaded area in Fig.

For any two points x, y on the curve against time t1, t2 and infiltration rates f1, f2

log(f1-f2) - log(f2-fc)

Rate of infiltration ‘k’ =

Log (t2 – t1)

7.12.2 Methodology

Infiltration tests were conducted by adopting Double Ring Infiltrometer method. In this method

two rings of 15 cm and 7 cm diameter are driven into ground so that they penetrate into soil

uniformly without any tilt or undue disturbance of soil surface up to a depth of about 5 cm, after

driving is completed, soil disturbed adjacent to the sides is tamped gently. Clean water is poured

into rings to maintain depth of about 15 cm water column in both the inner and outer rings. Fall in

water column inside the ring is recorded periodically at close intervals of 2/5 minutes in the

beginning and increased interval of 10/15 minutes subsequently. Water is added immediately after

each measurement into both the rings to maintain original constant depth of 15 cm. Fall of water

level between two successive readings and total fall of water level from the beginning of the test at

each time is estimated.

The infiltration rate in the beginning of the test is high. After the soil attains saturation the rate

decreases and stabilizes at a fixed rate. The infiltration rates in cm/hr to all elapsed time readings

Time ‘t’ in minutes

Infi

ltra

tio

n r

ate

cm

/hr

fc

f0

f1

f2

t1 t2 15 20 5 10 25 30 0

1

2

3

4

5

Figure 7.20 Soil Infiltration Curve



are calculated. The infiltration rates (cm/hr) against the elapsed time (minutes) are drawn on

coordinate graph. A fitted straight line is the final infiltration curve. The rate per day is estimated

using the graph.

7.12.3 Results

The observed infiltration values are moderate at beginning stage and low at the ending. The field

data was analyzed and the results are indicating the infiltration capacity is between 7.33 Cm/hr and

8.83 Cm/hr. The details of infiltration results are tabulated below.

Results of infiltration tests

Test ID Rate of Infiltration

m/day Cm/day Cm/hr Cm/sec

INF-01 7.35 735.0 30.6 0.510

INF-02 8.83 882.7 36.8 0.613

INF-03 7.33 733.4 30.6 0.509



SOIL INFILTRATION TEST-1

Duration of time

in minutes for

each Filling

Time elapsed

since test started

(T) minutes

Fall in water

Column(h) in cm

for time (t) in

minutes

Cumulative fall

In water column

(H) in cm for

time (T) in

minutes

Infiltration rate

in Cm/hr

[H/T*60

minutes]

2 2 1 1 30.0

2 4 0.5 1.5 22.5

2 6 0.5 2 20.0

2 8 0.1 2.1 15.8

2 10 0.1 2.2 13.2

5 15 0.2 2.4 9.6

5 20 0.2 2.6 7.8

5 25 0.2 2.8 6.7

5 30 0.2 3 6.0

10 40 0.3 3.3 5.0

10 50 0.3 3.6 4.3

10 60 0.2 3.8 3.8

10 70 0.2 4 3.4

10 80 0.2 4.2 3.2

10 90 0.2 4.4 2.9

0.0

5.0

10.0

15.0

20.0

25.0

30.0

35.0

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90

Infi

ltra

tio

n R

ate

(cm

/hr)

Time Elapsed (Min)

Soil Infiltration Test -01 (TSDF Nalgonda)




Duration of time

in minutes for

each Filling

Time elapsed since

test started (T)

minutes

Fall in water

Column(h) in cm for

time (t) in minutes

Cumulative fall In

water column (H)

in cm for time (T)

in minutes

Infiltration rate

in Cm/hr

[H/T*60

minutes]

2 2 1.2 1.2 36.0

2 4 0.9 2.1 31.5

2 6 0.9 3 30.0

2 8 0.8 3.8 28.5

2 10 0.8 4.6 27.6

5 15 1.4 6 24.0

5 20 0.9 6.9 20.7

5 25 0.6 7.5 18.0

5 30 0.4 7.9 15.8

10 40 0.3 8.2 12.3

10 50 0.3 8.5 10.2

10 60 0.2 8.7 8.7

10 70 0.2 8.9 7.6

10 80 0.2 9.1 6.8

10 90 0.2 9.3 6.2

0.0

5.0

10.0

15.0

20.0

25.0

30.0

35.0

40.0

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90

Infi

ltra

tio

n R

ate

(cm

/hr)

Time Elapsed (Min)





Duration of time

in minutes for

each Filling

Time elapsed

since test started

(T) minutes

Fall in water

Column(h) in cm

for time (t) in

minutes

Cumulative fall

In water column

(H) in cm for

time (T) in

minutes

Infiltration rate

in Cm/hr

[H/T*60

minutes]

2 2 1 1 30.0

2 4 0.8 1.8 27.0

2 6 0.8 2.6 26.0

2 8 0.9 3.5 26.3

2 10 0.9 4.4 26.4

5 15 1.2 5.6 22.4

5 20 0.6 6.2 18.6

5 25 0.5 6.7 16.1

5 30 0.5 7.2 14.4

10 40 0.4 7.6 11.4

10 50 0.4 8 9.6

10 60 0.4 8.4 8.4

10 70 0.5 8.9 7.6

10 80 0.5 9.4 7.1

10 90 0.5 9.9 6.6

0.0

5.0

10.0

15.0

20.0

25.0

30.0

35.0

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90

Infi

ltra

tio

n R

ate

(cm

/hr)

Time Elapsed (Min)




7.13 Hydrogeology

The Archaean crystalline rocks, which occupy 90% of the district, comprise granites, gneisses,

schists and intrusives. The consolidated metasedimentary rocks of Cuddapah and Kurnool system

comprising limestones, quartzites and shales occupy 9% in the southern part of the district. The

unconsolidated deposits comprising alluvial sands, clay, occur as isolated and narrow patches

along the major rivers and streams occupying around 1% of the area.

The study area and its surroundings are underlain by crystalline rocks granites, gneisses. The

ground water in these formations occurs in the weathered & fractured zones. Under water table &

semi confined condition respectively. These rocks types do not passes primary porosity. Due to

fractured & weathering they have developed secondary porosity often giving rise to potential

aquifer at depths. The phreatic aquifer is developed by means of open dug wells with depth

ranging from 6-15 m and dug-cum-bore wells up to 60m. The yield of irrigation wells range from

100 to 150 cu.m/day. At places, it is upto 200 cu.m/day.

7.13.1 Natural Drainage

Regionally drainage network of an area is principally governed by the topography of the land,

whether a particular region is dominated by hard or soft rocks, and the gradient of the land. Since

the study areas are located on an upland area with respects to its surrounding environs, one first

order streams originating at this location and forming the most common form of drainage system

called dendritic system. All the existing drains are moving to the down streams and connecting to

the nearest surface streams. There are no major surface tanks and rivers within 2km radius from

site boundary. Most of them are minor tanks connected with the nearest surface streams as

catchment. Whereas one small surface water tank is present in southern side of the site boundary.

It’s almost dry throughout the year; it will be recharged during the rainy season. As per drainage

map there is no seasonal streams flowing from site to nearest surface water tank. The detailed map

of natural drainage system occurring 5km study of proposed site is presented in Figure 7.21. River

Musi is flowing from West to East further South at distance 8 km from site boundary.



Figure: 7.21 Natural Drainage Map of 5 km radius



7.14 Well Inventory

A total 20 observation wells were established in and around the study area covering 10 km radius

for water level. Monitoring for groundwater level was carried out during Dec-2015. List of well

inventoried is given in Table 7.8. The water level contours for the above period indicating the

groundwater flow from NS-EW in the watershed. Ground water contour map for the month of

Dec-2015 is given in Figure 7.22. Depth of water level varied from 18 m to 40 m in water shed

depending on the location of observation well and withdrawal in the area. Groundwater occurs in

phreatic as well as semi confined to confined conditions.

Well Inventory in Shivanigudem Village



Figure 7.22

Depth of water levels



Table 7.8 Wells Inventoried in Surrounding Villages

magl – meters above ground level, mbgl – meters below ground level, bgl – below ground level

Well

No.

Village Coordinates Lat & Long Type of

Well

Dimensions /

Diameter (m)

Measuring Point,

magl.

Total Depth,

mbgl.

Depth to Water,

bgl.

1 Tondalvai 17 15 5.25N, 79 14 18.22E Bore Well 6.5 inch (165 mm) 0.4, E 90 18

2 Chinna Tummalagudem 17 16 49.98N, 79 13 55.98E Bore Well 6.5 inch (165 mm) 0.4, N 100 20

3 kunkuruoamala 17 19 41.9N, 79 14 25.99E Bore Well 6.5 inch (165 mm) 0.6, E 90 21

4 Munigumpalle 17 19 14.93N, 79 09 18.3E Bore Well 6.5 inch (165 mm) 0.3,W 110 20

5 Iskilla 17 17 44.0N,79 09 58.43E Bore Well 6.5 inch (165 mm) 0.4, S 100 24

6 Pilligudem 17 16 34.14N,79 10 34.26E Bore Well 6.5 inch (165 mm) 0.6, E 110 40

7 Kakkireni 17 17 5.88N, 79 12 0.003E Bore Well 6.5 inch (165 mm) 0.6, N 120 18

8 Mandra 17 15 2.91N, 79 11 22.05E Bore Well 6.5 inch (165 mm) 0.4, S 110 26

9 Wanapakala 17 14 37.57N, 79 09 21.5E Bore Well 6.5 inch (165 mm) 0.6, W 140 30

10 Uthatoor 17 16 11.1N, 79 10 1.97E Bore Well 6.5 inch (165 mm) 0.2, N 120 35

11 Shivanigudem 17 15 26.61N, 79 07 44.24E Bore Well 6.5 inch (165 mm) 0.3,E 140 30

12 Chityala 17 13 54.40N, 79 07 49.67E Bore Well 6.5 inch (165 mm) 0.4,E 150 35

13 Dubbak 17 18 57.93N, 79 07 41.22 E Bore Well 6.5 inch (165 mm) 0.2,W 120 18

14 Ennaram 17 19 17.98N,79 12 25.27E Bore Well 6.5 inch (165 mm) 0.2,S 110 20

15 Narkatpalli 17 12 21.04N,79 11 43.20E Bore Well 6.5 inch (165 mm) 0.4,N 150 32

16 Shapelly 17 15 3.64N, 79 16 53.40E Bore Well 6.5 inch (165 mm) 0.4,N 110 21

17 Nakkalapalle 17 17 24.28N, 79 16 24.73E Bore Well 6.5 inch (165 mm) 0.3,N 110 23

18 Pallepahad 17 19 2.31N, 79 16 3.01E Bore Well 6.5 inch (165 mm) 0.2,N 90 20

19 Duppalli 17 22 6.18 N, 79 10 53.54 E Bore Well 6.5 inch (165 mm) 0.4,S 90 19

20 Suraram 17 21 49.97 N,79 13 28.37 E Bore Well 6.5 inch (165 mm) 0.4,S 100 18


7.15 Artificial Recharge

The growing competition for water is increased attention to the use of artificial recharge to

augment ground water supplies. Artificial recharge is a process by which excess surface water is

directed into the ground—either by spreading on the surface, by using recharge wells, or by

altering natural conditions to increase infiltration to replenish an aquifer. Artificial recharge is a

way to store water underground in times of water surplus to meet demand in times of shortage.

Artificial recharge control land subsidence caused by declining ground water levels, maintain base

flow in some streams, and raise water levels to reduce the cost of ground water pumping. It is

useful to think of the entire artificial recharge operation as a water source undergoing a series of

treatment steps during which its composition changes. The constituents of potential concern

depend not only on the character of the source water, but also on its treatment prior to recharge

(pre-treatment), changes that occur as it moves through the soil and aquifer (soil-aquifer

processes), and treatment after withdrawal for use (post-treatment).

CHAPTER 8 PROJECT BENEFITS



CHAPTER 8

PROJECT BENEFITS

8.1 Introduction

The Hazardous Waste (Management & Handling) Rules, 1989 and its subsequent amendments prevent

the industries from dumping their solid wastes indiscriminately. At the same time they permit the

industries to dispose of their wastes in safe & secured manner. It has been made mandatory by the

government to dispose of Hazardous waste in systematic and scientific disposal way and pollution control

boards have been asked to ensure it. For systematic & scientific disposal of solid wastes, a facility has to

be developed where care is to be taken to avoid any negative effects on the environment. Similar is the

case with Bio-medical waste and E-waste.

8.2 Benefits of Hazardous Waste Management

The main benefits of the proposed project are

The proposed project facilitates better management of the industrial hazardous wastes.

It will be the showcase for other districts / states for management of hazardous waste with

additional benefit of green and clean Environment





potential

Possibility for recovery of material can be researched at common site

The management of wastes is relatively easier & economically viable at common facility


In absence of expertise or availability of less expertise this route is confirmed to be most viable

and workable


industries



the region

Competitive advantage in international markets vis-à-vis grading of the products on

environmental consideration

8.3 Benefits of E Waste Recycling

Electronic products are made from valuable resources and highly engineered materials, including metals,

plastics and glass, all of which require energy to mine and manufacture them. Reusing and recycling

consumer electronics conserves our natural resources and avoids air and water pollution, as well as

greenhouse gas emissions that are caused by manufacturing virgin materials.



Recycling of E Waste helps protect the environment in a number of ways. Electronic and electrical items

are made from valuable resources such as precious metals, copper, and plastics all of which require

energy to mine and process. Recovering these materials by recycling avoids the need to mine and process

new materials, which in turn, conserves our natural resources, and avoids air and water pollution and

greenhouse gas emissions. Recovering metals from used E-waste will reduce extraction of raw metals

from the earth.

8.3.1 Materials Recovered from E Waste

Almost all of the materials used to manufacture electronic equipments can be recovered to make new

products. Metals, plastics, and rechargeable batteries from recycled electronic equipment are turned into

new materials and products.

Electronic equipment contain a number of different metals – gold, silver, platinum, palladium, copper, tin,

and zinc – that are recovered in the recycling process. The recovered metals are then used by a number of

different industries such as jewelry, plating, electronics, automotive, and art foundries.

The plastics recovered from the electronic equipment are recycled into plastic components for new

electronic devices or other plastic products such as garden furniture, license plate frames, non-food

containers, and replacement automotive parts. When the rechargeable battery can no longer be reused, the

battery can be recycled into other rechargeable battery products.

8.4 Benefits from Bio Medical Waste

In appropriate treatment and disposal of bio-medical waste contributes to environmental pollution,

uncontrolled burning / incineration causes air pollution, dumping in nallas, tanks and along the river bed

causes water pollution and unscientific land filling cause soil pollution.

The proper bio-medical waste management will help to control nosocomial diseases (hospital acquired

infections), reduce HIV/AIDS, sepsis, and hepatitis transmission from dirty needles and other improperly

cleaned / disposed medical items, control zones (diseases passed to humans through insects, birds, rats

and other animals), prevent illegal repacking and resale of contaminated needles, cut cycles of infection

and avoid negative long-term health effects like cancer, from the environmental release of toxic

substances such dioxin, mercury and others.

8.5 Benefits of Landfill

Landfills minimize the natural impact of solid waste on the environment by the following mechanics:

Isolation of inert waste through containment

Elimination of polluting pathways

8.6 Benefits from Recycling Facilities

Recycling is the process of making or manufacturing new products from a product that has originally

served its purpose. If these used products are disposed off in an appropriate, environmentally friendly



way, the process of recycling has been set in motion. In the proposed project the following recycling

facilities are proposed.

Used Lead Acid Battery Recycling

Used Oil Recycling

Spent Solvents Recycling

Alternate Fuel and Raw material facility

Waste Plastic Recycling

Waste Paper Recycling

Some of the benefits from the above activities are as follows

8.6.1 Used Lead Acid Battery Recycling

Lead is a mineral that has been in use for at least 5000 years. Current statistics reveal Current statistics

reveal approximately 88 % of the batteries were Starting, Lighting & Ignition (SLI) automotive batteries

with a lifespan of about 4 years accompanied by 8% of motive power type with a lifespan of 6 years.

Further, 4 percent were a stationary type with a lifespan of 10 years. Widely researched facts conclude

that 97 percent of the lead recycled was from lead acid batteries. Until couple of years ago, the lead

recycled as a percentage of apparent lead supply, was estimated at 63% with a recycling efficiency of

95%. The rest was from other metal sources including castings, sheet, solders and miscellaneous

fabrications. The main benefits are as follows.

1. Recycled lead is cheaper to produce than virgin lead. Recycled lead takes less than 25% of the

energy required to produce lead from ore extraction.

2. Recycling of lead has a smaller carbon footprint than mining, conserves ore reserves, and reduces

the amount of waste associated with primary extraction

3. A high recycling rate means that there is less opportunity for lead to end up in the waste stream

where it requires would pose a health risk to people.

4. In recent decades, the amount of lead from batteries ending up in landfills has dramatically

decreased, and as a result, overall flow of lead to landfills has dropped markedly.

5. By keeping lead out of landfills, recycling helps conserve landfills, and reduce the need for

investment in controls to eliminate airborne particulate from incineration.

8.6.2 Used Oil Recycling

Many people who are unfamiliar with the importance of recycling used oil are unconsciously harming the

environment by throwing it away with their normal garbage or emptying their used oil into storm drains.

Such actions, especially emptying used oil into storm drains, can cause real harm to the environment. To

put it into perspective, just one gallon of used oil can contaminate 1 million gallons of water.

Recycling used motor oil keeps it out of our rivers, lakes, streams and even the ground water. In many

cases, that means keeping it out of our drinking water, off our beaches, and away from wildlife. We all

share the responsibility of protecting our environment and keeping our waters safe. Recycling used oil

allows us to continue to enjoy what many of us take for granted every day – clean water.



To recycle used oil, processors and refiners remove water, insoluble, dirt, heavy metals, nitrogen,

chlorine, and oxygenated compounds from oil drained from automobiles or other machines. The resulting

product called “refined” oil must meet the same stringent refining, compounding, and performance

standards as virgin oil for use in automotive, heavy duty diesel, and other internal combustion engines,

and hydraulic fluids and gear oils. Extensive laboratory testing and field studies conclude that refined oil

is equivalent to virgin oil it passes all prescribed tests and, in some situations, even outperforms virgin oil.

The same consumers and businesses that use regular oil also can use refined oil, since refining simply

reconditions used oil into new, high-quality lubricating oil. Any vehicle maintenance facilities,

automobile owners, and other machinery maintenance operations that use oil also can use refined oil. In

some cases, fleet maintenance facilities that use large volumes of oil arrange to reuse the same oil that

they send to be refined—a true closed recycling loop. The main benefits of Recycling Oil are given

below.

Recycling used oil keeps it from polluting soil and water.

Motor oil does not wear out—it just gets dirty—so recycling it saves a valuable resource.

Less energy is required to produce a gallon of redefined base stock than a base stock from crude

oil.

8.6.3 Spent Solvent Recycling

Waste solvent recycling means reducing the amount of local, state and central toxic release inventory.

Recycling waste solvents keeps excess contaminants from entering water systems and damaging the

environment. Recovering solvents reduces emissions and cuts down raw material costs. Some of the

benefits due to spend solvents recycling are as follows.

Recycling solvents reduces the environmental impact by reducing the volume of solvents destined

for disposal at incineration facilities.

Reduces the amount of hazardous waste generation

Reduces the amount of virgin solvents manufacturing

Where waste is suitable for fuel blending a more cost effective solution will be provided.

8.6.4 Benefits of Alternate Fuel Raw material Facility

Low calorific value, Non hazardous waste, Inorganic materials can be used as a blender

Homogeneity of the mixers parameter is vital for the end user

The Cement Industry can play an important role in the urgent global need for destruction of

hazardous wastes like Polychlorinated bi phenyls (PCB), Persistent Organic Pollutant (POP), and

ensuring the Destruction and Removal Efficiency (DRE) of 99.9999 %.

Investigation proved cement kiln had the Lowest Polychlorinated dibenzo-p-dioxins and dibenzo

furans (PCDD/DFs) emission reduced to the extent of 99.3% using Hazardous Wastes.



Methane is a particularly potent Green House Gases (GHG), and is currently considered to have a

Global Warming Potential (GWP) 25 times that of CO2. Reduction of about 1.6 kilograms (kg) of

CO2 per kg of utilized Refuse Derived Fuel.

A holistic approach to waste management has positive consequences of GHG emissions. Co

processing proved a viable method to dispose the HW.

The surrounding industrial belts located in and around Nalgonda including Mahaboobnagar,

Warangal, Khammam will be benefitted from the proposed site.

8.6.5 Waste Plastic Recycling

Recycling plastic conserves the natural resources and energy that would be required to produce

plastic from scratch.

When plastic is recycled, less plastic is sent to landfill and thus, less of this material takes up

room in our environment for hundreds of years. In fact, recycling one ton of plastic can save 7.4

cubic yards of landfill space.

Plastics are becoming increasingly easy to recycle. Besides the invention of new plastic recycling

technology, governments all over the world have plastic collection schemes in place

8.6.6 Waste Paper Recycling

Reduces Logging for Fiber

Conserves Energy:

Conserves Water:

Reduces Air and Water Pollution:

Reduces Greenhouse Gas Emissions

8.7 Improvements in the Physical Infrastructure

The proposed project is expected to yield a positive impact on the socio economic environment. It helps

sustain the development of this area including further development of physical infrastructural facilities.

The following physical infrastructure facilities will improve due to proposed project.

Road Transport facilities

Housing facilities

Water supply and sanitation

Power

8.8 Improvements in the Social Infrastructure

Agriculture & plantation are one of the basic sectors of employment for the local people in this area. The

project will lead to indirect and direct employment opportunity. Employment is expected during

construction and operation period, waste lifting and other ancillary services. Employment in these sectors

will be temporary or contractual and involvement of unskilled labour will be more. A major part of this

labour force will be mainly from local villagers who are expected to engage themselves both in

agriculture and project activities. This will enhance their income and lead to overall economic growth of

the area.



The following changes in socio-economic status are expected to take place with this project.

The project is going to have positive impact on consumption behavior by way of raising average

consumption and income through multiplier effect.

The project is going to bring about changes in the pattern of demand from food to nonfood items

and sufficient income is generated.

Due to the corporate social responsible activities by project authorities, the socio economic

condition of the people will be improved.

People perceive that the project will in the long run help in the development of social

infrastructures/such as.

1. Education facilities

2. Banking facilities

3. Post offices and Communication facilities

4. Medical facilities

5. Plantation and parks

6. Community facilities

Industrial development and consequent economic development should lead to improvement of

environment through better living and greater social awareness. On the other hand, the proposed project is

likely to have several benefits like improvement in indirect employment generation and economic growth

of the area, by way of improved infrastructure facilities and better socio-economic conditions. Better

hygienic conditions, as solid waste being dumped at several places will be brought to one place for further

treatment and scientific disposal.

8.9 Employment Potential

The main advantage of the proposed project is direct employment generation (i) absorbs rural labor and

unskilled workers (in addition to semi-skilled and some skilled) (ii) provides opportunity for seasonal

employment thereby supplementing workers income from farming; and (iii) permits participation of

women workers both during construction and operation phase. The maximum benefit will be for local

villagers as they are easily accessible.

Additionally it is estimated that good number of jobs will be created as an indirect employment

opportunities at local/regional level due to contractual, marketing and associated jobs directly with the

project. The other related employment due to transportation requirement, supply of essential items and

services to the project site and other community services will be plenty.

Employment in these sectors will be permanent based on own initiatives and interest of the individual.

Involvement of unskilled labor requirement will be continuous basis depending on the requirement of

contractor at site. A major part of this labor force will be hired from nearby places.

8.10 Other Tangible Benefits

Additional housing demand for rental accommodation will increase

Cultural, recreation and aesthetic facilities will also improve.



Improvement in communication, transport, education, community development and medical

facilities.

Overall change in employment and income opportunity.

The State Government will also benefit directly from the proposed project, through increased revenue

from royalties, excise duty, etc.

8.11 SWOT Analysis

SWOT Analysis is a useful technique for understanding your Strengths and Weaknesses, and for

identifying both the Opportunities open to you and the Threats you face. What makes SWOT particularly

powerful is that, with a little thought, it can help you uncover opportunities that you are well placed to

exploit. And by understanding the weaknesses of your business, you can manage and eliminate threats

that would otherwise catch you unawares.

More than this, by looking at yourself and your competitors using the SWOT framework, you can start to

craft a strategy that helps you distinguish yourself from your competitors, so that you can compete

successfully in your market.

It views all positive and negative factors inside and outside the firm that affect the success. A consistent

study of the environment in which the firm operates helps in forecasting/predicting the changing trends

and also helps in including them in the decision-making process of the organization.

Many cities are facing the problem of overburdened landfill because of limited land availability and open

dumping sites equipped no sanitary system, such as soil cover, leachate collection and treatment system

polluting the environment through CH4 emission and leachate intrusion into ground and surface water.

As India is a developing country still struggling to decide the best option to treat and dispose of waste,

and financial constraints. India still facing low waste management literacy of the people, lack of

cooperation between the public and private sector and limited availability of the trained and skilled

personnel in the waste management sector are obstacles to improving waste management sector.



Figure 8.1

SWOT analysis

It was found that community support on waste management work was not entirely satisfactory. It appears

that the socio-economic status of a city is positively correlated with the technical competence of the waste

administrators and may determine attitudes of the inhabitant such as the ability/willingness to recycle

solid waste and knowledge on how or where to recycle.

The other approaching method that can be implemented was SWOT analysis. SWOT is an acronym for

strengths, weaknesses, opportunities and threats. A SWOT analysis is a technique commonly used to

assist in identifying strategic direction for an organization or practice.

The strengths and weaknesses of a system are determined by internal elements, whereas external forces

dictate opportunities and threats. Strengths can be defined as any available resource that can be used to

improve its performance. Weaknesses are flaws/shortcomings of any system that may cause to lose a

competitive advantage, efficiency or financial resources.

In Integrated hazardous waste management SWOT analysis was performed to formulate strategic action

plans for municipality solid waste management in order to mobilize and utilize the solid waste solid

management resources and inhabitant awareness on the one hand and municipal corporation’s resources

on the other. It has allowed the introduction of a participatory approach for better collaboration between

the community and Municipal Corporation. With the SWOT analysis, efforts were made to explore the

ways and means of converting the possible ’threats’ into ‘opportunities’ and changing the ‘weaknesses’

into ‘strengths’ regarding to implementation the integrated hazardous waste management programs in the

future.



8.11.1 Materials and Methods

This study was carried out the first time with the preliminary exploratory investigation of solid waste

management, and data collection before it was detailed and followed by a focused analysis using the

SWOT method. For completing this methodology, three stages were implemented including desk analysis

and field survey. The stages were

8.11.2 Stage 1

The field survey was conducted from landfills and interviews with residents of the area surrounding

landfill site to evaluate the influence of the landfill on the people and with residents of four different

resettlements: the upper-class, middle-class, lower-class and rural resettlement areas to evaluate resident

perceptions of solid waste management and willingness to participate in system.

8.11.3 Stage 2

The external and internal data of the solid waste management, the landfill site and the inhabitant

perception was determined to support the decision with the SWOT analysis. The internal analysis was a

comprehensive evaluation of the ‘internal environments’, i.e., strengths and weaknesses, while the

external analysis included the opportunities and threats that might arise when changes occur in the

external environments during the implementation of the solid waste management program.

8.11.4 Landfill Site Condition

The factors investigated as the STRENGHTS of the proposed project are

More than 200 people work at different capacities in the proposed project

Closed landfill site has no effect on the environment that can be used as a public facility

The waste that dumped on various sites in un scientific method will decrease

The factors investigated as the WEAKNESS of the proposed project are

There will be insufficient treatment of leachate in the landfill area

There will be insufficient support of equipment such as bulldozers, excavators and other facilities

in the starting stage

Chances of accidental leakage of leachate onto ground or water aquifer

Chances of industrial accidents due to unforeseen situations

The factors investigated as the OPPORTUNITIES of the proposed project are

Some part of the waste will be re - usable; recyclables can be used for other activities.

Some technologies can be implemented in the waste treatment, for generation of power,

complicated waste can be sent to incinerator/landfill.

The factors investigated as the THREATS of the landfill are

Leachate pollution to the environment

Influence of dumping in the site area can be resulted in the odor diffusion

The land cannot be used for any other activity except for developing playground, parks, etc.



8.11.5 Strategies derived from the SWOT profile of the landfill

Proposing the technology to recover reusable, recyclable material from wastes.

Proposing power generation from plastic, paper waste considering the approval from the local

community in the surrounding area.

Authority of project can coordinate with local persons to educate them for employment

opportunities.

Maintain the project site more properly to prevent the effect to the surrounding area and

environment with using the sufficient equipment and facilities, and the technology such as daily

cover and insect prevention.

Constructing the properly leachate treatment facility to prevent the bad effect theleachate to the

environment.

8.12 Conclusion

In this study, SWOT analysis was determine the strategic that contain with building on strengths,

minimizing weaknesses, exploring opportunities and counteracting threats. Strategies have been identified

and formulated from the SWOT matrix in relation to increasing government role, participation of the

inhabitant and landfill conditions for the hazardous waste management.

The strategies that resulted from this analysis were focused on the inhabitant participation and

environment consideration. For purposeful of the inhabitant participation, strategies that arise was

connected with the: educating the inhabitant, increasing the role of student and young people to involve in

the system, increasing the awareness, increasing the effort to recycle and encourage the habitant to use the

recycle material. All the strategies cannot be conducted by the community or by the government

separately.

It must be some collaboration and continuous effort from the community and government to maintain the

solid waste management system. The role of the community group and NGO could be increased, and the

pilot project for managing the waste could be supported by the government.

The strategies for the environment consideration were focused in managing the landfill site more

properly. The strategies were concern to prevent the bad effects to the environment and the influence of

the landfill site operation to the inhabitant at the surrounding area. The strategies was encourage the

landfill authority to changes the landfill operation system from the open dumping system to the sanitary

system and implementing technology to maintain the waste that enter the landfill site.

The analysis result showed that SWOT analysis was the one of approaching system that could be used as

the tools for maintain the hazardous waste management system in with the strategies that use the

inhabitant participation and environment as the considering factors for approaching.

CHAPTER 9

ENVIRONMENTAL

COST BENEFIT

ANALYSIS



CHAPTER 9

ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

9.1 Introduction

Preparation of environmental management plan is required for formulation, implementation and

monitoring of environmental protection measures during and after commissioning of projects. The plan

indicates the details of various measures which have been proposed and to be followed including cost

components. Cost of measures for environmental safeguard should be treated as an integral component of

the project cost and environmental aspects should be taken into account at various stages of the project.

Conceptualization: preliminary environmental assessment

Planning: detailed studies of environmental impacts and design of safeguards

Execution: implementation of environmental safety measures

Operation: monitoring of effectiveness of built-in safeguards

9.2 Environmental Management during Construction

The impacts during the construction phase on the environment would be basically of temporary in nature

and are expected to reduce gradually on completion of the construction activities.

9.2.1 Air Quality Mitigation Measure

For the proposed project site leveling and grading will be carried out if required, where ever possible to

maintain the natural elevations they will not be disturbed, only leveling activity will be carried out for

providing roads, sewage network, storm water system, and places required for construction of sheds and

administrative buildings. According to the engineering assessment, most of the excavated mud’s

generated during construction activities will be reused within the project site for leveling during road

formation, bunds construction around the land fill site, etc. The excess if any will be given to local

contractors for disposal in low lying areas, road construction use, etc.

During construction period most of the dust will be generated from the movement of construction

vehicles on unpaved roads. Unloading and removal of soil material shall also actas a potential source for

dust nuisance. The control measures proposed to be taken up aregiven below.

1. Water sprinkling on main haul roads in the project area will be done, this activity will be carried

out at least twice a day, if need arises frequency will be increased on windy days, in this way

around 50% reduction on the dust contribution from the exposed surface will be achieved

2. The duration of stockpiling of excavated mud will be as short as possible as most of the material

will be used as backfill material for the open cut trenches for road development.



3. Temporary tin sheets of sufficient height (3m) will be erected around the site of dust generation

or all around the project site as barrier for dust control.

4. Tree plantations around the project boundary will be initiated at the early stages by plantation of 2

to 3 years old saplings using drip irrigation or by regular watering so that the area will be moist


5. All vehicles carrying raw materials will be instructed to cover with tarpaulin / plastic sheet,

unloading and loading activity will be stopped during windy period.

6. To reduce the dust movement from civil construction site to the neighborhood the external part of

the construction activity will be covered by plastic sheets.

9.2.2 Water Quality Mitigation Measure

During site development necessary precautions will be taken, so that the runoff water from the site gets

collected to working pit and if any over flow is, will be diverted to nearby greenbelt / plantation area.

During construction activity all the equipment’s washed water will be diverted to working pit to arrest the

suspended solids if any and the settled water will be reused for construction purposes, and for sprinkling

on roads to control the dust emission, etc.

The domestic wastewater generated from temporary toilets used by the work force will be diverted to

septic tank followed by soak pit. Therefore, impact on water quality due to proposed unit would be

insignificant.


Noise generating equipment will be used during day time for brief period of its requirement. Proper

enclosures will be used for reduction in noise levels, where ever possible the noise generating equipment

will be kept away from the human habituation. Temporary tin sheets of sufficient height (3m) will be

erected around the noise generating activity or all around the project site as barrier for minimizing the

noise travel to surrounding areas. Therefore, impact on noise environment due to proposed project would

be insignificant.

All vehicles entering into the project will be informed to maintain speed limits, and not blow horns unless

it is required. Personal protective equipment like earmuffs, helmets covering ears would be provided to

the workers working near noise generating equipment and would see that workers use the protective

gadgets regularly.

9.2.4 Solid Waste Mitigation Measures

The solid waste generated during construction period being predominantly inert in nature, construction

and demolition waste does not create chemical or biochemical pollution. However maximum effort would

be made to reuse and recycle them. The most of the solid waste material will be used for filing/ leveling



of low-laying areas, as road construction material, if any excess given to local contractors for lifting and

dumping in low lying areas. All attempts would be made to stick to the following measures.

1. All construction waste shall be stored within the site itself. A proper screen will be provided so

that the waste does not get scattered.

2. Attempts will be made to keep the waste segregated into different heaps as far as possible so that

their further gradation and reuse is facilitated.

3. Materials, which can be reused for purpose of construction, leveling, making roads/ pavement

will also be kept in separate heaps from those which are to be sold or land filled

The use of the construction material basically depends on their separation and conditions of the separated

material. A majority of these materials are durable and therefore, have a high potential for reuse. It would,

however, be desirable to have quality standards for the recycled materials. Construction waste can be used

in the following manner.

Reuse of bricks, tiles, stone slabs, timber, piping railings etc. to the extent possible and depending

upon their conditions.

Sale/ auction of materials which cannot be used at the site due to design constraint

Plastics, broken glass, scrap metal, used cement bags, etc., can be sent for recycling in the

industries

Rubble/ brick bats can be used for building activity, such as leveling, under coat of lanes where

the traffic does not constitute heavy moving loads.

Larger unusable pieces can be sent for filing up low laying areas.

Fine material such as sand, dust, etc., can be used as cover material

The unearthed soil can be used for leveling as well as for lawn development

The broken pieces of the flooring material can be used for leveling in the building or can be

disposed off

The unused or remaining paints/varnishes/wood can either be reused or can be disposed.

9.2.5 Ecological Aspects

During construction period, there could be clearing of vegetation in order to prepare the site for

construction, the top soil from the construction area will collected and will be stored separately and will

be used for greenbelt development. A comprehensive green belt program will be planned to improve the

ecological condition of the region.

9.2.6 Site Security

Adequate security management would be made to ensure that the local inhabitants and the stray cattle are

not exposed to the potential hazards of construction activities. Round the clock security personnel will be

appointed to restrict entry of unwanted people to the site.

The above mentioned mitigation measures are tabulated and given in Table 9.1



Table 9.1

Mitigation Measures during Construction Phase

Air Quality

Mitigation

Measures

Water sprinkling on main haul roads in the project area will be done, this activity will be

carried out at least twice a day, if need arises frequency will be increased on windy days, in

this way around 50% reduction on the dust contribution from the exposed surface will be

achieved.

The duration of stockpiling of excavated mud will be as short as possible as most of the

material will be used as backfill material for the open cut trenches for road development.

Temporary tin sheets of sufficient height (3m) will be erected around the site of dust

generation or all around the project site as barrier for dust control.


plantation of 2 to 3 years old saplings using drip irrigation or by regular watering so that the

area will be moist for most part of the day.

All vehicles carrying raw materials will be instructed to cover with tarpaulin / plastic sheet,

unloading and loading activity will be stopped during windy period.

To reduce the dust movement from civil construction site to the neighborhood the external

part of the construction activity will be covered by plastic sheets.

Water Quality

Mitigation

Measures

The runoff water from the site collected in working pit, settled water reused for

construction activities and if any over flow is, will be diverted to nearby greenbelt /

plantation area.

All equipments washed water will be diverted to working pit to arrest the suspended solids

if any and the settled water will be reused for construction purposes, and for sprinkling on

roads to control the dust emission, etc.

The domestic wastewater generated from temporary toilets used by the work force will be

diverted to septic tank followed by soak pit.

Noise

Mitigation

Measures

Noise generating equipment will be used during day time for brief period of its

requirement.

Proper enclosures will be used for reduction in noise levels, where ever possible the noise

generating equipment will be kept away from the human habituation.

Temporary tin sheets of sufficient height (3m) will be erected around the noise generating

activity or all around the project site as barrier for minimizing the noise travel to

surrounding areas.

All vehicles entering into the project will be informed to maintain speed limits, and not

blow horns unless it is required.

Personal protective equipment like earmuffs, helmets covering ears would be provided to

the workers working near noise generating equipment and would see that workers use the

protective gadgets regularly.

Solid Waste

Mitigation

All construction waste shall be stored within the site itself. A proper screen will be provided

so that the waste does not get scattered.



Measures Attempts will be made to keep the waste segregated into different heaps as far as possible

so that their further gradation and reuse is facilitated.

Materials, which can be reused for purpose of construction, levelling, making roads/

pavement will also be kept in separate heaps from those which are to be sold or land filled.

Site Security Adequate security arrangement would be made to ensure that the local inhabitants and the

stray cattle are not exposed to the potential hazards of construction activities, fencing will

be provided along the boundary.

Round the clock security personnel will be appointed to restrict entry of unwanted people to

the site.

9.3 Management during Operation Phase

Necessary control measures will be undertaken at the design stage to meet the statutory requirements and

towards minimizing environmental impacts.

During project implementation period special emphasis will be made on measures to minimize leachate /

effluent generation and dust control at source. The specific control measures related to air emissions,

liquid effluent discharges, noise generation, solid waste disposal etc. are described below:

9.3.1 Air Quality Management

The main activities from the proposed project which cause air pollution are as follows:

Incinerator stack emissions

Power plant & DG set stack emissions

Dust particulates due to movement of vehicles and road sweepings

Temperature &Odour from bio medical waste management plant

Dust, Odour& Gas generation from secured landfill

The following methods of abatement will be employed for the air pollution control.

Incinerator will be provided with a stack height meeting MOEF Guidelines, Spray dryer, Multi

cyclone, Bag house, and Wet scrubber

Power plant will be provided multi cyclone / bag house followed by a stack height meeting

MOEF Guidelines for proper dispersion of sulfur dioxide and oxides of nitrogen.

DG set will be provided with a stack height meeting MOEF Guidelines for proper dispersion of

sulfur dioxide and oxides of nitrogen.

Internal roads will be concreted / asphalted to reduce dust emissions

Speed restriction will be followed within the project and speed breakers will be provided at entry

and exit points

Gas management system in secured landfill will be provided

Green belt will be provided along the internal roads and plant boundary



9.3.2 Odor Control

The odor management is one of the issues in ICHWTSDF. The main aim is to minimize the number of

sources of odor generation which exist in site. To undertake direct management of odor generating













9.3.3 Gas Management

Land fill gas is generated as a product of waste biodegradation. In land fill, Organic waste is broken down

by enzymes produced by bacteria in a manner. Considerable heat is generated by these reactions with

methane, carbon dioxide, nitrogen, oxygen, hydrogen sulfide and other gases as by products. Methane and

carbon dioxide are the principle gases produced with almost 50-50% share. When methane is present in

the air in concentrations between 5 to 15%, it is explosive. Landfills generate gases with a pressure

sufficient enough to damage the final cover and largely have the impact on vegetative cover. Also

because only limited amount of oxygen are present in a land fill, when methane concentration reach this

critical level, there is a little danger that the land fill will explode.

To minimize the gas generation in the proposed project incinerator is proposed for incineration of organic

based (high calorific) waste, hence gas generation is anticipated to be less. To manage the gas generated a

venting system with flaring arrangement is proposed if the gas generation is more it will be diverted to

canteen.

9.3.4 Water Quality Mitigation Measures

The main wastewater generations sources in the proposed project are domestic wastewater, leachate

generation from secured land fill (hazardous waste) area, Effluent in Bio medical waste, vehicle wash

area, etc. Leachate treated in incineration/ Forced evaporation/spraying on landfill. The domestic effluent

generated will be treated in septic tank followed by soak pit or portable STP and the treated water is used

for greenbelt development. The effluent generated from floor washings, recycling activity, etc will be



collected in collection tank followed by settling tank and the settled water is reused. The effluent from bio

medical waste is treated in ETP and recycling to incinerator or circulation back to system. The waste

water generated from boiler and cooling tower used in ash quenching and for greenbelt development

purpose. There will not be any wastewater discharge to any nearby water body and adopts the zero

wastewater discharge concept.


The main sources of noise generation is due to movement of vehicles carrying waste, all vehicle (drivers)

entering into the project will be informed to maintain speed limits, and not blow horns unless it is

required. Necessary speed controlling bumps will be placed near weighbridge and entrance of the site.

The other areas where noise generation is anticipated is Incinerator section, power plant area, DG set

room, necessary personal protective equipment like earmuffs, helmets covering ears would be provided to

the workers working near noise generating equipment and would see that workers use the protective

gadgets regularly. Regular maintenance of the equipment will be carried out as per the schedule given by

suppliers. The noise pollution management measures proposed is given below.

Acoustic Enclosure for all the high noise level equipments

All the design/installation precautions as specified by the manufacturers with respect to noise

control are strictly adhered to

Major noise generating sources are insulated adequately by providing suitable enclosures

Other than the regular maintenance of the various equipment, ear plugs are provided to the

personnel close to the noise generating units

All the opening like covers, partitions are designed properly

9.3.6 Solid Waste Mitigation Measures

The ash coming from the incinerator and power plant will be used as a daily cover for landfill along with

soil and mud.

The mitigation measures proposed during operation period are given in Table 9.2.

Table 9.2

Mitigation Measure proposed during Operation Phase

Air Quality

Management

Incinerator will be provided with a stack height meeting MOEF Guidelines, Spray dryer,

Multi cyclone, Bag house, Wet scrubber

Power plant will be provided multi cyclone / bag house followed by a stack height

meeting MOEF Guidelines for proper dispersion of sulfur dioxide and oxides of nitrogen.

DG set will be provided with a stack height meeting MOEF Guidelines or 1 m above the

tallest structure in the project area for proper dispersion of sulfur dioxide and oxides of

nitrogen.

Internal roads will be concreted / asphalted to reduce dust emissions



Speed restriction will be followed within the project and speed breakers will be provided

at entry and exit points

Gas management system in secured landfill will be provided

Green belt will be provided along the internal roads and plant boundary

Odour Control Dilution of odourant by odour counteraction or neutralize by spraying Ecosorb (organic

and biodegradable chemical) around odour generation areas at regular intervals.

Covering the landfill area under operation daily with layer of earth, clay or a similar

material

Covering by using heavy duty hessian, plastics and foams odour can be minimized.

Gas Management To minimize the gas generation in the landfill, the organic based waste will be diverted to

incineration to the maximum extent possible

To manage the gas generated a venting system with flaring arrangement will be provided,

if the gas generation is more it will be directed to canteen

Water Quality

Mitigation

Measures

The leachate generated from landfill will be collected into leachate collection wells.

The leachate collected will be sprayed back into landfill for dust suppression, stabilization

of hazardous waste, etc. the excess if any will be disposed into spray drier of the

incinerator or treated and sent to solar pond (during phase I)

The domestic wastewater will be collected and treated in septic tank/soak pit or portable

STP and reused for greenbelt

The effluent from floor washings, workshop etc., will be collected, treated in O&G trap,

settling tank and recycle back for dust suppression, etc.,

The waste water from bio-medical sections will collected, disinfected and after necessary

treatment reused for dust suppression on landfill area

Noise Mitigation

Measures

Acoustic Enclosure will be provided for all the high noise generating equipment’s

All the design/installation precautions as specified by the manufacturers with respect to

noise control are strictly adhered to

Major noise generating sources are insulated adequately by providing suitable enclosures

Other than the regular maintenance of the various equipment, ear plugs are provided to the

personnel close to the noise generating units;

All the openings like covers, partitions are designed properly.

Solid Waste

Mitigation

Measures

The ash coming from incineration plant / power plant will be used as daily cover in

secured landfill

The sludge generated in the leachate pond/ solar pond will be sent to secured land fill

Occupational Health

& Safety

Periodic health checkup for early detection and control of communicable Diseases

Will provide preventive measures for potential fire hazards with requisite fire detection,

firefighting facilities and adequate water storage, etc.

Provide regular training for workers in their respective fields



9.4 Post Operation of Landfill

A final landfill cover is usually composed of several layers, each with a specific function. The surface

cover system must enhance surface drainage, minimize infiltration, support vegetation and control the

release of landfill gases. The landfill cover to be adopted will depend on the gas management system.

As recommended by the MOEFCC, the final cover system must consist of a vegetative layer supported by

a drainage layer over barrier layer and gas vent layer. The details of the landfill cover are given below.

A 60cm thick compacted clay

A HDPE geo-membrane liner of thickness 1.5mm

Geo net and 285 gsm Geotextile, 7-8mm drainage composite

Top soil 45cm and vegetative soil 15cm followed by vegetation.

The mitigation measures proposed during post operation period are given in Table 9.3.

Table 9.3

Mitigation Measure proposed during Post Operation Phase

Post Operation Phase

Landfill

maintenance

After closure of the landfill, the integrity of the final cover will be maintained, if any

repairs required it will be rectified as necessary

After closure of the landfill, shall continue Leachate, gas and surface water

management as well as environmental monitoring of the landfill for a period of 30

years or until harmful leachate is not produced for 5continuous years

After few years of closure, the leachate is observed to meet all discharge standards,

the same shall be discharged directly to lined drains

The landfill shall be abandoned after 30 years of closure if concentrations of

contaminants in all liquid and gaseous emissions from the landfill are observed to be

below prescribed limits

9.5 Socio Economic Development Activities under CEP

Corporate Environmental Policy (CEP), also known as Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR), is a form

of corporate self-regulation integrated into a business model. Ideally, CEP policy would function as a

built-in, self-regulating mechanism whereby business would monitor and ensure its support to ethical

standards and international norms. Consequently, business would adopt responsibility for the impact of its

activities on the environment, consumers, employees, Communities, Stakeholders and all other members

of the public sector. CEP focused businesses would proactively promote the public interest by

encouraging community growth and development, and voluntarily eliminating practices that harm the

public sector, regardless of legality.

Economic growth is possible only through consumption of inputs available in the environment and

society. The harnessing of natural resources has a direct impact on the economy, the environment and



society at large. CEP is a concept whereby organizations serve the interests of society by taking

responsibility for the impact of their activities on customers, employees, shareholders, communities and

the environment in all aspects of their operations.

Thus CEP is a management’s commitment to operate in an economically, socially and environmentally

sustainable manner, while recognizing the interests of its stakeholders. This commitment is beyond

statutory requirements. CEP is, therefore, closely linked with the practice of sustainable Development.

9.5.1 Planning

The planning for CEP starts with the identification of the activities/projects to be undertaken.CEP

projects/activities may be undertaken in the periphery of project boundaries or anywhere in the country.

However, specific CEP strategies shall be developed that mandate the design of CEP Action Plan (Long-

term, medium-term and short-term), with a shift from the casual approach to the project based

accountability approach.

Selection of activities under CEP would be made to ensure that the benefits reach the smallest units in the

area of District depending upon the operations and resource capability of the project. The approach to

CEP planning needs to be shifted from an ad-hoc charity to a long-term sustainable approach. The

monitoring skills available with the project authorities could be shared as far as possible, with the local

administration by training and setting up required structures and systems.

The long-term CEP Plan shall match with the long term Business Plan. This shall be broken down into

medium term and short term plans. Each of these plans shall be clearly specified the following.

Requirements relating to baseline survey

Activities to be undertaken

Budgets allocated

Time-lines prescribed

Responsibilities and authorities defined

Major results expected

However, these plans shall also clearly specify the implementation guidelines and the involvement of the

implementing agency

9.5.2 Implementation

CEP initiatives shall be considered the following parameters for identifications/selection of

schemes/projects as per the stipulated guidelines:

Investment in CEP should be project based. Mere donations to philanthropic/charity or other

organizations would not come under the category of CEP.

CEP activities should generate community goodwill, create social impact and visibility.

For every project, the time-frame and periodic milestones should be finalized at the outset.



CEP activities should also involve the suppliers in order to ensure that the supply-chain also

follows the CEP principles.

CEP activities should help in building a positive image of the company in the public perception.

CEP projects may be closely linked with the principles of sustainable Development. Based on the

immediate and long term social and environmental consequences of their activities.

Management should take the shoulder responsibility for restoring/Compensating for any

ecological damage that is taking place as a result of its operations.

Project activities identified under CEP shall be implemented by Specialized Agencies and generally not

by staff of the project management. Specialized agencies would be made to work singly or in tandem with

other agencies.

Specialized agencies would include:-

Community based organizations whether formal or informal

Elected local bodies such as Panchayat

Voluntary Agencies (NGOs)

Institutes/Academic Organizations

Trusts, Missions, etc.,

Self-help Groups

Government, Semi-Government and autonomous Organizations

Standing Conference of Public Enterprises (SCOPE)

Mahila Mandals/Samitis and the like

Contracted agencies for civil works

Professional Consultancy Organizations, etc.,

Project Management will take responsibility to develop awareness among all levels of their staff about

CEP activities and the integration of social processes with business processes. Those involved with the

undertaking of CEP activities will be provided with adequate training and re-orientation.

Initiatives of State Governments, District Administration, local administration as well as Central

Government Departments/Agencies, self-Help Groups, etc., would be dovetailed/Synergized with the

initiatives taken by the management.

Every care will be taken to ensure that there is no duplication of CEP activities undertaken by the project

with that of programs run by Central State and Local Governments. While assigning CEP projects to

specialized agencies, every possible effort will be made to verify the reliability and clean track record of

such agencies or they may select from panels maintained by Government, Semi-Government,

Autonomous Organization or the National CEP Hub, etc.

Activities related to sustainable Development will form a significant element of the total initiatives of

CEP. However, these activities will be carried out under the 3 UN Global compact principles, pertaining

to the Environment. Nevertheless, business related with project activities will be asked to:

Support a precautionary approach to environmental challenges



Undertake initiatives to promote greater environmental responsibility

Encourage the development and diffusion of environmentally friendly technologies.

9.5.3 Possible Areas of Activities under CEP

Some of the possible areas of activities under CEP are given below; they will be undertaken depending on

the local requirement and its immediate need.

Drinking Water Facility

Education

Electricity Facility

Solar Lighting System

Health and Family Welfare

Plantation/Irrigation Facilities

Sanitation and Public Health

Pollution Control

Animal Care

Promotion of Sports and Games

Promotion of Art and Culture

Environment Friendly technologies

Promotion of livelihood for economically weaker sections through forward and backward

linkages.

Relief to victims of Natural Calamities like earth-quake, Cyclone, drought & Flood situation in

any part of the country

Supplementing Development Program of the Government

Non-conventional Energy Sources

Construction of Community Centres/Night Shelters/Old Age Homes

Imparting Vocational Training

Setting up of skill development centers

Adoption of Villages

Scholarships to meritorious students belonging to SC, ST, OBC and disabled categories

Adoption/Construction of Hostels (especially those for SC/ST and girls)

Skill training, entrepreneurship development and placement assistance program for youth

Building of Roads, Pathways and Bridges

Entrepreneurship Development Program (EDP)

Disaster Management Activities including those related to amelioration/mitigation

Activities related to the preservation of the ecology and to sustainable development.



The tentative budget allotted for undertaking CSR activities are given in Table 9.4.

Table 9.4

Budget for CSR activities

Name of the Activity 1st year 2

nd year 3

rd year

General & Dermatology Camp 150000 170000 190000

Awareness program on Health &Hygiene 60000 65000 80000

Awareness program on Food & Nutrition 60000 65000 80000

Vocational Training programs for Youth 500000 600000 700000

Vocational Training for women 100000 110000 120000

Paryavaran Puraskar Awards 150000 160000 170000

Agriculture Support (Farmer clubs,

farmer field schools, marketing support

etc)

635000 700000 750000

Note Book distribution in schools 30000 35000 45000

Infrastructure/ Material/ health support to

schools 500000 575000 625000

Veterinary Camps 75000 175000 250000

RO Plants 1200000 1200000 1200000

Workshop on Waste Management in

Schools 150000 160000 170000

Celebration of Children’s, Independence

,Republic day in schools 90000 95000 100000

Total 3700000 4110000 4480000

Capital cost of the project is Rs.260 Crores

After 3 years 2% of the Profit will be used for CSR Activities

9.6 Occupational Health Management

There will be routine observation of health as certain sufferings are likely to appear as result of exposure

by the workers during operations of various facilities. All the employees shall be required to undergo a

medical checkup before joining the facility. Medical checkup will be conducted on regular basis and the

health conditions will be monitored. First aid facilities required to attend immediately for meeting

emergency situations shall be made available at the facility.

9.7 Fire Protection System

The fire protection system will protect the entire site area from fire hazards happening accidentally. This

fire protection system comprises of a ground level water storage tank to store the anticipated requirement

of water. One electric motor driven pump and one diesel high pressure pumps will be provided to pump

the water to a high pressure header from where the water is distributed to various high pressure hydrants



provided at selected locations. Necessary fire hoses terminated with spouts will be kept ready at each

hydrant location to facilitate firefighting. The header also caters to a multi fire system to automatically

sprinkle water through sprinklers provided.

9.8 Environmental Management Cell

The Environmental Cell will be headed by the Project Managers followed by other officers and

technicians. The department is the nodal agency to co-ordinate and provides necessary services on

environmental issues during operation of the project. This environmental group is responsible for

implementation of environmental management plan, interaction with the environmental regulatory

agencies, reviewing draft policy and planning. This department interacts with State Pollution Control

Board and other environment regulatory agencies. The department also interacts with local people to

understand their problems and to formulate appropriate community development plan. The major duties

and responsibilities of Environmental Management Cell shall be as given below:

To implement the environmental management plan,

To assure regulatory compliance with all relevant rules and regulations,

To ensure regular operation and maintenance of pollution control devices,

To minimize environmental impacts of operations as by strict adherence to the EMP,

To initiate environmental monitoring as per approved schedule

Review and interpretation of monitored results and corrective measures in case monitored results

are above the specified limit

Maintain documentation of good environmental practices and applicable environmental laws as

ready reference

Maintain environmental related records

Coordination with regulatory agencies, external consultants

9.8.1 Record Keeping and Reporting

Record keeping and reporting of performance is an important management tool for ensuring sustainable

operation. Records should be maintained for regulatory, monitoring and operational issues. Typical record

keeping requirements for the TSDF is summarized in Table 9.5 below:-

Table 9.5 Record Keeping Particulars

Parameter Particulars

Solid Waste Handling and Disposal Daily quantity of waste receive

Daily quantity sent to landfill

Waste water Daily quantities of treated effluent disposed

Quantity and point of usage of treated wastewater

Treated wastewater quality

Regulatory Licenses (Environmental) Environmental Permits / Consents from TNPCB



Monitoring and Survey Records of all monitoring carried out as per the finalized

monitoring protocol

Accident reporting Date and time of the accident

Sequence of events leading to accident

Chemical datasheet assessing effect of accident on

health and environment

Emergency measure taken

Step to prevent recurrence of such events

Other Log book of compliance

Employee environmental, health and safety records

Equipment inspection and calibration records, where

applicable

Vehicle maintenance and inspection records

9.9 E-Waste Management and Handling Rules 2011

The action plan to comply the rules under E waste management handling rules are given below in Table

9.6.

Table 9.6

Compliance E Waste Management Rules 2011

Section Applicable Rule Compliance

Responsibilities of Collection Centers

1 Obtain an authorization in accordance with the

procedure under rule 9 from the State PCB and

provide details such as address, telephone

no/helpline no, e-mail, etc of such collection centre

to the general public

Authorization from PCB will be obtained

after obtaining EC and the same will be

informed to general public

2 Ensure that the e-waste collected by them is stored

in a secured manner till it is sent to registered

dismantler(s) or recycler(s) as the case may be

E-waste collected will be processed and

the processed waste will be segregated

and stored in secured manner till it is

disposed to recyclers

3 Ensure that no damage is caused to the environment

during storage and transportation of e-waste

After receiving the request from the client

the project management will arrange a

suitable and secured transport to collect the

material from clients premises and the

collected material will be stored in secured

place till it is processed further as per rules.

4 File annual returns in Form 3, to the SPCB on or

before the 30th June following the financial year

Regular annual returns will be filed to

SPCB on or before 30th June every

financial year

5 Maintain records of the e-waste handled in Form 2 Records of e-waste handled will be



and make such records available for scrutiny by the

SPCB concerned

maintained in Form 2 and the same will be

shown to concerned SPCB officials

Responsibilities of Dismantler

1 Obtain authorization and registration from the

SPCB in accordance with the procedure under the

rules 9 & 11

Authorization and registration will be

obtained from SPCB in accordance with the

procedure under the rules 9 & 11 after

obtaining EC

2 Ensure that no damage is caused to the environment

during storage and transportation of e-waste

It will be ensured that no damage is caused

to the environment during storage and

transportation of e-waste

3 Ensure that the dismantling process do not have any

adverse effect on the health and the environment

Necessary air pollution control measures

(sprinkling of water, cyclone followed by

bag filter) are provided to ensure the

dismantling process do not have any

adverse effect on the health and the

environment.

4 Ensure that the facility and dismantling process are

in accordance with the standards or guidelines

published by the CPCB from time to time

It will be ensured that the facility and

dismantling process are in accordance with

the standards or guidelines published by the

CPCB from time to time

5 Ensure that dismantled e-waste are segregated and

sent to the registered recycling facilities for

recovery of materials

It will be ensured that dismantled e-waste is

segregated and sent to the registered

recycling facilities for recovery of materials

6 Ensure that non-recyclable / non – recoverable

components are sent to authorized treatment storage

and disposal facilities

Non-recyclable / non – recoverable

components are separated and sent to

incineration or secured land fill for further

disposal

7 File a return in Form 3. To the SPCB on or before

30th June following the financial year to which that

return relates

Annual returns in Form 3. Will be filled to

the SPCB on or before 30th June following

the financial year to which that return

relates

8 Not process any e-waste for recovery or refining of

materials, unless he is registered with SPCB as

recycler for refining and recovery of metals

Will not process any e-waste for recovery

or refining of materials

9.10Action Plan for Complying Performance Evaluation & Monitoring of TSDF

The detailed action plans for complying performance evaluation and monitoring of TSDF facility is given

below under Table 9.7



Table 9.7

Action Plan for Monitoring TSDF

Section Condition Compliance

4.1 Basic Information to be provided by

the operator of the facility

The basic information as per the Format given in

HAZWAMS/…./2010-2011 dated May 24, 2010,

Annexure-III will be provided to SPCB/CPCB before

the start of operation of the facility as one time

exercise. In case if there is any change in the activity

of the proposed facility, updated information will be

provided to SPCB/CPCB

4.2 Periodic information to be prepared

and submitted on quarterly basis by

the operator of the facility

Periodic information as per the format given


Annexure-IV will be provided to SPCB/CPCB on

quarterly basis within 15 days of the end of the

quarter

5.2 Uniformity in monitoring of soil,

ground & surface water, ambient air

quality, gaseous emissions from vents

provided to the already capped

landfills, a monitoring protocol is to

be followed

To have Uniformity in monitoring of soil, ground &

surface water, ambient air quality, gaseous emissions

from vents provided to the already capped landfills, a

monitoring protocol suggested in


Annexure-V will be followed and will be provided to

SPCB/CPCB as per Consent conditions

5.4 Storage of Incompatible wastes in the

TSDF

While storing and mixing incompatible wastes

general criteria suggested as guideline in


Annexure-VII will be followed

5.6 Online tracking system for movement

of hazardous waste

Measures will be taken to put in place online tracking

system for movement of the hazardous waste from

generators to the final disposal facility

5.7 Strengthening and upgrading

laboratories, Accreditation as per

EPA, 1986, obtaining ISO 17025

through NABL system

A fully fledged laboratory having sufficient

equipment for monitoring and analysis of all required

parameters will be established in the facility. Funds

will be provided for regular upgradation of the

laboratory. Will apply for accreditation as per EPA,

1986 and will strive to obtain ISO 17025 through

NABL system



9.11 Compliance of Hazardous Waste Rules 2008

Point wise compliance of the Hazardous Waste (Management, Handling and Trans-boundary Movement)

Rules 2008 including collection and transportation design etc., are given in Table 9.8.

Table 9.8

Compliance of Hazardous Waste Rules 2008

Chapter II

PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING HAZARDOUS WASTES

II - 4 Responsibilities of the occupier for handling of

hazardous wastes

1 The occupier shall be responsible for safe and

environmentally sound handling of hazardous

wastes generated in his establishment.

The proposed project is Treatment, Storage

& Disposable Facility (TSDF) no

hazardous waste will be generated.

2 The hazardous wastes generated in the

establishment of an occupier shall be sent or sold to

a recycler or re-processor or re-user registered or

authorized under these rules or shall be disposed of

in an authorized disposal facility.


& Disposable Facility (TSDF) no

hazardous waste will be generated.

3 The hazardous wastes transported from an

occupier's establishment to a recycler for recycling

or reuse or reprocessing or to an authorized facility

for disposal shall be transported in accordance with

the provisions of these rules.

Transportation of hazardous waste shall be

done in accordance with the provisions of

these rules

4 The occupier or any other person acting on his

behalf who intends to get his hazardous wastes

treated and disposed of by the operator of a

Treatment, Storage and Disposal Facility shall give

to the operator of a facility, such information as

may be determined by the State Pollution Control

Board.

Management shall collect information

required as per State Pollution Control

Board from the respective industry which is

sending the hazardous waste for treatment

and disposal

5 The occupier shall take all adequate steps while

handling hazardous wastes to:

I. contain contaminants and prevent accidents and

limit their consequences on human beings and the

environment; and

II. Provide persons working on the site with the

training, equipment and the information necessary

to ensure their safety.

All necessary preventive measures will

be taken while handling the hazardous

wastes.

Personal protective gadgets will be

provided to workers and it will be seen

that they use while working

In case of accidents, necessary cleaning

of the site will be taken up

II - 5 Grant of authorization for handling hazardous

wastes.



1 Every person who is engaged in generation,

processing, treatment, package, storage,

transportation, use, collection, destruction,

conversion, offering for sale, transfer or the like of

the hazardous waste shall require to obtain an

authorization from the State Pollution Control

Board.

Authorization for Hazardous waste

Treatment Storage and Disposal Facility

will be obtained from State Pollution

Control Board.

2 The hazardous waste shall be collected, treated, re-

cycled, re-processed, stored or disposed of only in

such facilities as may be authorized by the State

Pollution Control Board for the purpose.


&Disposable Facility (TSDF)no hazardous

waste will be generated.

3 Every person engaged in generation, processing,

treatment,

package, storage, transportation, use, collection,

destruction, conversion, offering for sale, transfer

or the like of the hazardous waste or occupier of the

facility shall make an application in Form 1 to the

State Pollution Control Board for authorization

within a period of sixty days from the date of

commencement of these rules: Provided that any

person authorized under the provisions of the

Hazardous Waste(Management and Handling)

Rules, 1989, prior to the date of coming into force

of these rules, shall not require to make an

application for authorization till the period of

expiry of such authorization.

Application in Form 1 will be made to State

Pollution Control Board for proposed

Treatment, Storage &Disposable Facility

(TSDF)

4 On receipt of the application complete in all

respects for the authorization, the State Pollution

Control Board may, after such inquiry as it

considers necessary and on being satisfied that the

applicant possesses appropriate facilities, technical

capabilities and equipment to handle hazardous

waste safely, grant within a period of one hundred

and twenty days an authorization in Form 2 to the

applicant which shall be valid for a period of five

years and shall be subject to such conditions as may

be laid down therein.

Accepting the condition

5 The State Pollution Control Board may after giving

reasonable opportunity of being heard to the

applicant refuse to grant any authorization.

Condition acceptable



6 Every person authorized under these rules shall

maintain the record of hazardous wastes handled by

him in Form 3 and prepare and submit to the State

Pollution Control Board, an annual return

containing the details specified in Form 4 on or

before the 30th day of June following to the

financial year to which that return relates.

Shall maintain the record of hazardous

wastes handled at the facility in Form 3

and prepare and submit to the State

Pollution Control Board, an annual return

containing the details specified in Form 4

on or before the 30th day of June following

to the financial year.

7 An application for the renewal of an authorization

shall be made in Form 1, before its expiry and the

State Pollution Control Board may renew the

authorization after examining each case on merit

subject to the condition that there has been no

report of violation of the provisions of the Act or

the rules made there under or conditions specified

in the authorization.

Application for the renewal of authorization

shall be made in Form 1 before the expiry

to State Pollution Control Board

8 The occupier or operator of the facility shall take all

the steps, wherever required, for reduction and

prevention of the waste generated or for recycling

or reuse and comply the conditions specified in the

authorization.

All steps, required, for reduction and

prevention of the waste generated or for

recycling or reuse and comply the

conditions specified in the authorization

will be taken

9 The State Pollution Control Board shall maintain a

register containing particulars of the conditions

imposed under these rules for management of

hazardous waste, and it shall be open for inspection

during office hours to any person interested or

affected or a person authorized by him on his

behalf.

condition acceptable

II - 6 Power to suspend or cancel an authorization

1 The State Pollution Control Board, may, if in its

opinion the holder of the authorization has failed to

comply with any of the conditions of the

authorization or with any provisions of the Act or

these rules and after giving him a reasonable

opportunity of being heard and after recording

reasons thereof in writing cancel or suspend the

authorization issued under rule-4 for such period as

it considers necessary in the public interest.


2 Upon suspension or cancellation of the

authorization the State Pollution Control Board

may give directions to the person whose

Directions given by State Pollution Control

Board shall be followed



authorization has been suspended or cancelled for

the safe storage of the hazardous wastes, and such

person shall comply with such directions.

II-7 Storage of Hazardous Waste

1 The occupiers, recyclers, re-processors, re-users,

and operators of facilities may store the hazardous

wastes for a period not exceeding ninety days and

shall maintain a record of sale, transfer, storage,

recycling and reprocessing of such wastes and

Crake these records available for inspection:

Provided that the State Pollution Control Board

may extend the said period in following cases,

namely:-

i. Small generators up to ten tones per annum;

ii. Recyclers, re-processors and facility

operators up to six months of their annual

capacity;

iii. Generators who do not have access to any

Treatment, Storage, Disposal Facility in the

concerned State; or

iv. The waste which needs to be specifically

stored for development of a process for its

recycling, reuse.


Chapter III

PROCEDURE FOR RECYCLING, REPROCESSING OR REUSE OF HAZARDOUS

WASTES

III 8 Procedure for grant of registration

1 Every person desirous of recycling or reprocessing

the hazardous waste specified in Schedule-IV may

make an application in Form 5 accompanied with a

copy each of the following documents for the grant

or renewal of the registration:-

consent to establish granted by the State Pollution

Control Board under the Water (Prevention and

Control of Pollution) Act, 1974 (25 of 1974) and

the Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act,

1981 (21 of 1981);

a) certificate of registration issued by the

District Industries Centre or any other

government agency authorized in this


&Disposable Facility (TSDF) no recycling

or reprocessing of the Hazardous waste

shall be carried out, in case if recycling or

reprocessing is proposed necessary

application in Form 5 will be made for

grant of registration.



regard;

b) proof of installed capacity of plant and

machinery issued by the District Industries

Centre or any other government agency

authorized in this behalf; and

c) In case of renewal, certificate of

compliance of effluent, emission standards

and treatment and disposal of hazardous

wastes, as applicable, from the State

Pollution Control Board or the Concerned

Zonal Office of Central Pollution Control

Board.

2 The Central Pollution Control Board, on being

satisfied that the applicant is utilizing

environmentally sound technologies and possesses

adequate technical capabilities, requisite facilities,

and equipment to recycle, reprocess or reuse

hazardous wastes, may grant registration to such

applicants stipulating therein necessary conditions

for carrying out safe operations in the authorized

place only


3 The Central Pollution Control Board shall dispose

of the application for registration within a period of

one hundred twenty days from the date of the

receipt of such application complete in all respects.


4 The registration, issued under sub-rule shall be

valid for a period of five years from the date of its

issue, unless the operation is discontinued by the

unit or the registration is suspended or cancelled by

the Central Pollution Control Board.


5 The Central Pollution Control Board may cancel or

suspend the registration granted under these rules,

if it has reasons to believe that the recycler or re-

processor has failed to comply with any of the

conditions of the registration, or with any provision

of the Act or rules made there under.


6 The Central Pollution Control Board may after

giving a reasonable opportunity of being heard to

the applicant, by order, refuse to grant or renew the

registration.




7 The recycler or re-processor shall maintain records

of hazardous wastes purchased and processed and

shall file an annual return of its activities of

previous year in Form 6 to the State Pollution

Control Board, on or before the 30th day of June of

every year.


III - 9 Conditions for sale or transfer of Hazardous

Wastes for recycling

The occupier generating the hazardous wastes

specified in Schedule-IV may sell it only to the

recycler having a valid registration from the Central

Pollution Control Board for recycling or recovery.


III -10 Standards for recycling

The Central Government and Central Pollution

Control Board may issue the guidelines for

standards of performance for recycling processes

from time to time.


III -11 Utilization of hazardous wastes

The utilization of hazardous wastes as a

supplementary resource or for energy recovery, or

after processing shall be carried out by the units

only after obtaining approval from the Central

Pollution Control Board.


Chapter V

TREATMENT, STORAGE AND DISPOSAL FACILITY FOR HAZARDOUS WASTES

V 18 Treatment, Storage and Disposal-Facility for

hazardous wastes

1 The State Government, occupier, operator of a

facility or any association of occupiers shall

individually or jointly or severally be responsible

for, and identify sites for establishing the facility

for treatment, storage and disposal of the hazardous

wastes in the State.

Site meeting MOEFCC guidelines has been

identified for proposed TSDF

2 The operator of common facility or occupier of a

captive facility, shall design and set up the

Treatment, Storage and Disposal Facility as per

technical guidelines issued by the Central Pollution

Control Board in this regard from time to time and

shall obtain approval from the State Pollution

Control Board for design and layout in this regard

The proposed facility shall be designed as

per CPCB technical guidelines and

necessary approval will be obtained from

State Pollution Control Board for design

and Layout



from time to time.

3 The State Pollution Control Board shall monitor the

setting up and operation of the Treatment, Storage

and Disposal Facilities regularly.


4 The operator of the Treatment, Storage and

Disposal Facility shall be responsible for safe and

environmentally sound operation of the Treatment,

the Storage and Disposal Facility and its closure

and post closure phase, as per guidelines issued by

the Central Pollution Control Board from time to

time.

Management shall be responsible for safe

and environmentally sound operation of

TSDF, closure and post closure phase.

5 The operator of the Treatment, Storage and

Disposal Facility shall maintain records of

hazardous wastes handled by him in Form 10.

We shall maintain records of the hazardous

wastes handled as per Form 10

Chapter VI

PACKAGING, LABELLING, AND TRANSPORT OF HAZARDOUS WASTE

VI - 19 Packaging and labeling

1 The occupier or operator of the Treatment, Storage

and Disposal Facility or recycler shall ensure that

the hazardous waste are packaged and labeled,

based on the composition in a manner suitable for

safe handling, storage and transport as per the

guidelines issued by the Central Pollution Control

Board from time to time.

Packaging and Labeling shall be done as

per the guidelines issued by the CPCB

2 The labeling and packaging shall be easily visible

and be able to withstand physical conditions and

climatic factors.

Packaging and labeling shall be done in

such a way that it is easily visible and

withstands physical conditions and climatic

factors

VI -20 Transportation of Hazardous waste

1 The transport of the hazardous wastes shall be in

accordance with the provisions of these rules and

the rules made by the Central Government under

the Motor Vehicles Act. 1988 and other guidelines

issued from time to time in this regard.

Transportation of the hazardous wastes

shall be in accordance with the provisions

of these rules and the rules made by the

Central Government under the Motor

Vehicles Act.1988 and other guidelines

issued from time to time.

2 The occupier shall provide the transporter with the

relevant information in Form 11, regarding the

hazardous nature of the wastes and measures to be

taken in case of an emergency and shall mark the

hazardous wastes containers as per Form 12.




3 In case of transport of hazardous wastes for final

disposal to a facility for treatment, storage and

disposal existing in a State other than the State

where the hazardous waste is generated, the

occupier shall obtain ‘No Objection Certificate’

from the State Pollution Control Board of both the

States.


4 In case of transportation of hazardous wastes

through a State other than the State of origin or

destination, the occupier shall intimate the

concerned State Pollution Control Boards before he

hands over the hazardous wastes to the transporter.


VI -21 Manifest system (Movement Document to be

used within the country only)

1 The occupier shall prepare six copies of the

manifest in Form 13 comprising of color code

indicated below and all six copies shall be signed

by the transporter:

Copy number

with color

code

(1)

Purpose

(2)

Copy1

(White)

To be forwarded by the

occupier to the State Pollution

Control Board or Committee.

Copy2

(Yellow)

To be carried by the occupier

after taking signature on it

form the transporter and the

rest of the four copies to be

carried by the transporter.

Copy3 (pink) To be retained by the operator

of the facility after signature.

Copy4

(orange)

To be returned to the

transporter by the operator of

facility/recycler after accepting

waste.

Copy5 (green) To be returned by the operator

of the facility to State

Pollution Control

Board/Committee after

Condition acceptable and six copies

manifest system shall be followed



treatment and disposal of

wastes.

Copy6 (blue) To be returned by the operator

of the facility to the occupier

after treatment and disposal of

hazardous materials/wastes

2 The occupier shall forward copy 1 (white) to the

State Pollution Control Board, and in case the

hazardous wastes is likely to be transported through

any transit State, the occupier shall prepare an

additional copy each for intimation to such State

and, forward the same to the concerned State

Pollution Control Board before he hands over the

hazardous wastes to the transporter.


3 No transporter shall accept hazardous wastes from

an occupier for transport unless it is accompanied

by copies3 to 6 of the manifest.


4 The transporter shall submit copies 3 to 6 of the

manifest duly signed with date to the operator of

the facility along with the waste consignment.


5 Operator of the facility upon completion of

treatment and disposal operations of the hazardous

wastes shall forward copy 5 (green) to the State

Pollution Control Board and copy 6 (blue) to the

occupier and the copy 3 (pink) shall be retained by

the operator of the facility.


Chapter VII

Miscellaneous

VII -22 Records and returns

1 The occupier generating hazardous wastes and

operator of the facility for disposal of hazardous

waste shall maintain records of such operations in

Form 3.

Disposal of hazardous waste records shall

be maintained in Form 3

2 The occupier and operator of a facility shall send

annual returns to the State Pollution Control Board

in Form 4.

Annual returns shall be sent to the State

Pollution Control Board in Form 4.

3 The State Pollution Control Board shall prepare an

inventory of the hazardous wastes within its

jurisdiction and compile other related information

like recycling of the hazardous wastes and

No action to the facility management



treatment and disposal of the hazardous wastes

based on the returns filed by respective occupier

and operator of the facility.

VII -23 Responsibility of Authorities

The Authority specified in column 2 of the

Schedule VII shall perform the duties as specified

in column 3 of the Schedule subject to the

provisions of these rules.

No action to the facility management

VII -24 Accident reporting and follow-up

Where an accident occurs at the facility or on a

hazardous waste site or during transportation of the

hazardous waste, the occupier or operator of the

facility or the transporter, as the case may be, shall

report immediately to the State Pollution Control

Board about the accident in Form14.

In case of accident report shall be sent to

the State Pollution Control Board in Form

14

VII- 25 Liability of occupier, transporter, operator of a

facility and importer

1 The occupier, importer, transporter and operator of

the facility shall be liable for all damages caused to

the environment or third party due to improper

handling of the hazardous wastes or disposal of the

hazardous wastes.


2 The occupier and the operator of the facility

shall be liable to pay financial penalties as

levied for any violation of the provisions under

these rules by the State Pollution Control

Board with the prior approval of the Central

Pollution Control Board.


VII -26 Appeal

1 Any person aggrieved by an order of suspension or

cancellation or refusal of authorization or its

renewal passed by the State Pollution Control

Board, may, within a period of thirty days from the

date on which the order is communicated to him,

prefer an appeal in Form15 to the Appellate

Authority comprising of the Environment Secretary

of the State.


2 Any person aggrieved by an order of suspension or

cancellation or refusal of registration or its renewal

passed by the Central Pollution Control Board,




may, within a period of thirty days from the date on

which the order is communicated to him, prefer an

appeal in Form15 to the Appellate Authority

comprising of the Secretary, to the Government of

India in the Ministry of Environment and Forests.

3 The Appellate Authority may entertain the appeal

after the expiry of the period of thirty days if it is

satisfied that the appellant was prevented by

sufficient cause from filing the appeal in time.


4 Every appeal filed under this rule shall be disposed

of within a period of sixty days from the date of its

filing.


CHAPTER 10

ENVIRONMENTAL

MANAGEMENT

PLAN



CHAPTER 10

SUMMARY AND CONCLUSION

10.1 Introduction

Management of pollution and the waste generated from the industries is always been a challenging task

faced by the country. As per EIA Notification S.O. No 1533 dated 14th September 2006 and subsequent

amendments the proposed project is falling under Project / Activity 7 (d) Common Hazardous Waste

Treatment, Storage and Disposal Facility (TSDFs), Category “A” and requires environmental clearance

from MOEFCC, New Delhi. The proposal was considered by the Expert Appraisal Committee in its 1st

meeting held during 22nd

December 2015 for issuing of the Terms of Reference (TOR) for undertaking

detailed EIA Study in accordance with the provisions of the EIA notification and subsequent

amendments. The MOEFCC has given Terms of Reference vide its letter No. F. No. 10-236/2015-IA.III

dated 28th January 2016.

At present in the Nalgonda region the hazardous waste generated by industrial activities, biomedical

waste generated by hospitals and e-waste generated by commercial, industrial and residential waste is

given to small time recyclers. The Proposed project will be designed to collect & treat all these different

types of waste on scientific basis under the following rules.

The Hazardous Wastes (Management, Handling and Trans-boundary Movement) Rules, 1989 and

its subsequent amendments.

The Bio-Medical Waste (Management & Handling) Rules, 1998 and subsequent amendments.

The Plastic Waste (Management & Handling) Rules, 2011 and subsequent amendments.

E-Waste (Management & Handling) Rules, 2011 and subsequent amendments.

The proposed Integrated Common Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, Disposal and Recycling Facility

at Kakkireni Village is in Ramannapeta Mandal in Nalgonda District of Telangana state mainly has four

waste disposal / recycling or recovery facilities such as Hazardous Waste TSDF, Renewable Energy and

Waste to Energy, Bio-medical waste disposal Facility, Alternative Fuel Recovery & Recycling Facilities.

The proposed treatment facilities will be developed in phase wise manner.

In Phase I secured land fill with a capacity of 548 TPD will be taken up along with other treatments units

like Stabilization (383 TPD), Biomedical waste (12.5 TPD - 50000 beds), E waste (82 TPD), spent

solvent recycling (27 KLPD), used oil recycling (54 KLPD), used lead acid batteries recycling (65 TPD),

Alternate fuel and raw material (55 TPD) are proposed to be handled. Where as in Phase II waste plastics

recycling (27 TPD), waste paper recycling (54 TPD) and incinerator (55 TPD). And in Phase III power

generation of 2 MW with using renewable energy and 2 MW with waste to energy plants are proposed.

The total area provided for the proposed project is around 74 Acres, out of which around 34.7 acre of land

is mainly utilized for Secured landfill, used for direct disposal of hazardous waste and as well the

stabilized hazardous waste after detoxification. An area of 23.7 Acres of land is used for greenbelt

development within the project site and along the peripheral boundary. The remaining 15.6 Acres of land

is used for chemical storage, waste storage, utilities, tyre wash, incinerator, biomedical plant setup along



with effluent treatment system and all type of recycling facilities. Around 2 acres of land is to be still

acquired out of total 74 acres of land proposed.

Water requirement for the project will be met through the Ground water or Gram Panchayat water supply

scheme. The execution of the TSDF project would be in three phases. Water requirement for all three

phases is 366 KLD. Out of which, in phase I water required is 109 KLD, in Phase II water required is 49

KLD and in Phase III water required is 208 KLD.

Power required for the project will be met from Telangana TRANSCO with a capacity of 1500 KVA and

for emergency purpose DG sets will be made available by respective units of proposed project

Around 700 liters of HSD would be stored at site for operating DG sets to meet emergency power

requirements for effluent treatment plant, utilities etc and also auxiliary fuel with a capacity of 20 KL per

month used for Incinerator.

Around 285 persons would be employed for the project out of which 65 are during construction phase and

220 will be in Operation phase (Phase wise). Work force will be employed from the nearby villages on

priority basis for operational and maintenance of the proposed project. Indirect employment expected due

to the present project will be around 50 persons for various support facilities.

10.2 Baseline Environmental Status

Field investigations were undertaken for collecting the existing baseline environment for Air, Water,

Noise, Soil, Ecological and Socio-economic Conditions. A study area of 10 Km radius from the project

site is identified to establish the present environmental conditions for the above environmental

components. The main aim of the EIA study is to identify the critical environmental attributes which will

be affected and have adverse impacts on the surrounding environment due to the proposed project. The

field data generation is undertaken during the winter season from December (2015) to February (2016).

Meteorology (Climate)

The metrological data is collected from the nearest IMD station at Nalgonda and also at site with the help

of automatic weather station. The pre dominant wind direction recorded is from South East (SE) closely

followed by North East (NE). Calm conditions prevailed for 12.32% of the total time. Average wind

speed observed for the winter season is around 2.48 m/s.

Air Quality

Ambient Air quality was monitored at 10 locations within the study area of the project site. The locations

were identified in downwind, cross wind and up wind directions. The air pollutants monitored are

Particulate Matter (PM10, PM2.5), Sulphur dioxide, Oxides of nitrogen, Ozone, Carbon Monoxide, Lead,

Nickel, Benzene, Benzo(a)Pyrene, Ammonia and Arsenic as per the standard MOEFCC guidelines and

results were compared with NAAQ/CPCB Standards.



The minimum and maximum levels of Particulate Matter < 2.5 microns are recorded in the range of 13.7

to 25.3 µg/m3, whereas the particulate matter <10 Microns are in the range of 44.0 to 56.3 µg/m3.

The sulphur dioxide concentrations within the study area observed are in the range of 11.2 to 16.3 µg/m3,

the oxides of nitrogen observed are in the range of 14.0 to 20.8 µg/m3, the ozone and carbon monoxide

observed are in the range of 11.7 to 18.2 µg/m3 and 126 to 638 µg/m

3 respectively and the benzene and

ammonia observed are in the range of 0.33 to 0.83 µg/m3 and 9.3 to 14.3 µg/m

3 respectively. The

observed air pollutants were well within the limits as per CPCB/NAAQ standards. The other parameters

viz. lead, nickel, arsenic and benzo (a) pyrene were also monitored in the study area and are found to be


Water Quality

Surface and Ground water samples were collected from different sources within the study area and

analyzed for all important physico-chemical and biological parameters to establish the quality of water

prevailing in the project surroundings. Around 13 ground water and 5 surface water samples were

collected.

The ground water is mainly from hand pumps, wells and bore wells used by the villages for domestic and

drinking purposes. The surface water collected from lake or pond and Musi River. The pH of ground

water observed is from 7.02 to 7.53 and in surface water it is from 6.85 to 7.36, the TDS level of GW is

from 339 to 1551 mg/l, whereas in surface water the levels are 967 to 1494 mg/l. The chloride

concentrations in GW is between 20 to 434 mg/l, whereas the surface water has a chloride values of 176

to 286 mg/l. The hardness observed in ground water is 233 to 688 mg/l and in surface water the hardness

found to be between 376 to 775 mg/l. Fluoride concentrations observed in GW is in the range of 1.5 to 2.4

mg/l and in surface water the fluoride content observed in between 0.5 to 0.7 mg/l. The general

characteristics of all the ground water samples collected in the region shows fairly good quality except

some levels of Hardness and fluoride observed to be slightly higher than the stipulated standards. The

basic treatment for fluoride will reduce the concentration levels within the limits and can be used for

consumption.

Noise Quality

Noise was monitored at 11 locations within the study area of the project site. The locations were

identified for assessment of existing noise level status, keeping in view of the land use pattern, residential

areas in villages, schools, bus stands, etc., day levels of noise monitored during 6 AM to 10 PM and in

night during 10 PM to 6 AM. The noise levels were monitored as per the Ambient Noise Standards of

residential and commercial area standards. The noise levels during the day are ranging in between 53.3 to

63.3 dB (A), whereas in night noise levels are ranging between 43.2 to 45.2 dB (A). The site is accessible

by a NH9 and Muthkur – Narketpally road.

The traffic survey carried out at Narketpally village towards Muthkur to Narketpally. The minimum level

of Traffic Survey at Muthkur – Narketpally Road is 53 PCU/H and whereas the maximum level of Traffic

Survey is 461 PCU/H. The total worst case baseline PCU/Hr is 461, total width of the road in meters

(Arterial Roads) PCU/Hr is 7 and as per the IRC: 106-1990 (PCU’s per hour).



Soil Quality

Soil Quality was monitored at 11 locations within the study area of the project site. The locations were

selected to assess the existing soil conditions representing various land use conditions and geological

features. The important physical, chemical parameter concentrations were determined from all the

samples.

The pH values in the study area are varying from 6.89 to 7.28, the electrical conductivity is varying from

36 to 242 µs/cm, the organic carbon is varying from 0.34 to 1.05 %, the available Nitrogen is varying

from 248 to 356 kg/ha, the available phophorus is varying from 4.8 to 11.6 kg/ha, and the available

pottasium is varying between 142 to 644 kg/ha.

Ecological Environment

A detailed study was done within 10 km radius area of the project site which includes, Compilation of

secondary data from published literature of Forest Division and Primary data generation through

systematic studies. The proposed area falls in the Southern Plateau and Hills Region characterized by

shallow, deep red loamy soil & sandy soil. The primary data was collected through visual observation of

species in the study area. Babul, Guava, Banyan tree etc., and Common species of Mammals like

Common hare, Monkey, Field Mouse, Stripped squirrel are commonly seen around the study area.

No Wildlife Sanctuaries or National parks exist in 10 km radius of the project site. The living species

which are endangered or threatened as per the IUCN Red list were not identified or observed in the core

zone or buffer zone of the project site. There will not be any adverse impact of the proposed project on

the terrestrial flora and fauna. The loss in flora will compensated by greenbelt development backed up

with a strong EMP.

Socio Economic Environment

The study area covers 36 villages in the 10 km radial distance from the periphery of the proposed project site

in Chityala, Ramanna Peta and Narkat palli Mandals of Nalgonda district. 70% of the sample households live

in Pucca house. Remaining 30% of the households shelter in kutcha houses.

In the field survey it has been reported that 100% of the households have electricity facility. agriculture sector

supports more than 80% of the population. Work participation rate in Kakkireni and surrounding villages is

around 1.1 in 2011. Majority of the working population is around 80% of the population was engaged in

activities like agriculture and allied services etc. The 10% engaged in the Microenterprises and remaining are

engaged in Daily Labour.

The socio-Economic study revealed that the youth in the project area are devoid of employment opportunities.

They can be a potential source of workers with minimum handholding and vocational education skills. The

youth have expressed their willingness to setting up of industries in the area as it provides them gainful

employment opportunities.





10.3 Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures

The proposed power plant may cause impact on the environment in two phases.

During Construction phase

During Operation phase

a) Impacts during construction phase

The possible construction activities that contribute to the environmental impacts are:

Dust Generation during leveling of earth

Dust generation due to the movement of vehicles on unpaved roads

Emission of pollutants from vehicular exhaust

Unloading of raw materials and removal of unwanted waste material from site

Accumulation of excavated earth material

Noise generation due to operation of construction equipment

The impacts due to construction activities are short term and are limited to the construction phase. The

impacts will be mainly on air quality, water quality, soil quality and socio-economics, necessary control

measures will be taken to minimize the impacts.

b) Impacts during operation phase

During the operation phase of the proposed project there would be impacts on the air quality, water

quality, Noise quality, Land environment and socio-economic aspects etc.

Impact on Air quality

The proposed project is a Hazardous waste management and the major source of pollution would be the

emissions from the stack. The important air pollutants generated from the proposed project are particulate

matter (PM), sulphur dioxide (SO2) and oxides of nitrogen (NOX).

The major air pollutants generated from the proposed project are given below:



To estimate the ground level concentration of air pollutants released from 30 m and 8 m height of the

stack provided for the incinerator and DG set, a study state dispersion model based on Gaussian Plume

(AERMOD Version 7.0.3) software is used to calculate the concentrations for PM, SO2 and NOx. The

incinerator has a stack with a diameter 0.6 m and releases the flue gas it in velocity of 22 m/s. The DG set

has a stack with a diameter 0.25 m and releases the flue gas it in velocity of 12 m/s. The SO2 and NOx

Emission rates estimated for incinerator and DG set are in the range of 0.02 to 9.5 g/s and 0.124 to 13.7

g/s respectively and PM emission rate for incinerator is 2.4 g/s. The result of dispersion modeling reveals

a maximum ground level concentration for PM is 3.4µg/m3, for SO2 is 9.5µg/m

3 and for NOx is

14.1µg/m3. The overall concentration including existing baseline status for PM is 59.7µg/m3, for SO2 is

25.8µg/m3 and for NOx is 34.9µg/m

3. Which are well within the stipulated standards of regulatory agency.




Following mitigation measures will be adopted to reduce the environmental impacts

The important dust suppression measures proposed will be regular water sprinkling on main haul




The duration of stockpiling will be as short as possible as most of the material will be used as

backfill material for the open cut trenches for road development

Temporary tin sheets of sufficient height (3m) will be erected around the site of dust generation or

all around the project site as barrier for dust control.


Plantation of 2 to 3 years old saplings, regular watering will be done, so that the area will be moist


To reduce the dust movement from civil construction site to the neighborhood the external part of


Impact on water quality

The water required for the proposed project shall be met through the Ground water or Gram Panchayat

water supply scheme. The possible sources of wastewater within the project site are:

i) Floor washings

ii) Leachate from landfill operations

iii) Sewage from Domestic Use

iv) Wastewater from Cooling Towers

v) Effluent from water treatment plant in Bio medical waste

vi) Blow downs from Boiler and Cooling Tower etc.



leachate generated at treatment, incineration are treated together (excluding domestic wastewater) in

incineration/ Forced evaporation/spraying on landfill. The domestic effluent generated will be treated in

septic tank followed by soak pit or portable STP and the treated water is used for greenbelt development.

The effluent generated from floor washings, recycling activity, etc will be collected in collection tank

followed by settling tank and the settled water is reused. The effluent from bio medical waste is treated in

ETP and recycling to incinerator or circulation back to system. The waste water generated from boiler and

cooling tower used in ash quenching and for greenbelt development purpose. There will not be any

wastewater discharge to any nearby water body and adopts the zero wastewater discharge concept.

Rain Water Harvesting and Storm Water Management




etc.).











Impact on Noise Levels

Any hazardous facility, in general, consists of several sources of noise pollution. The different sources of

noise pollution are mentioned below:

Induced draft & Forced draft fans

Diesel Generators

Cooling Towers

Frequent vehicular movement etc.,








generating sources.



Odor Control

The odor management is one of the issues in proposed project. The main aim is to minimize the number

of sources of odor generation which exist in site. To undertake direct management of odor generating
















Environmental Monitoring Program has been designed for assessing the efficiency of implementation of

Environment Management Plan and to take corrective measures in case of any degradation in the

surrounding environment.

Different activities involved in the proposed project and their impact on various environmental attributes

have been taken into account while designing a detailed environmental monitoring program.

Implementation of EMP and periodic monitoring is proposed to be carried out at plant level and area level

for the proposed waste management project allied activities like storage facilities, workshop, staff

canteen, etc. A comprehensive monitoring mechanism has been devised for monitoring of impacts due to

proposed project.

Cost towards investment for Environmental Management/Environmental Mitigation Measures will be

Rs.20.0 Crores and 54 Lakhs/annum will be the recurring cost

Plant level environmental protection measures like dust suppression, treatment and recycling of

wastewater, plantation and noise control in the plant premises, housekeeping, implementation of EMP and

Environmental Clearance conditions will be monitored by the plant authorities.

10.5 Risk Analysis

The principal objective of the risk assessment study is to identify and quantify the major hazards and the

risk associated with various operations of the proposed project, which may lead to emergency

consequences (disasters) affecting the public safety and health.

All necessary measures to minimize the risk due to the proposed project will be taken during design stage

and also during operation period viz, Fire & safety control measures, Emergency preparedness plan,

Disaster Management plan, etc.

10.6 Project Benefits

From the proposed project the major benefits, include improving the degraded environment by

establishing an Integrated Common Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, Disposal and Recycling

Facilities.

The proposed project facilitates better management of the industrial wastes.

It will be the showcase for other states for management of hazardous waste with additional

benefit of green and clean Environment.





potential






industries



the region

Reduction in the cost of transportation and subsequent traffic.

10.7 Environmental Management Plan

The Environmental Management Plan (EMP) is required to ensure a sustainable development of the plant

area and the surrounding areas of the plant. The EMP will be integrated in all the major activities of the

project, with clearly defined policies, to ensure that the ecological balance of the area is maintained and

the adverse effects are minimized. EMP requires multidisciplinary approach with mitigation,

management, monitoring and institutional measures to be taken during implementation and operation, to

eliminate adverse environmental impacts or reduce them to acceptable levels. In order to ensure

sustainable development in the study area; it needs to be an all-encompassing plan for which the plant

authorities, government, regulating agencies, and the population of the study area need to extend their

cooperation and contribution.

The mitigation measures are planned for construction and operation phases and the overall management

plan helps to improve the supportive capacity of the receiving bodies. The EMP aims to control pollution

at the source level to the possible extent with the available and affordable technology followed by the

standard treatments before getting discharged. The recommended mitigation measures will synchronize

the economic development of the study area with the environmental protection of the region.

10.8 Conclusions

The proposed integrated hazardous waste treatment storage, disposal and recycling facility at Nalgonda

will be executed in an area of 74 acres with various treatment systems which includes direct landfilling,

stabilization, biomedical waste, E waste, incineration and all type of waste recycling facilities. The

expected project cost for the facility is around 260 Crores.

The air pollutant emissions from stacks and other fugitive operations are treated in a bag filter system

followed by reducing gaseous pollutant concentrations by providing wet scrubbing system as well as

multiple effect evaporator systems.

The water requirement for the entire operations is around 366 KLD and the waste water generated is

treated by physic-chemical methods to achieve the regulatory standards.

The environmental management plan will consists of multidisciplinary approach with mitigation,

management, monitoring and institutional measures to be taken up during implementation and operation

to minimize adverse environmental impacts to reduce them to acceptable levels.



The benefits of the proposed project mainly to handle all the untreated hazardous waste from various

industries in Nalgonda & surrounding districts of Nalgonda and to provide a suitable treatment facility to

dispose off in a scientific manner. The project also eliminates the captive hazardous waste units existing

within some of the major industries and provides a common Treatment Storage and Disposal Facility

which is relatively easier and economically viable. The project also improves better occupational health

and safety at individual industry level and prevention of natural resource contamination thereby

improving overall environmental status of the region.

The EIA report covers all the baseline status related to various environmental components like air, water,

noise, soil, biological and socio-economic conditions within the project study region. The predicted and

anticipatory & pollution level increase is very minimal due to the proposed treatment storage and disposal

facility and all the mitigation and monitoring mechanisms will be undertaken to safeguard the

environment within the project region.

CHAPTER 11

SUMMARY & CONCLUSION



CHAPTER 11

DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS 11.1 Ramky Group

Ramky, founded in the year 1994, today spans into a specialist multi-disciplinary organization focused in

areas of Civil, Environment & Waste Management Infrastructure with specific emphasis on ‘Public

Private Partnership’ Projects. The corporate office of the group is located at Hyderabad and the regional

offices are located at Delhi, Mumbai, Ahmadabad, Bangalore, Chennai, Bhopal and Kolkata. The major

companies of the group are 1) Ramky Infrastructure Ltd, 2) Ramky Enviro Engineers Ltd, 3) Ramky

Estates & Farms Pvt. Ltd. and 4) Smilax Laboratories Ltd.

11.2 Ramky Enviro Engineers Limited

Ramky Enviro Engineers Limited (REEL) is the consulting arm of the group provides vital function of

effectively providing the backward linkage to the project implementation function in the form of

concepts, strategies, structuring, planning and designing infrastructure projects. Ramky is a multi and

cross disciplinary team of professionals, offering solutions at each cycle of a project. Consultancy

Division is one of the departments of REEL. The services offered by the consultancy division are given

below.

11.2.1 Consultancy Services

Facilitating in obtaining Environmental Clearances from MOEFCC, New Delhi and SEAC’s from

various states

Obtaining Consent for Establishment & Consent for Operation from State Pollution Control

Boards Preparing of Environmental Impact Assessment Reports.

Environmental Audits to help industries to recycle and reuse resources and plan for low polluting

technologies.

Risk Assessment Studies for hazardous chemical storage & Process in order to devise viable

onsite and offsite emergency plans.

Identification and evaluation of hazardous Waste disposal sites.

Preparation of Detailed Project Reports of MSW, HWMP, BMW

Environmental management systems, training, documentation and implementation as per ISO:

14001:1996 Standards.

Characterization and quantification of biomedical waste, municipal solid waste and design of

disposal facilities.

Environmental management strategies to mitigate adverse impacts arising out of developmental

activities.

Effluent treatment plant design after thorough review of process, reaction mass balance and

treatability studies of effluents

Post project Monitoring network design

Consultancy Services for setting up environmental laboratories

Design of Sewage treatment plants

Design of Waste treatment plants

Health and socio- economic surveys



Resettlement and rehabilitation plans

Systems development for ISO:9000,OSHAS:18000,NABL,ISO:17025 Standards

11.2.2 Laboratory services

Analysis of air samples for ambient air quality and those collected from industrial sources for

both routine and industry specific pollutants

Water and wastewater analysis for important parameters as for standard methods, including

pesticides and poly hydro carbons

Solid and hazardous waste analysis including TCPL tests

Monitoring of noise levels at source and in ambient air

Development of new methods and quality assurances of results obtained

Design and settings of laboratories

11.2.3 Training services

Monitoring of environmental parameters –air, water, noise, soil etc…

Environmental impact assessments

Effluent treatment plant operations and maintenance

Sewage treatment plant operations and maintenance

ISO 9000&14000, OHSAS 18000 Awareness, documentations, internal auditors

Establishment environmental laboratories

Pollution control in industries

Biomedical waste management

11.2.4 Field Services

Site selection and suitability studies for settling up of Industries

Ambient Air Quality monitoring for all pollutants

Noise Level Monitoring

Meteorological data collection as per CPCB norms

Stack Emission monitoring for all pollutants and assessment of efficiency of control equipment

Water, Wastewater and Soil Sample Collection

Assessment of efficiency of ETP and analyzing critical parameters of field.

Flora and Fauna assessment through sectorial studies and damage assessment due to development

projects

Damage Assessment studies in case of oil well blowouts, major industrial accidents, etc.

11.2.5 Treatment Plant Services

Water Treatment Plants-design, construction, operation and maintenance

Efficiency studies of Effluent Treatment plants

Design, construction, operation and maintenance of ETP

Up gradation/modification of ETP

Sewage Treatment Plants-design, construction, operation and maintenance along with mechanical

equipment erection

Supply of mechanical equipment



11.2.6 Solid Waste Management Services

Industrial Waste Management

Hazardous Waste Management

Municipal Solid Waste Management

Biomedical Solid Waste Management

The Company has over 2000 employees in various sectors of which over 600 employees are post

graduates and about 15 employees are having PhD’s.

ANNEXURE 1

Action plan for Management of Excessive Leachate Generation

during Monsoon Period



Annexure 1

Landfill Protection Measures for Monsoon period

It is to ensure complete protection and covering of all the leachate generating sources during monsoon.

The following activities as a minimum should be undertaken before on set of monsoon.

Cover the operating area of the landfill temporarily during monsoon with proper HDPE Liner (1.0

mm Thick)

Provide proper gutter/drainage system to drain off rain water fallen on the waste storage sheds.

Ensure separation of leachate and storm water drains carefully

Ensure cleaning of all the sludge/dirt/soil in drainages (remove blockages) for proper run off

Small operating area can be kept available for disposing waste during non rainy days, to avoid or

reduce storage of waste in the temporary storage shed.

during monsoon

Keep all the dewatering pumps (diesel and electrical) ready including standby pumps

Keep umbrellas, rain coats, gum boots and other personal protective equipment for the staff

Ensure proper insulation of all electrical wire and avoid loose wires.

Avoid mixing rain water with leachate if any.

Cover all the empty waste carrying containers, drums etc., to avoid generation of leachate

Avoid parking vehicles in the rain.

environmental impact assessment › publichearings › twmp, kakkireni (v), nalgo… ·...

Documents